A . .. 




Gass PC^IO^ 
Book .^ ^4- 



l^LC 



PROGRESSIVE 

( 

FRENCH GRAMMAR 

AND EXERCISES, 

ON THE BASIS OF 

LEVIZAC'S FRENCH GRAMMAR: 

AND FUHTHER COMPRISINa, 



ON A FLAN ENTIRELY ORIGINAL^ 



I. A Table of all the Irre^lar and 
Defective Verbs in the French Lan- 
guage, conjugated in such Tenses 
as are liabl^o Irregularities. And, 



II. A Terminational Vocabulary, 
comprised in Twelve Pages, where- 
by the Gender of every Noun may be 
promptly and certainly determined. 



BY A. G. COLLOT, 

PROFESSOR OF THE FRENCH LANGOAOE IN THE UNIVERSITY OF OXFORD, ENGLAND; 

AUTHOR OF THE " PROGRESSIVE FRENCH SCHOOL SERIES ;" AND LATK 

TEACHER OF THE FRENCH LANGUAGE IN PHILADELPHIA. 



PHILADELPHIA: 

S. C. HAYES, 439 MARKET STREET. 

T. ELLWOOD ZELL, PUBLISHER. 

1860. 



W^x l^^Jh^M^ ,.,^^ ^^ 






a KVITol yXvK£(f.— Aristotu 



i?-. 3 



By 

MAY 86 WW 



Entered according to the act of Congress, in the year 1844, by Jamet 
Kay, Jun. &. Brother, in the office of the clerk of the District Court of th« 
United States in and for the Eastern District of Pennsylvania. 




PRE'FACE. J 



The Author, in the preparation of this volume, owes 
much to Levizac's French Grammar, which he has assumed 
as its basis. The work of M. Levizac is characterized by 
so many excellencies, that it is much to be regretted that 
it has faults which materially detract from its usefulness. 
It is arranged with little regard to order, is extremely diffuse, 
and contains much matter which is either entirely out of 
place in a Grammar, or too philosophical for the tender 
mind of the youthful scholar. Besides which, it has 
treated the two most important objects of a French 
Grammar, viz. the Genders of Nouns, and the Verbs, the 
former superficially and unsatisfactorily, and the latter in 
a manner perplexing, and even erroneous. 

The Author has endeavoured to give proper arrange- 
ment to the valuable materials in Levizac's Grammar : he 
has omitted such portions of it as he deemed irrelevant, 
or above the comprehension of learners — at the same time 
that he has retained every thing of practical value ; and 
has introduced such improvements and corrections as 
were required by the decisions of the best modern authori- 
ties. He claims as his own exclusively, the Terminational 
Vocabulary of Genders ; the Table of the Irregular and 
Defective Verbs ; and large additions to and improvements 
in the Exercises, 

The object of the Terminational Vocabulary of 
Genders is to enable the scholar, by a method certain 
and rapid, to fix permanently in the memory, the Gen- 
ders of the French Nouns ; without a good knowledge 
of which, it is impossible to speak or write the French 
language with propriety. In the English language there 
are three genders, — which are called masculine, feminine 



vi PREFACE. 



and neuter : under the first are classed all males, under 
the second all females, and under the third all inanimate 
things. The French have but two genders : the masculine 
and the feminine. It is as easy in French as in English 
to class the males and the females ; but M^hen the pupil 
comes to inanimate things, a difficulty of great importance 
meets him. As the French have no neuter gender, they 
are obliged to make what would be neuter in English 
either masculine or feminine. A child learning French 
can see no reason why a chair or a table should be called 
feminine, or why a hinge or a nail should be termed mas- 
culine ; and yet they are so. 

Many attempts have been made to furnish a system of 
rules to determine, either by signijicatian^ or by termina- 
tion, the genders of inanimate objects in French. But so 
perplexing and impracticable have they been found, that 
many eminent writers and teachers (among whom may 
be mentioned Boyer, the author of the French Dictionary, 
and the celebrated Cobbett, the author of the French 
Grammar) have recommended students, as the only me- 
thod of acquiring an adequate knowledge of the Genders 
of French Nouns, to go completely through the French 
dictionary, and copy out all the nouns, affixing the gender 
to each. An Herculean labour! 

The author coincides in opinion with these eminent 
men, as to the entire insufficiency of every system of 
rules hitherto devised for acquiring a knowledge of the 
Genders ; but he has not deemed it possible that any pupil 
could spare the time to travel over so immense a volume 
as the French Dictionary, in pursuit of that knowledge. 
The author has therefore done it for him. He has pre- 
pared, from actual examination of the dictionary, an Al- 
phabetical Vocabulary of all the Masculine and Feminine 
Terminations in the French language ; and has placed in 
one Table all the Masculine, and in another all the Femi- 
nine Terminations, with tlie Exceptions in juxtaposition. 
The whole is comprised in the short space of twelve 
pages; and by far the greater portion of the Terminations 
have none, or at most but two Exceptions. The Student 
has therefore presented to him, in small compass, a mass 



PREFACE. vii 



of knowledge which is entirely within the reach of a mind 
of the most ordinary ability ; and he will be inexcusable, 
should he fail to avail himself of it. 

The Table of Irregular and Defective Verbs is 
comprised in two Sub-Tables. The first contains a mo- 
del of every variety of Irregular or Defective verb, con- 
jugated in all the tenses which are liable to irregularities, 
and so arranged that the eye takes in each Verb at a 
glance. The second comprises all the remaining Irre- 
gular and Defective Verbs in the French language, with 
the name of the model verb of each, and the page at which 
that model will be found in the preceding sub-table. 

M. Levizac has divided the verbs of the second conju- 
gation into four, and those of the fourth conjugation into 
five branches, and, considering them all as regular, has 
given a model verb for each — whereby the one conju- 
gation has four, and the other five model verbs. Tliis ar- 
rangement has been found most perplexing to the young 
student; and even to grown persons of sound judgment. 
The Author's plan has been to give only on« verb as 
a model, in each of these conjugations ; and he has con- 
sidered as irregular all those verbs which do not conform 
to the model, and has accordingly placed them in the 
table of Irregular and Defective Verbs. The Author be- 
lieves that those engaged in tuition will best understand 
the value of this arrangement ; and he flatters himself that 
the simplicity, perspicuity and conciseness of his table of 
the Irregular and Defective Verbs will not pass unnoticed. 

The Author avails himself of the opportunity here af- 
forded him of urging on teachers to accustom their pupils 
to conjugate the verbs from the primitive tenses. These 
are but five in number; and as every other tense of the 
verb is derived from one of these, it is evident that ^ce 
words will lead to the conjugation of the whole verb. 
This method, which is stricdy inductive, will enable the 
pupil, from infallible premises, to guide himself througli 
the intricacies of the French verb, a thorough knowledge 
of M^hich, in the language of a popular writer, is one-third 
of the acquisition of the language 



viii PREFACE. 

The Exercises have been made very copious; and ex 
emplify, in a progressive order of difficulty, all the nicetier 
of the French language. In many instances in these Ex- 
ercises, the English and French might have been made u 
conform more literally to each other; but it was deemec 
of importance to preserve the peculiarities of each lan- 
guage, so that the scholar, by comparing them, mighi 
acquire a practical familiarity with French idiomatic ex- 
pressions, and also learn how to express those of his own 
language in correct French.* Throughout the Exercises 
in the First Part, the genders of new nouns have been 
marked ; but in those of the Second Part, which treats of 
Syntax, the pupil is expected to ascertain the Genders by 
the Terminational Vocabulary already spoken of. 

Great pains have been taken to render this Grammar 
iucid in its typographical arrangements. In the table of 
the Irregular and Defective Verbs, the advantages which 
have been derived from attention to this particular will be 
apparent at a glance. The conjugations of the regular 
verbs have been printed in a compact manner, in order 
that the learner might embrace each at one view. The 
simple tenses have been placed in the left, and their re- 
spective compound tenses in the right column, immedi- 
ately opposite to them ; and each person of a tense occupies 
but one line of a column. While, in other editions of 
Levizac, the affirmative form of the verb avoir occupies 
seven pages ; the four forms of the same verb are given in 
this Grammar in four pages and a half. In the exercises, 
the lines are placed at proper distances apart; the words 
are separated from each other by a greater space than or- 
dinary ; and each English word or phrase is placed precisely 
above its corresponding French. All the Rules in the 
Grammar have been numbered ; and advantage has been 

* In the Author's " Progressive Ixterlixear Frexch 
Reader,'"' which is to be studied simultaneously with this Gram- 
mar, the Pupil is made familiar not only with the meaning of each 
idiomatic expression that occurs, but also of each word of which it 
consists, and thus obtains information which will afford him much aa- 
tistance in his preparation of these exercises. 



PREFACE. 



taken of this facility of reference, in the Exercises in the 
Second Part, to require the pupil to make his own appli- 
cation of each Rule, instead of applying it for him. 

Such explanations and instructions as are necessary for 
the use of the Grammar, have been given in Notes at the 
places where they are required. 

For the use of Teachers, Parents, and those who may 
be studying French without Instructor, the author has 
prepared a Key to the Exercises in this Grammar, 
which may be obtained from the Publishers of the Gram- 
mar, or other Booksellers. 

This Grammar and the Key terminate the Author's Se- 
ries of Elementary French School Books. The whole, in 
Six Volumes, furnish a complete course of study of the 
French, both as a written and spoken language; and are 
believed to point out the means, by the shortest routes, 
whereby the Student may attain the object he has in view 
— the speedy and thorough acquisition of the elegant and 
useful accomplishments of speaking, reading and writing 
the French language. For an account of them, the reader 
is referred to the advertisement in front of this Grammar. 

This work has now assumed its permanent form; and 
will not henceforth be subjected to alterations of any de- 
scription. 



CONTENTS. 



INTRODUCTION : being a Brief Explanation of the Parts 

of Speech 15 

FRENCH GRAMMAR. 

FRENCH ALPHABET, with the Old and New Pronun- 

ciation 24 

FRENCH SOUNDS , 25 

The Vowel Sounds 25 

The Diphthongs 26 

The Consonants 26 

ACCENTUATION AND PUNCTUATION 29 

GENDERS OF FRENCH NOUNS 30 

GEJfBEBS BT SlGKIFICATlOU" 30 

Masculine by Signification 31 

Feminine by Signification 31 

Genders by Termixatiojt 31 

Terminational Vocabulary 82 

Table of Masculine Terminations 32 

Table of Feminine Terminations 40 

List of all the Nouns which are Masculinb in one 

Signification and Feminine in another 45 

INTRODUCTION TO THE EXERCISES 47 

Of the Article 47 

Of the Article, and the Prepositions a and de 48 

Of a and de, and the Demonstrative Adjective 49 

Of Elision 50 

Of the Words which are spelled alike in both Languages, 

or which differ only in their Terminations 51 

(x) 



PART I. 
THE PARTS OF SPEECH. 

CHAPTER I. 

OF THE SUBSTANTIVE, OR NOUN 53 

CHAPTER n. 

OF THE ARTICLE 55 

CHAPTER III. 

OF THE ADJECTIVE 57 

Of the qualificative Adjective 58 

Of the Formation of the Feminine 61 

List of Adjectives with Irregular Feminines 63 

Of the Formation of the Plural 65 

Of the Determinative Adjective • • • • 66 

Agreement of the Adjective writh the Substantive 69 

Numbers: Cardinal, Ordinal, Collective, Adverbial, Distribu- 
tive and Proportional 70 

CHAPTER IV. 

OF THE PRONOUN 72 

Section I. — Of the Personal Pronouns 72 

Section II. — Of the Possessive Pronouns 75 

Section III. — Of the Relative Pronouns 76 

Section IV. — -Of the Absolute Pronouns 78 

Section V. — Of the Demonstrative Pronouns 79 

Section VI. — Of the Indefinite Pronouns 81 

CHAPTER V. 

OF THE VERB 82 

Of Conjugations 83 

Conjugation of the Auxiliary Verb Avoir 84 

1. Affirmative Form 84 

2. Negative Form 85 

3. Interrogative Form 87 

4. Negative-and-Interrogative Form 88 

xi 



xii CONTENTS. 

Conjugation of the Auxiliary Verb Etre 90 

First Conjugation — in ER 93 

Observations on Verbs of the First Conjugation 95 

Second Conjugation — in IR 97 

Observations on Verbs of the Second Conjugation 98 

Third Conjugation— in OIR 100 

Remarks on the Tiiird Conjugation , 101 

Fourth Conjugation— in i2£ 102 

Of the Neuter Verbs 105 

Of the Phoxominal Verbs , 1 06 

Conjugation of the Pronominal Verb Se Lever 107 

1. Affirmative Form 107 

2. Negative Form 109 

3. Interrogative Form 109 

4. Negative-and-Interrogative Form 109 

Of the Passive Verbs Ill 

Of the Impeb 805^ al Verbs Ill 

Conjugation of the Impersonal Verb Neiger 112 

Conjugation of the Impersonal Verb Y Avoir 113 

Of the Formation of Texses 115 

Table of the Termination of the Simple Tenses of the Four 

Conjugations 116 

Of the iRREGriiR AXD Defective Verbs 117 

Table of the Irregular and Defective Verbs — arranged ac- 
cording to their respective Conjugations 121 

List of all the Irregular and Defective Verbs in the French 
Language not contained in the foregoing Table — ar- 
ranged according to their respective Conjugations. ... 133 

CHAPTER VI. 

OP THE PARTICIPLE 149 

Of the Participle Present 149 

Of the Participle Past 151 

Of the Participle Past accompanied by the veib Etre 152 



CONTENTS. xiii 

Of the Participle Past accompanied by the verb Avoir, 
and followed or preceded by its Object Direct, or Indirect. 153 

Of the Participle Past of Impersonal Verbs , 154 

Of the Participle Past of Pronominal Verbs 154 

CHAPTER VII. 
OF THE ADVERB 155 

CHAPTER VIII. 

OF THE PREPOSITION 158 

Of Prepositions of the First Class 159 

Of Prepositions of the Second Class 160 

Of Prepositions of the Third Class 160 

CHAPTER IX. 

OF THE CONJUNCTION 161 

Of Conjunctions of the First Class 161 

Of Conjunctions of the Second Class 1*62 

Of Conjunctions of the Third Class *iQZ 

CHAPTER X. 
OF THE INTERJECTION 164 



PART IT. 
SYNTAX. 

CHAPTER I. 

OF THE SUBSTANTIVE 165 

CHAPTER II. 

OF THE ARTICLE 167 

CHAPTER III. 

OF THE ADJECTIVE 170 

Of the Qualificative Adjective 1 70 

Of the Determinative Adjective.. 173 

;CHAPTER IV. 

OF THE PRONOUN 175 

Section I. — Of the Personal Pronouns 175 

Section II. — Of the Possessive Pronouns 180 



XIV CONTENTS. 

Section III. — Of the Kelative Pronouns 1 

Section IV . — Of the Absolute Pronouns 1 

Section V. — Of the Demonstrative Pronouns • . . . . 1 

Section VI. — Of the Indefinite Pronouns 1 

CHAPTER V. 

OF THE VERB lo» 

Agreement of the Verb with the Subject 188 

Regimen of Verbs 190 

Use of Moods and Tenses 193 

Of the Indicative and its Tenses 193 

Of the Conditional, and its Tenses 195 

Of the Imperative 195 

Of the Subjunctive, and its Tenses 195 

Of the Infinitive 197 

CHAPTER VI. 

OF CHE PARTICIPLE 201 

CHAPTER VII. 

OF THE ADVERB ^. 203 

CHAPTER VIII. 

OF THE PREPOSITION. 205 

CHAPTER IX. 

OF THE CONJUNCTION Que 205 

PROMISCUOUS EXERCISES. 

Ths Death of Adsastxts Fenelon 206 

The QuESTioif s left bt Mihos Fenehn 210 

Th« Tbaitskigratioks of Isdub Barbauld 2 W 



INTRODUCTION; 



A BRIEF EXPLANATION OF THE PARTS OF SPEECH. 



Words are articulate sounds, which we make use of to 
express our ideas. There are, in French, ten kinds of 
words : namely, the Substantive or Noun, the Article, the 
Adjective, the Pronoun, the Verb, the Participle, the Adverb, 
the Preposition, the Conjunction, and the Interjection. 

Words, considered as sounds, are formed by Letters and 

Syllables. 

Letters are divided into Vowels and Consonants. The 
Vowels are ; a, e, i, o, w, y : the Consonants are ; 5, c, df 
/? g^ h^ ji k, ?, ni, n, p. q^ r, s, t, u, a;, z. 

A Vowel is an articulate sound, that can be perfectly ut- 
tered without the help of any other sound. 

A Consonant is an articulate sound, which cannot be 
perfectly uttered without the help of a Vowel. 

A Syllable is a sound, either simple or compound, pro- 
nounced by a single impulse of the voice, and constituting 
a Word, or part of a Word : as, an, year ; ww, one ; a-mi 
friend. 

A Diphthong is a coalition of two sounds, which are 
uttered by a single impulse of the voice : as, bien^ well ; 
owi, yes, 

(15) 



16 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

A word of One Syllable is termed a Monosyllable ; a 
word of Two Syllables, a Dissyllable ; a word of Three 
Syllables, a Trisyllable ; and a word of Four or more Syl- 
lables, a Polysyllable. 
• 

A Sentence is an assemblage of Words, forming com- 
plete sense : as, Dieu est juste, God is just. 

Sentences are of two kinds : Simple, and Compound. 

A Simple Sentence has in it but one subject, one verb, 
and one object or attribute : as, la vie est courte, life is 
short. 

A Compound Sentence consists of two or more simple 
sentences connected together : as, Dieu recompensera les 
bons, et punira les mediants; God will reward the good, 
and punish the wicked. 

The subject (nominative) is the thing or person chiefly 
spoken of; the verb expresses the action, affirmed or de- 
nied of it ; and the object (accusative) is the thing or per- 
son affected by such action. Thus, in the following sen- 
tence, Dieu punit les mechants^ God punishes the w icked 
— God is the subject; the action that proceeds from God is 
affirmed by the verb punishes; and the object upon which 
it falls is the wicked. 

The Substantive, or Noun. The Substantive is a 
word which represents a person or a thing that exists in 
nature; a&, Aomme, man ; arire, tree; Zirre, book; or which 
has its existence in the mind ; as, vertu, virtue ; esperancey 
hope; courage, courage. 

• 
There are two kinds of Substantives : the Substantive 
Proper, or proper name ; and the Substantive Common. 

The proper name is that which is applied to a particular 
person or thing : as, Annihal, Paris. 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 17 



The Substantive Common is that which belongs to a 
whole class of objects : as, arhre^ t-ee. 

Number. There are two Numbers : the Singular, and 
the Plural. 

The Singular expresses but one object: as, une chaise^ 
a chair; une iable^ a table. 

The Plural signifies more objects than one : as, des 

chaises,) chairs ; des tables^ tables. 

Gender. There are only two Genders: the Masculine, 
and the Feminine. 

The Masculine belongs to the male kind : asj un honime^ 
a man ; un lion^ a lion. 

The Feminine belongs to the female kind : as, une femme^ 
a woman ; une lionne^ a lioness. 

This distinction has, through imitation, been extended 
to all substantives : thus, un livre^ a book, is masculine ; 
une chaise, a chair, is feminine. 

Cases. Cases express the different relations of one 
thing to another. 

To express these different relations, the Greeks and Ro- 
mans made use of different terminations of the substantive; 
such as, ordo, the order, Pordre; ordinis, of the order, de 
Pordre; ordini, to the order, a Pordre, &c. The termi- 
nations thus varied are called cases; and all the nouns, 
which, in the variations of their cases, have the same end 
ing, are called of the same declension. 

The French, English, Italian, and other modern lan- 
guages, do not admit of any variation in the terminations 
of their nouns ; and, consequently, the nouns of these lan- 
guages, having but one termination in the singular, and 

A* 2 



18 CULLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

another in the plural, are supplied with prepositions pre- 
fixed : as, pierre, stone ; de pierre, of stone ; a la pierre 
to the stone ; en pierre, in stone ; avec la pierre, with tho 
stone. 

The Article. The Article is a word prefixed to sub- 
stantives, to determine the extent of their signification : as, 
le soleil luit, the sun shines. 

The French article is Ze, for the masculine singular; la, 
for the feminine singular ; and les, for the plural of both 
genders. 

The article is subject to Elision and Contmction. 

The Elision of the article, is the omitting of the e in le, 
and the a in la, wlien they precede a noun beginning with 
a vowel, or h mute : as, V argent, the money; /' liistoire, 
the history. 

Contraction is the compression of two words into one. 
It takes place when the preposition a, or de^ precedes the 
article, in the following cases : instead of putting de le be- 
fore a masculine singular, beginning with a consonant, or 
h aspirated, du must be employed ; instead of a le, au must 
be used ; and before the plural of both genders, de les is 
changed into des, and a les into aux: as, du roi, of the 
kmg; an roi, to the king; des rois, of the kings; aux rois, 
to the kings. 

The Adjective. The Adjective is a word which ex- 
presses the quality of the substantive : as, bon p'ere, good 
father ; bonne mere, good mother. 

In French, the adjective takes the gender and number of 
the substantive to which it relates. 

The Pronoux. A Pronoun is a word used instead of 
a noun, to avoid the too frequent repetition of tlie noun : 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 19 

as, Pierre est sorti^ il reviendra hicntot; Peter is out, he 
will soon return. 

There are several kinds of pronouns : as, the Personal, 
Possessive, Relative, Absolute, Demonstrative, and Inde- 
finite. 

The Verb. The Verb expresses the action, or the state 
of the subject : as, D'leu punira les mediants^ God will 
punish the wicked ; ma sceur repose, my sister reposes. 

• There are five kinds of Verbs : the Active, Passive, Neu- 
ter, Pronominal, and Impersonal. 

The Verb Active expresses an action performed by the 
subject, and has a regimen direct : as, f aime mon pere^ J 
love my father. 

The Verb Passive expresses an action received by the 
subject : as, mon pere est aime de moi^ my father is loved 
by me. 

The Verb Neuter expresses also an action, but has no 
direct regimen : as, je vais en Italie^ I am going to Italy. 

The Pronominal Verb is that which is conjugated 
through all the tenses with two personal pronouns : as, je 
mejlatte^ I flatter myself 

The Impersonal Verb is used only in the third person 
singular : as, /'/ pleut, it rains. 

The Verb has Numbers, Persons, Tenses, and Moods. 

There are two Numbers in Verbs; the Singular, and 
Plural : as, je chanie^ 1 sing ; nous chanions, we sing. 

There are three persons in each number. The first is 
the person who speaks : as, je pense, I think ; nous pen- 
sons^ we think 



20 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

The second is the person spoken to : as, tu penses, thou 
ihinkest ; vous pensez^ you think. 

The third is the person spoken of: as, il or elle pense, 
he or she thinks ; Us or elles pensent^ they think. 

Tense is the distinction of time, and admits only of 
Three Parts : tlie Present, Past, and Future. 

The Past, and Future, being composed of many diffe- 
rent instants, admit of various degrees of anteriority ana 
posteriority. The Present admits of no division. 

The Present represents an action or event as passing at 
the time in which it is mentioned: as, je vois^ J see; il 
vienty he comes. 

The Present Tense likewise expresses a character or 
quality at present existing : as, c' est un habile homme, he 
is an able man ; c' est une femme aimahle^ she is an amia- 
ble woman. 

In animated historical narrations, this tense is some- 
times substituted for the preterit : as, il envahit le ierri- 
toire des paisiOles habitants, fait un immense butin, qu^ il 
partage entre ses soldats, &c. ; he invades the territory of 
the peaceable inhabitants, takes immense booty, which he 
divides amongst his soldiers, &c. 



There are Five Tenses to express the Past: the Imper- 
fect, Preterit-definite, Preterit-indefinite, Preterit-anterior, 
and Pluperfect. 

The Imperfect expresses a present, with respect to 
something past: as, f entrais au moment oil vous sortiez, 
I came in at the moment you were going out. Or, it ex- 
presses something past, without fixing the time of its dura- 
uon : a.s, CSsar ctait un habile general, Csesar was an able 
general. 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 21 

The Preterit-definite marks that a thing took place at a 
time completely past: as, f ecrlvis hier a Rome, I wrote 
yesterday to Rome. 

The Preterit-indefinite expresses an action as having 
taken place at a time which is neither precise nor determi- 
nate: as, il w? a fait un vrai plaisir en venant me voir, he 
has given me real pleasure hy coming to see me. Or, at 
a time which is not absolutely past : as, f ai ecrit au- 
jourd^hui, I have written to-day. 

The Preterit-anterior expresses an action as having taken 
place just before another, at a time which is past: as, quand 
f eus lu, je partis; when 1 had read, 1 set out. 

The Pluperfect expresses one action as having taken 
place at any period antecedent to another action equally 
past : as, J' avais Jini quand vons vintes, I had finished 
when you came. 

The Future has two tenses : the FuturC'absolute, and 
Future-anterior. 

The Future-absolute expresses that an action will take 
place at a time which does not yet exist: as, f irai demain 
a la campagne, I shall go to-morrow to the country. 

The Future-anterior expresses an action that will take 
place at a time anterior to another action : as, quand f au- 
raijini^je sortirai; when 1 shall have done, I will go out. 
Or, to a time to come : as, f aurai jini demain, I shall 
have done to-morrow. 

Mood consists in the change which the verb undergoes, 
to signify various intentions of the mind. 

There are five Moods : the Indicative, Conditional, Im- 
perative, Subjunctive, and Infinitive 

The Indicative mark^ the affirmation in a positive and 



22 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

absolute manner: as, p ajpjprends^ I am learning-; je voya- 
ger ai^ I will travel. As it comprehends the three divisions 
of time, its tenses, which are eight in number, have been 
above explained. 

The Conditional is the mood which affirms on condi- 
tions : as, je le ferais, si je pouvais; 1 would do iu if I 
could. 

The Imperative mood is used for commanding, exhort- 
ing, entreating, or reproving: as, sortez, get out; restons, 
let us stay. 

The Subjunctive mood expresses a subordination to 
what precedes : as,^e voudrais qv? il liit, I wish he would 
read. 

The Infinitive mood expresses a thing in a general and 
unlimited manner, without any distinction of number or 
person : as, agir^ to act ; etre crainl^ to be feared. 

The Participle. The Participle is a part of the verb, 
which partakes of the properties both of a verb and of an 
adjective: of a verb, as it has its signification and regimen; 
of an adjective, as it expresses the quality of a person or 
thing. 

There are two participles : the Present, and the Past. 

The participle Present always terminates in ant: as, 
Jinissant, finishing ; recevant, receiving. 

The participle Past has various terminations : as, fru, 
finished ; re^u, received, &c. 

The Adverb. The Adverb is a word which qualifies 
a verb, an adjective, or another adverb : as, il park bien, 
he speaks well; il est tres eloquent^ he is very eloquent; 
il parle tres bien, he speaks very well. 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 23 

The Pre position. Prepositions serve to connect 
words with one another, and to show the relation between 
them : as, il alia de Paris a Versailles^ he went fro7?i Pa- 
ris to Versailles. 

The Conjunction. The Conjunction is a word which 
serves to connect words or sentences : as, Pierre et Jeaii 
rient^ Peter and John laugh ; parlez peu et pensez bien, 
speak little and think well. 

The Interjection. Interjections are words which 
serve to express the sudden emotions of the soul : as, He* 
las! alas! ^h! ah! Fi done! for shame! 



94 



COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 



FRENCH GRAMMAR. 



1. Grammar, in general, is the art of speaking and 
writing correctly. To speak, is to convey our thoughts 
by means of articulate sounds. To write, is to render 
those thoughts pennanently visible by means of certain 
signs, or characters, called Letters ; and their number, 
disposed in order, constitutes what is called the Alphabet. 

2. The letters of the French Alphabet are twenty-five, 
as in the first and second columns in the Table below : by 
the old pronunciation, they are named as in the third, arfd 
by the new pronunciation, as in the fourth column. 



FRENCH ALPHABET, 



o. p. Jv. p. 

A . . a ah .... ah 

B..b bay... .be* 

C . . c say . . . .ke 

D. .d day. . .de 

E. .e a a 

F..f eff. ...fe 

G..g jay. ..ghe 

H. .h ahsh. .he 

I. . .1 e e 

J-j .jee....je 

K..k kah...ke 

L...1 ell....le 

M . . m emm . . me 



O.p. JV. i». 

N. .n enn. . .ne 

O. .0 o o 

P . . . p pay . . . pe 

Q. .q ku ke 

R. .r .air. . . .re 

S.. .s ess ... .se 

T..t lay te 

U. .u u u-j- 

V . . V vav ve 

X. .X eeks kse 

Y. .y e-e:rcc.e-grec 

Z. .z zed. . . .ze 



* In the new pronunciation, the letter e, after each consonant, is 
sounded Uke u in the English word sun. 

f There is no approximate sound of this ktter in English. 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 



25 



FRENCH SOUNDS. 

3. The Simple, or Vowel Sounds, in the French lan- 
guage, are nineteen in number, as follows : 



French. 

a sounds like 



e 

i 
o 
6 
u 

u 

eu 
ou 
ou 
an 
in 
on 
un 



English. 
in bat. 
. . boj'. 

. . sun. 



THE VOWEL SOUNDS. 

French. 

It is exemplified by Jacc. 

^ge- 

C se, 

'Ijeune. 

. , etait. 

pert. 

.., me. 

, . . . . pique. 

giie. 

robe. 

cote. 

c?u. 

, mur. 

Jeune. 

sounds like oo in good. sous. 

00 . . mood. vouie, 

has no standard in English sang*. 

f'^' 

son. 

un. 



met. 
p'dir, 
there. 

Pg- 

field, 

rob. 

robe. 

has no standard in English. 



We see, from the above table, that seven sounds have 
no standard in the English language. 

The u can be obtained in the following manner. Ar- 
ticulate first the sound ee, as in eel ; then, close your lips 
a little, and articulate the sound of u. 

The sound ii is the same in quality, but longer. 

The sound eii is nearly the same in quality as that of u 
in the English word sun, but longer and closer. 

An approximate to an may be found in the Englisn 
word antique ; to in in length •, to on in long ; and to un 
in rung. These are termed the nasal sounds 



26 



COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 



\i/) Y. This letter, when alone, or when preceded or 
followed by a consonant, is pronounced as simple i ; 
except in pays^ paysan^ po.ysage, which are pronounced 
pe-is^ pe-isan, pe-isoge. Between two vowels, it is pro- 
nounced it : as, balayer, to sweep ; nettoyer^ to clean ; 
which are pronounced, as if spelled with ii, halaiier^ 
neiloiier. See the " Pronouncing French Reader," Rule 12, 
p. 280. 

5. The Diphthongs, in the French language, are 
twenty-six in number. They are as follows : 



THE DIPHTHONGS. 



16 ii^; 



la. ...exemplified in verbiage. 

i6 assied. 

omiere. 

iai liaison. 

oi gloire. 

oi moine. 

. C oi decloUre. 

^ "l ouai jouaient. 

oue enjoue. 

. c oin besoin. 

°*'^^ouin tintouin. 

io Etkiopien. 

ien bien. 

C ian insouciante. 

^^'^ ^ ien patience. 

iau materiaxxx. 



ieu. . ..exemplified in, . . .milievi. 

ieu . ,, . curieux. 

ion intention. 

iou cachioxxra. 

iu reliure. 

ouan lonanges. 

oua louable. 

oui rejome. 

ua nuage. 

ue extenue. 

u6 continnel. 



uej 



uai suaj;. 

uan remwanf. 

ui ttu/rui. 

uin .join. 



6. THE CONSONANTS. 

B. This letter has the same sound as in English : as, 
hal, ball. It is always pronounced in the middle of 
words ; as, abdiquer : and at the end of proper names ; 
as. Job, Caleb, Moab : also in the words radoub, rumb , 
but not in plomb. 



C. Has the sound of k, before a, o, m, /, w, r, except 
when it has a cedilla, in which case it sounds like s ; as, 
rf(^u. It sounds like s before e, i and y. Ch has always 
the sound of sh, except when it is followed by a conso- 
nant, in which case it sounds like k. as, ichneumon. 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 27 

D. Has the same sound as in English. It is always 
sounded in the middle of words : as, adverbe. It is 
likewise heard at the end of proper names : as, Uavid, 
Alfred, &c. 

At the end of many words it sounds like /, when the 
following word begins with a vowel, or h mute : as, 
grand homme^ which is pronounced grantome. 

F. \s sounded like the same letter in English : as, 
fleur^ flower. It is sounded in all words ending in if. 

(G?) Has tha hard sound of g in the English word go, 
belbfe a, 0, u ; as, gomme, gum: and the )soft sound of s 
in pleasure, before e, i, y ; as, genie, genius. Gn, at the 
beginning of words, has always the hard sound of the same 
letters in the English wwd ignorant : as in gnomon. h\ 
the middle of words, gn has a liquid sound, nearly similar 
to that of ni in the English word onion. 

H. Is sounded with a guttural impulse, when aspi- 
rated ; as heros, hero : and when it is mute, has no use 
but that of showing the etymology of the word; as, 
honneur, honour. 

J. Has always the sound of s in pleasure : as, jon- 
glerie, juggling. 

K. Has always a hard^found, as in the English word 
king : as, kiosgue, kiosk. 

L. Has two sounds. The first is precisely the same 
as 7 in the English word lily : as, lilas, lilac The second 
is liquid ; and occurs when Z at the end, or U in the 
middle, of words is preceded by i. It resembles the sound 
of the second i in the English word William: thus, 
pareil, pareiWe. Exception : when i begins a word, as in 
iUustre, the // is never liquid. See further, Rules 3 and 13, 
" Pronouncing French Reader." 

M. Has the sound of the same letter in English • as, 



28 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

momie, mummy. Um is pronounced omm, in some words 
adopted from the Latin : as, centumvir, album. 

jy. Has the sound of the English n : as, nonne, nun 

P. Is sounded as in English : as, pourpre, purple. Ph 
has the sound ofy*: as^ philosophe, philosopher. 

Q. Has the sound of k in king : as, qualite, quality. 

R. Is sounded as in English, but much more strongly : 
as, riviere, river. It is always sounded at the end of 
words, after the vowels a, z, o, u. In substantives, adjec- 
tives and verbs ending in er, it is silent, unless it is fol- 
lowed by a word begmning with a vowel : as, le dernier 
ouvrage, the last work ; which is pronounced le dernie- 
rouvrage. 

S. Has two sounds. The first is hard, as in the 
English word sister ; as, suspensif, suspensive : the second 
is soft, as in the English word please : as, raison, reason. 
It has uniformly the hard sound at the beginning of words • 
and the soft, between two vowels. Both sounds occur in 
saison, season. S is mute before ch : as, schall, Schajf- 
house, &c. It is alw'^s sounded at the end of foreign 
proper names : as, Brutus^ Protesilas, Sec. In compound 
words it preserves the hard sound : as, parasol, parasol. 

T. Has two sounds : the first is hard, as in the Eng- 
lish word tit; the second soft, like c in cedar. Both 
sounds occur in construction. 

It is soft before i, connected with some other following 
vowel or vowels ; as, patience, action : except when it is 
immediately preceded by an s ; as, question. 

V. Has the same sound as in English : as, vivace, vi- 
vacious. This letter, when doubled, is represented by the 
character w, which is met with in some foreign words, 
and is always pronounced as a simple v ; except i^ wist 
and wiski, when it has the sound of the Engrlish w. 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 29 

X Has generally the sound of ks in axe : as, sexe^ 
sex ; hoxer^ to box. Jn all words beginning with a:, or 
ex^ followed by a vowel, it has the sound of gz : as, 
Xavier, exil. At the end of words it sounds like z, when 
followed by a word beginning with a vowel, or h mute ; 
as, leaux yeux^ beautiful eyes ; dix hommes, ten men. 

Z. Has generally the sound of z in zone, or s in rose. 



Note. — The French and English words given as examples in the 
foregoing table of " The Vowel Sounds," are used as standards, in 
the author's " Proxouxcixg French Reader." The same French 
words, together with those in the preceding table of "The Diph- 
thongs," and an example of every other sound of difficult pronuncia- 
tion in the French language, are introduced into a single short fable 
in that work ; to which the author begs leave respectfully to refer* as 
a practical and progressive introduction to French pronunciation, 
which may be considered complete, in every respect. 



ACCENTUATION AND PUNCTUATION. 

7. In reading, due attention should be paid to the t^c- 
cents and the Cedilla, to the Apostrophe, Diceresis, 
Hyphen, &c. 

8. There are three Accents. The acute ( ' ), never 
placed but on e : as, in bonte. 

9. The grave ( ^ ), placed over a, e, u : as in vo'dd, 
proces, ou, 

10. The circumflex ["), placed over any long vowel : 
as in pldire, reve, epitre, apbtre, hiiche. 

11. The Cedilla is a kind of comma, placed under c, 
giving it the sound of s^ before a, o, u : as in facade, 
fagon, regu. 



30 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH' 

12. The Apostrophe ( ' ) marks the suppression of a 
vowel before another vowel, or an h mute : as in P oiseau^ 
V homme, s' il vient ; for le oiseau^ le homme, si il vient 

13. The DicBresis ( *' ) is placed over the vowels e, i, 
w, to indicate that they are to be pronounced distinctly 
from the vowels by which they are accompanied. 

14. The Hyphen ( - ) is particularly used in connecting 
compound words ; as in belles-lettres, chefs-d? ceuvre, arc- 
en-ciel. 

15. All the other distinctive marks, as the Comma, 
Semicolon, Colon, Period, Interrogation, Admiration^ 
Exclamation, Parenthesis, &c., are the same in the French 
as in the English language. 



GENDERS OF FRENCH NOUNS. 

It has already been stated (see Introduction, page 17 
ante), that there are only two genders in French, the mas- 
culine and feminine. Whatever is neuter in English must 
therefore belong to either the one or the other of these 
genders in French. Every attempt hitherto made to give 
a system of rules for distinguishing the genders of in- 
animate objects by their signification, has ended only in 
perplexing and harassing the learner. "They are so 
numerous," says Boyer, " so intricate, and liable to so 
many exceptions, that the best and easiest way is to learn 
ihem in the dictionary." 



16. GENDERS BY SIGNIFICATIOJV. 

The following short general rules, which have few or 
no exceptions, and are of easy apprehension and applica- 
tion, will be practically very useful. 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 31 

MASCULINE BY SIGNIFICATION. 

1. All the names of the days, months and seasons of 
the year : except mi, middle, is used before the name of a 
month, forming with it a compound word, when it makes 
it feminine : as, la mi-Juin, the middle of June. 

2. All objects to which we fancifully attribute the quali- 
fies of the male ; as, vainqueur^ conqueror; juge^ judge; 
genie ^ genius. 

3. The names of all metals, minerals and colours. 

4. The names of all mountains, except those chains 
which have no singular; the cardinal points; and the 
winds, except la blse^ la tramontane, La hrise^ and Its 
moussons. 

5. Words denoting the language of a country : as, le 
Franqais^ P It alien, 

6. All the words compounded of a verb and a substan- 
tive, even though the substantive by itself be feminine ; 
except garde-robe^ wardrobe, which is feminine. 

7. And, when used substantively^ all the ordinal, dis- 
tributive, and proportional numbers ; also adjectives, in- 
finitives of verbs, prepositions, adverbs, conjunctions, in- 
terjections ; and even sentences : except la moitie. 

FEMININE BY SIGNIFICATION. 

1. The names of all the virtues; except courage and 
merife. 

2. The names of all the vices. 

3. All objects to which we attribute feminine qualities : 
as, lune^ moon ; terre^ earth, Stc. 



17. GENDERS BY TERMINATION. 

The author, however, wishes the scholar mainly to rely 
on the Terminational Vocabulary, consisting of the 
two following Tables of Masculine and Feminine Termi- 
nations, which he has prepared, at great expense of time 
and labour, from the dictionary, with the express vjew of 



32 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH. 

furnishing a certain and universal method of determining 
the genders of nouns by their terminations. They should, 
therefore, be made a subject of attentive study ; and it will 
be well to commit to memory those endings which have 
few or no exceptions. 

To give an instance of the mode of using these Tables: 
let it be required to find the genders of the words vina." 
gre and place. The scholar will look in the Table of 
Masculine Terminations, and find -aigre in it; which tells 
him that vinaigre is masculine. He will next look for 
-ace in the same table, and not finding it there, will pro- 
ceed to the Table of Feminine Terminations, where he 
will find it, and of course thereby determine its gender to 
be feminine. It is scarcely necessary to say, that all the 
Exceptions in the Table of Masculine Terminations are 
feminine ; and all those in the Table of Feminine Termi- 
nations are masculine. 



TERMINATIONAL VOCABULARY. 

I. Masculine Terminations. 

TERMIITATIOJfS. EXCEPTIONS 

-a sepia, bandora, talpa, falaca, vinula. 

-abe Souabe, svllabe. 

-able fable, table, 6 table. 

-abre cabre. 

-ac None. 

-acle bemacle, debacle, made. 

-acre nacre. 

-act None. 

-acte cataracte, ^pacte. 

-adre escadre. 

-af. None. 

-age rage, image, ambages, saxifrage, passerage, cage, 

nage, plage. 

-agme ,...None. 

-ai None- 

-aigle None. 

-aigre None 

-ail None. 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 33 



TABLE OF MASCULINE TERMINATIONS— Coniinwei. 
TERMINATIONS. EXCEPTIONS. 

-ain main. 

-air chair. 

-aire affaire, aire, glaire, paire, grammaire, chaire, jugu- 

laire, haire, and eleven names of plants. 

-ais None. 

-ait None. 

-aitre None. 

-aix paix. 

-al None. 

-ale None. 

-alrae scalme. 

-alque None. 

-alt None. 

-alte halte. 

-am None. 

-ambe jambe. 

-amble None. 

-anibre chambre, antichambre. 

-amme anagramme, 6pigraniiue, flamme, onflamme. 

-amp None. 

-amphre None. 

-an None. 

-anc .None. 

-ancre ancre. 

-and None. 

-ang None. 

-ange fange, fontange, frange, graage, lavange, losange, 

mesange, orange, paretsange, phalange, veii- 

dange, vidange. "" 

-angle sangle. 

'anie None. 

-ant None. 

-antre None. 

-anvre None. 

-'yo None. 

-ap None. 

•aphe epigraphe, cpitapne, orthographe. 

-aps None. 

'fique attaque, baraque, caque, cardiaque, casac^ue, celia- 

que, claque, laque, maque, patraque, plaque, 

polaque, riqueraque, sandaraque, theriaque. 

-ar None. 

•arbre None. 

-arc None. 

drd None. 

3 



34 COLLOTS PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

TABLE OF MASCULINE TERMINATIONS- Continued. 
TEUMIITATIOIfS. EXCEPTIOXS. 

«re cithare, tare, fanfare, tiare. 

<irme alarms, arme, larme. 

•arque anasarque, parqi>e, remarque. 

-arre ' bagarre, barre, carre, simarre. 

-ars I^one. 

-art hart, part, quotepart, plupart. 

-artre cbartre, martre, dartre. 

-as None. 

-asme None. 

-aspe None. 

-asque basque, bourrasque, brasque, frasque. 

-ast None. 

-aste caste, haste. 

-astre None. 

-at None. 

-atre finatre. 

-au eau, peau. 

-aud None. 

-aume paume. 

-aut None. 

-aux chaux. 

-ave. cave, bave, betterave, entraves, epaves, octave, rave, 

cassave, etrave, enclave, lave, architrave. 

-avre None. 

-ax ISone. , 

-e pitie, moitie, amitie, inimitife. Words ending in 

-te are not included here : see -e, in the Table 

of Feminine Terminations. 

-ec Nojie. 

-ecle None. 

-ect None. 

-ecte pandectes, secte. 

-ectre None. 

-ed None. 

-ede None. 

♦edre NoTie. 

-ef. nef. 

-effle nefle. 

-ege allege. 

-egme None. 

-egne None. 

-egs None. 

-egue ..gregue. 

•eigle None. 

fiL NoriA. 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 35 

TA.BLE OF MASCULINE TERMINATIONS— Continued. 
TERMIXATIONS. EXCEPTIONS. 

^1 None. 

-elfe None. 

-em None. 

-erne br^me, cr^me, trireme, septi6me (a sequence at 

piquet.) 

-emple None. 

-emps None. 

-en None. 

-ens. None. 

-ent gent, dent. 

-entre None. 

-ep None. 

-epre None. 

-epte None. 

-eptre None. 

-er mer, cuiller. 

-ere None. 

-ercle None. 

-erf. None. 

-ergue vergue. 

-erle.: perle. 

-errae berme, ferme. 

-ers None. 

-ert None. 

-ertre None. 

-es None. 

-est None. 

-este peste, sieste, soubvreveste, veste. 

-estre liraestre. 

-et None. 

-etre guetre. fenetre. 

-eu None. 

-eublc None. 

-euf None. 

-eul None. 

-eume None. 

-eune None. 

-euple None. 

-euque None. 

-eur There are sixty-seven feminines in eur, tvhtch 

express properties and qualities : as, jaideux* 

hauteur, rougeur, &c. 

-eurre None. 

-eurt None. 

■C^vtre None. 



36 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

TABLE OF MASCULINE TERMINATIONS— Continited. 
TERMIITATIOirS. EXCEPTIONS. 

•eutre T^one. 

-eux None. 

-evre chevre, fi6vre, levre, pidvre. 

-ex None. 

-exe ^.None. 

-exte sexte. 

-ez None. 

-eze None. 

-i raerci, fourmi, apres-midi, ammi, gagui, demi 

-ibe None. 

-ible bible. 

-ibre fibre. 

'ic None. 

-ice avarice, cicatrice, cotice, epice, immondice, inter- 
stice, injustice, justice, lice, malice, matrice, 
milice, natice, notice, police, premice, varice, 
venefice ; and, of course, all the names that de- 
signate women • cs, actrice, cantatrice, &c. 

-icle bemicle, beside, manicle, 

4ct None. 

-id None. 

-ide ride, bride, ides, egide, pyramide, cantharide, he 

morroides, cycloide, cariatide, bastide, carotide, 
chrysalide, cissoide, conchoide, eneide, ephe- 
lides, ephemerides, epinyctides, heroide, nei©' 
ide, parotide, rhomboide, ricinoide. 

-idre None. 

-if None. 

-ifFre None. 

-ige lige, tige, volige. 

-igle None. 

-igme enigme. 

-igne guigne, ligne, vigne, consigne. 

-igre None. 

-il None. 

-ile pile, vigile, tie, bile, file, huiie, niile. 

-ilphe None. 

-ils None. 

-iltre None. 

-im None. 

-imbe None. 

-imbre None. 

-in None. 

-inc Nnn£. 

•inct None , 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 37 

TABLE OF MASCULINE TERMINATIONS— Continiiei. 
TBRMIITATIONS. EXCEPTIONS. 

-indre None. 

-inge meninge. 

-inq . . . , None. 

-intre None. 

-inx , None. 

-iple None. 

-ir None. 

-ire cire, satire, ire, Hegire. 

-irque None. 

-irse None. 

-irte None. 

-is vis, brebis, fleur de lis, chauve-souria. 

-isc None. 

-isme None. 

-isque bisque, brisque. 

-iste piste, batiste, liste, baliste. 

-isthme None. 

-istre None. 

-it nuit. 

-ithme None. 

.itre vitre, epitre, mitre, huitre. 

-ivre None. . 

-ix perdrix. 

-o None. 

-ob No7ie. 

-obe robe. 

-oble None. 

-obre None. 

-oc None. 

-ocle None. 

-ocre ocre. 

-od None. 

-ode. . . commode, ^pode, methode, ode, pagode, spode. 

-of. None. 

-offre None. 

-oge epitoge, horloge, loge, toge. 

-ogme None. 

-ogue drogue, eglogue, vogue, synagogue, pirogue. 

-oi loi, foi, paroi« 

-Old. None. 

-oif. None. 

-oil None. 

-oine Names of plants and stones with this terminatwn 

are feminine, 
•oint None. 



38 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

TABLE OF MASCULINE TERMINATIONS— Continiwi 
tehmistatioxs. exceptions. 

-(Mr None. 

-oire foire, poire, moire, histoire, gloire, machoire, na- 

geoire, victoire, and all names indicating 
the power qf holding or containing : as, ai- 
moire, ecritoire, &c. 

-ois fok. 

-oit None. 

-oitre None. 

-oivre None. 

-61 None. 

-olf. None. 

-cm None. 

-oinb None. 

-ombre ombre, penombre. 

-ome and -omme . . gomme, pomme. 

-omphe None. 

-ompte None. 

-on pamoison, prison, trahison, moisson, foison, garnP- 

son, fagon, boisson, chanson, toison, ranpon, 
legon, guerison. See -ion and -aison, in the Ta- 
ble of Feminine Terminaiions. 

-onche.. . t- conche, jonche. 

-onde petoncle. 

-ond None. 

-one anemone, annone, argemone, mangone, auin6ne, 

zone. 

-ongle None. 

-ongre None, 

-onstre None. 

-ont None. 

-onze None. 

-op None. 

-or None. 

-orbe None. 

-orche torche. 

-ord None. 

-ordre None. 

-ore mandragore, m6taphore, aurore, p^re, amphne, 

plethore. 

-orps None. 

-ors Nont, 

-ort None. 

-OS. None. 

-ot dot 

ou None. 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 39 

TABLE OF^MASCULINE TERMlNA-TlONS^CoTuludad. 
TERMIlfATIOJrS. EXCEPTIOITS. j 

•oude soude. 

-oufle pantoufle. i 

-ouffre None. 

-oug None, 

-ouge gouge. 

-oup None. I 

-our cour. J 

-ours None. 

-out None, 

-oux toux. 

-oxe None. \ 

-u glu, tribu, vertu. 

-ube jujube. 

-uc None. 

-ucre None. 

-ud None. 

-uf. None. 

-ufle None. 

-uge None. 

-uis None. i 

-ul None, ^\ 

-um None. ; 

-un None. 

unt None. 

•ur None j 

urne urne. ' 

us None. , . j 

use None. 

uscle None, '' 

uste None, ; 

-ustre None. ^ 

-ut Non-e. 

-ux None. ; 

-uxe None. 

-yge apophyg^ 

-yme None, ■} 

-ynx None. i 

-ype None. ] 

-yplie None, 

-yrse Nonf,, . 

-yrte iVone,' \ 

-yx ••••••• ^o««. I 



40 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

II. FEMININE TERMINATIONS. 

TEKMINATIOXS. EXCEPTIONS. 

-ace espace. 

-ache gamaches. 

-ade stade. jade, grade. 

-afe parafe. 

-afle None. 

-afre cafre. 

-agne alpagne, bagne, pagne. 

-agre cleragre, meleagre. 

-ague carague, gyrovague, ossifrague. 

-aie None. 

-aigne None. 

-aile baile. 

-aille None. 

-aine domaine, Le Maine (a province of France.) 

-ainte None. 

-aise malaise, mesaise. 

-aison None. 

-aisse None. 

-aite None. 

-ale scandale, ovale, petale. 

-algue None. 

-alle intervalle. 

-alse None. 

-alve None. 

-ame amalgame, ^pithalame, hippopotame, vidame. 

blame, dictame. 

-ampe None. 

-ance ranee. 

anche dimanche. 

-ande multiplicande. 

-andre meandre, palixandre. 

-ane ane, crane, manes, organe, filigrane, arcane. 

-angue None. 

-anne None. 

-anque manque, saltinbanque. 

• anse None. 

-ante Nones. 

-ape and -appe None. 

-arbe None. 

-arce None. 

-arche None. 

-arde pericarde. 

-arge large. 

'Vix%o.9 i\<rtitf. 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 41 

TABLE OF FEMININE TERMINATIONS- Contiauei. 

TERMIBTATIOirS. EXCEPTIOIfS. 

argue largue. 

-arne acame. 

-arpe None. 

-arse tarse. 

-arte None. 

-ase gymnase, Pegase, Caucase. 



-ate and atte automate, Euphrate, stigmata. 

-aube None. 

-auche None. 

-aude None. 

-auge None. 

-aule saule. 

-aupe None. 

-ause None. 

-ausse None. 

-auve None. 

-axe axe. 

-e The feminine termination here meant is -t^. 

The exceptions are: ete, traite, te, veloute, 
pate, cote, b^nedicit^, aparte, arr^te, comte, 
comite. 

-^e musee, trophee, hymen^e, coryphee, scarab^e. 

-6bre zebre. 

-ece None. 

-eche preche. 

-eigne peigne. 

-eille None. 

-eine None. 

-ele zele, modele. 

-elle libelle, vermicelle, isabelle, violoncelle, 

-empe None. 

-ence silence. 

-encre None. 

-ende dividende. 

-endre None. 

•eae alcaligene, amphisbene, ^pagomene, Epicene, hy- 

drogene, molybdene, oxygene, paralipomenes, 
phalene, silene, tungsthene, chene, frene, p^ne, 
troene. 

•enne renne. 

-ense None. 

-ente trente. 

-cpe None. 

epse None. 



42 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

TABLE OF FEMININE TERMINATIONS— Cojiftnaed. 

TERMIITATIOXS. EXCEPTIONS. 

•eque areque, cercopitheque. 

-erbe verbe. 

-erce commerce. 

-erche None. 

ere cimetiere, viscere, mystere, cautere, adultere, ul- ,■ 

cere, cralere, caractere, hemisphere, monastere, 
ministere, clystere, mesentere, planisphere, [ 
presbytere, quadrilatere, reverbere, somnifere, . 
stere. 

-erge cierge. 

-erne averne, ceme, malgouveme, quaterne, teme. 

-erre cimeterre, verre, parterre, tonnerre, paratnnnp.ri^ ^ 

lierre. • , / , _ , 

-erse None. n. .1^:'^'^' ''■'''^^\ i.---'''^,d^j^--^ 

^rte None. "^jvOtAoiXj tj^^ .^ • 

-erve None. ^ 

-ese diese, diocese, manganese. 

-esque None. 

-esse None. 

-ete and -ette amulette, squelette, casse-noisette, and a few other 

compound words. 

-eue None. 

-eule None. 

-eure None. 

'Cuse None. 

-eute Acne. 

-euve fleuve. 

-euvre None, 

-eve reve. 

-iche acrostiche, caniche, fetiche, hemistiche, stokfiche. 

-ie genie, perihelie, parapluie, pavie, incendie. 

-ifFe No7ie. 

-igue None. 

-ille calville, codicille, codille, miUe, spadille, trille, 

vaudeville. 

-ime abime, centime, crime, regime, dedme, grimt^ 

millesime, mime, sublime. 

-ince None. 

-inde inde, Pinde. 

-ine None. 

-ingle None. 

-ingue elingue. 

-inte None. 

-ion pion, septentrion, croupion, scorpion, fanion, ca- 
mion, scion, bastion, bestion, gabion, guiion, 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 43 

TABLE OF FEMININE TERMINATIONS— Conttnuei. 

TEHMINATIONS. EXCEPTIONS. 

talion, million, billion, trillion, lampion, brim- 

borion, alerion, alcyon, horion, morion, orion. 

-ipe participe, principe. 

-ipse None. 

-ique portique, topique tropique, cantique, distique, 

emetique, narcotique, viatique. 

-ise None, 

-isse None, 

-ite merite, demerite, gite, site, rite, satellite, areopa- 

gite. 

-ive convive, qui-vive. 

-obe globe, lobe. 

-oce negoce, sacerdoce. 

-oche coche, medianoche, proche, reproche. 

-ogne None. 

-oie foie. 

-oile None. 

-oise None. 

-oisse None. 

-oite None. 

-oix choix. 

-ole and -olle capitole, role, monopole, pole, protocole, symbole, 

controle. 

-olte None. 

-ombe lombes. rhombe, 

-ompe None. 

-once quinconce. 

-onde monde 

-onge mensonge, songe. 

-ongue None. 

-onne None. 

-onte conte. 

-ontre None. 

-ope baroscope, engyscope, horoscope, m^t^oroscope, 

microscope, telescope. 

-ophe None. 

-oque coUoque, engastriloque, soliloque, ventriloque. 

-orce divorce. 

-orde exorde, monocorde, pentacorde, tetracorde. 

-orge None. 

-orme , corme, orme. 

■orne — capricorne, cromorne. 

orte cloporte. 

ose None. 

>6se carrosse, colos&e. 



44 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

TABLE OF FEMININE TERMINATIONS— ConcZoded. 
TEnMINATIOKS. EXCEPTIOifS 

-oste anagnoste, perioste. 

-ote and -otte antidote, vote, tire-botte. 

-ouche piedouche. 

-oucle None. 

-oudre None. 

-oue None. 

-ouffe bouffe. 

-ouille None. 

-oule None. 

-oulpe ■ None. 

-oupe groups. 

-ouque None. 

-ourbe None. 

-ource None. 

-ourde None. 

cure None. 

-otirme None. 

-ourse None. 

-ouse None. 

-ousse None. 

-oute doute. 

-outre . .coutre. 

-uble None. 

-uce prepuce. 

-uche No}U. 

-ude prelude. 

-ue No7ie. 

-u]e and -uUe adminicule, animalcule, conciliabule,conventicule, 

corpuscule, crepuscule, fascicule, galericule, 
globule, indicule, lobule, manipule, matricule, 
module, monocule, monticule, opuscule, pecule, 
pedicule, perpendicule, preambule, prostibule, 
regule, ridicule, scrupule, vehicule, ventricule, 
vestibule. 
ulte culte, tumulte. 

-ume apostume, bitume, costume, legume, rhume. 

-une None. 

-upe None. 

•uque None. 

-ure augure, parjure, murmure, tellure, mercure, col'jie. 

-use. None. 

-ute and -utte parachute. 

'Uve None. 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 45 



Ll§/ There are some nouns which are masculine in one 
signification, and feminine in another : thus, livre^ a book, 
is masculine, while livre. a pound weight, is feminine. 
These have not been included in the foregoing Rules and 
Tables : and are as follow : 

LIST OF ALL THE NOUNS WHICH ARE MASCULINE 
IN ONE SIGNIFICATION, AND FEMININE IN AN- 
OTHER. 



jrASCtJLINE. FEMININE. 

aide assistant aide /lelp 

:iigle eagle aigle standard 

amour love, affection amours, pi. intrigues of gallantry 

aune alder-tree aune ■ell 

baybe Barbary horse baijig beard 

barde poet Tame slice of bacon 

Ba sque- Biscayan ba Jjiue skirt 

oerce- •• bird berce- a plant 

braque setting dog braques, pi. claws of a shellfish 

cdpre privateer cSpre caper, a pickle 

caraque cocoa caraque a kind of ship 

carpe wrist carpe rarp 

cartouche ornament in designing cartouche cartridge 

coche passage-boat coche old sow 

couple a man and his wife coujpje, a brace, a pair 

cVepe^ 'mourning c^pfiT • pancake 



critique a critic critique criticism 

d^lice delight d^Iices •. delights 

enfant male child enfant -female child 

enseigne officer enseiane -fiag 

exemple example exeinple writing copy 

faux -falsehood faux scyth e 

fm chief point fin end 

foUicule gall-bladder follicule seed-vessel in plants 

for6t gimlet foret -forest 

foudre tun-vessel, a great warrior foudre thunderbolt 

fourbe impostor fourbe kna'>iery, cheat 

garde a guardsman garde defence 

grefFe register greffe graft 

gueules, pi. gules in heraldry gueule the jaws of a beast 

guide guide guide rein 

haute-paye soldier in extra pay haute-paye extra-pay 

heliotrope sun-Jlower heliotrope spotted precious stone 

hymne chaunt of the ancients hymne Christian hymn 

larves, pi. evil spirits larve worm, grvb 

litre measure for liquids litre • -mourning hangings of churches 

li_vre book Uwifi- • • -pound weight, piece of money 

manche handle nianche sleeve, channel 

manoeuvre bricklayer' s man inanceuvre manceuvre 

matamore boaster matamore • •slave-priso7i 

m^moire bill, memoir mernoire meviorp 

iniTe. boar five years old \mne- •^. ■■■-■■■ -..^.aim, the button 

•' •' I on the barrel of a gun to take aim by 

mode mood, system mode -fashion, custom 

mdle pier, dyke m6le false idea 



46 



COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 



MASCULINE. 

mort corpse, dead man 

Tnoulle set of pulleys 

moule model, pattern 

mousse ship hoy 

ceuvre action, toork 

ombre game at cards 

orge raond6 peeled barley 

orgue organ 

page page, attendant 

paillasse theatrical clown 

palme measure of length 

panache plume 

pantomime pantomime player 

paralI61e comparison 

pendule pendulum 

p^riode height 

pique spade at cards 

pivoine a kind of snipe 

plane plane-tree 

platine platina 

plinthe squared body of soldiers 

po6Ie stove 

Polacre a Polish gentleman 

ponte gambler 

poste station, office 

pourpre purple colour, purple fever 

pr^texte pretence 

piipille male pupil 

quadrille game 

r^iale organ-pipe 

relache relaxation 

remise hackney coach 

serpentaire constellation 

Emople vert in heraldry 

solde balance of an account 

Bomme sleep, nap 

pouris smile 

tour turn^ trick 

triomphe triumph, victory 

trompette trumpeter 

vague empty space 

vase-- • vase 

voile veil 



FEMIi'IIfE, 

mort - death 

moufle mitten 

moule shell fish 

mousse moss, froth 

ceuvre literary work 

ombre shadow, ghost 

orge barley 

orgues, pi. organs 

page page in a book 

paillasse mattrass 

palme advantage ' 

panache pea-hen 

pantomime pantomime 

parall61e parallel line 

pendule clock ■ 

p^riode epoch, period 

pique spear 

pivoine peony, a plant i 

plane carpenter" s tool 

platine plates of a watch 

plinthe plinth in architecture ; 

poele frying-pan 

polacre polacca • 

ponte laying of eggs 

poste postoffizc, the mail ." 

pourpre • • purple dye, badge of royalty , 

pr^texte ancient Roman dress 

pupille the apple of the eye . 

qnadrille.troop of horseinatournament 
regale- -the holding a vacant bishopric 

relache the touching at a seaport 

remise coach-house ' 

serpentaire dragonwort ' 

sinople anemony 

solde pay of a soldier 

somme sum of money , 

souris mouse 

tour tower 

triomphe game at cards 

trompette trumpet 

vague wave 

vase slime 

voile -^eail 



k 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 47 



INTRODUCTION TO THE EXERCISES. 

J^Tote.— The five following Exercises are intended to be introductory tc those 
hich follow them ; and should therefore be well understood and renieni- 
loered by the learner. He will bear in mind that he is expected to apply all 
the knowledge, and acquaintance with w^ords, which he has obtained in pre- 
vious Exercises, to those which succeed ; as they are all progressive in their 
construction, and lead practically, and by almost imperceptible advances, from 
the easy to the difficult. 

19. The learner is to render the English definite article 
the^ in the singular, by 

Icj before a noun masculine : as, le livre, the book ; 
la, before a noun feminine : as, la rue, the street; and 
/', before a noun of either gender, beginning with a vowel or h 
mute : as, /' ame, the soul ; /' histoire, the history ; 

and in the plural, by, 

les, before nouns of either gender: as, les livres, the books; lea 
rues, the streets. 

20. A, or an^ is to be rendered by 

tin, before a noun masculine: as, un homme, a man; and 
une, before a noun feminine: a.s, une femme, a woman. 

EXERCISE I* 

The wood. The forest. The houses. The men. The court. 

bois, OT. for^t, /. maisons homraes cour,/. 

The foot. The arms. The room. The garden. The windows. 

pied,ai. bras chambre,/. jardin, m. fenfires 

A history. A novel. A foreigner. A walk. A day. 

histoire, /. roman, m. Stranger, m. promenade, /. jour, nt. 

A night. The sun. The moon. The stars. A body. A card. 

huit,/. soleil, m. lune,/. ^toiles corps, m. carte,/. 

\ crown. 

^cu, VU 

21. The prepositions of^Lndfrom are rendered by de\ 
to and at hy a \ and when followed by the article, thus : 

* In the following Exercise, and wherever they may occur 
throughout the grammar, m. stands for masculine, f. for feminine, s. 
for singular, pi. for plural, art. for article, h asp. for h aspiratcdy 
&c. &c. The initial h, of all words in the Exercises which are pot 
"oreceded or followed by h asp., will be considered by the scholar a/i 
nute. 



48 



COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 



"da, before a noun masculine singular beginning with 
a consonant or h aspirated : as, du pare, of the park; 
de la, before a rM)un fem. sing,, beginning with a con- 
sonant or h aspirated : as, de la ri\'iere, of the river; 
de V , before a noun singular of either gender, beginning 
with a vowel or h mute : as, de V esprit, of the mind ; 
des, before any noun in the plural : as, des plumes, of 
v^ the pens. 



of ike 

and 

fioftn ihty 

by 



to the 
and 

at the, 
by 



"au, before a noun masculine singular beginning with a 

consonant or h aspirated : as, au chirurgien, to the 

surgeon ; 

a la, before a noun feminine singular beginning with a 

^ consonant or h aspirated : as, a la boite, to the box ; 

a r, before a noun singular of either gender beginning 

with a vowel or h mute : as, a /' ami, to the fiiend; 
aux, before any noun in the plural: as, aux lois, to the 
' ^ laws. 



22. And when these prepositions are followed by a 
or an, thus : 

of a rd' un, before a noun masculine; as, cT un jour, of a 

and J day ; 

from a, \ d' une, before a noun feminine : as, cf une nuit, of a 

by l^ night. 

to a rd un, before a noun masculine : as, a un couteau, to 

and 1 a knife ; 

at a, ] a U7ie, before a noun feminine : as, a une fourchette, to 

by L ^ ^^^^' 



EXERCISE II. 

The palace of the king. Of the queen. Of the man. 

palais, m. roi reine homnie 

book. To the chair. To the arm-chair. To the hands, 

hvre, TO. chaise, /. fauteuil, m. mains 
fingers, 
doi^ts 



Of the 
Tofho 
Toa 



From a balcony. From a window. Of a prince, 

balcon, m. fenetre, /. prince 

princess. Of the gardens. Of the evening. To the courtiers, 

princesse jardins coir, vi. courti^ans 
Of a table. To the master. To a lady. Of the soul. Of the 

table,/. maitre dame &me,/. 
sheep. To a ram. Of the shepherds, 
brebis,/. belief berger3 

23. These same prepositions, when followed by the 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 49 

possessive adjectives my^ thy, his, her, its, our, your, and 
their, are rendered thus : 

of and from my "^ 

thy 

his, ker, its ! 

our f 



S. VI. 


s.f. 


Vl.vi.Scf. 


rde mon 


ma 


mes 


. . ton 


ta 


tes 


j . • son 


sa 


ses 


. . notre 


notre 


nos 


. . votre 


votre 


vos 


^. . leur 


leur 


leurs 


C a mon 


ma 


mes 


I &c. 


&c. 


&c. 



your 

their 

to and at my ^ . C 

«&c. &c. 5^1 

24. It must be observed here, that possessive adjec- 
tives, in French, always agree in gender and number with 
the object possessed ; and not with the possessor, as in 
Jl^nglish ; for which reason they must always be repeated 
before every noun. 

25. Thus, speaking of a lady's parents, the English 
say, her father and mother ; while the French express the 
same by, son pere et set mere. In the English example, 
ner agrees with lady, the possessor ; and altliough it may 
be, scarcely ever is repeated. But in the French, as we 
have said, the possessive adjectives agree with the objects 
possessed, in this case pere and mere ; which being of 
different genders, obviously require correspondent genders 
in the possessive adjectives prefixed to them. Such is the 
reason of a rule which has been extended so as to embrace 
nouns of similar gender. 

26. The prepositions of and from., to 'and at, 'when 
followed by the demonstrative adjectives this or that, these 
or those, must be rendered thus : 

'"ce, before a noun masculine begin- 
ning with a consonant or h aspi- 
rated : as, de ce lieu, of that place ; 
cet, before a noun masculine begin- 
ning with a vowel or h mute : as, 
a cet homme, to this man ; 
cefie, before a noun feminine : as, ^ 
1^ cetfe femme, to this woman. 

,. . y. ,t ,7 ,7 rbefore nouns plural of either 

of and from these or those, by de ces, j j 

J J } J ' J gender : as, de ces portes, 

I 

c 4 



of and from this or that, by de 
to and at this or that, by d 



. , . ., 7/ u V \ of these doors d ces sou- 

to and at these or those, by a ces, ^ j^^^^ ^^ ^^^^^^ ^^^^^^^ 



no COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

EXERCISE III. 

Of my clothes. Of thy handkerchief. Of his pocket Of youi 

habits. mouchoir, vi. poche, /. 

letters. Of our treasure. To their house. Of this steeple. Of that . 
letlres. tr6sor, m. raai^on,/. clocher, m. { 

hero. Of this tower. Of these models. Of my sister. To your 
h asp- h^ros. tour, /. modules. soeur. 

relations. The top of this mountain. To my friend. Of these , 
parens. sommet, m. montagne, /. ami, m. j 

pleasures. To our duties. To their connexions. Of his acquaint- i 

plaisirs. devoirs. liaisons. connais 

ances. To my neighbours, 
sances. voisLns. 

27. The Apostrophe (') marks, we have said, page 
30, the suppression of a vowel, before another vowel, or 
an h mute. 

(28, This suppression is called elision. A^ e, i are the 
only vowels liable to be thus cut off. tOf the suppression 
of the latter of the three, but two instances occur, viz. in 
the conjunction s?!, before Uie pronoun singular and plural, 
i/, Us : thus, s' rZ, s' ils.\ iU' yirMi -vvi r u c^*- (^-^^1-^ .1 

29. The a is suppressed only in la, feniiume, Dotn 
when an article and a pronoun. 

30. The elision of e occurs in the masculine article and 
pronoun Ze, and also in many other monosyllables, such 
as,ye, me, te, se, de, ce, 7ie, que, and in the compounds of 
que., such as, parceque, quoique, &.c. 

31. It is allowable, either to retrench, or retain the 
final e of the preposition entre, between, among, when it 
precedes the pronouns eux, elles and autres ; but it is 
always suppressed in the following compound words : 
entr'acte, an interlude ; s'entr'aider, io help one another; 
entr'ouir, to hear imperfectly ; entr'ouvrir, to half open. 

EXERCISE IV.» 

The soul. The heroine. The mind. He ^loves 'him. She sjoves 
4me,/. heroine. esprit, m. U aime le. elle airae 

* The learner will perceive small figures, ', 2, s^ &c. placed fre- 
quently before English words, in these Exercises, He will understand 
by these figures, that in writing his Exercises, he is to place the French 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 51 

'her. I love this man. You do not 2understand 'me. He ^esteems 
la. Je homme. Vous — * ne entendez pas ine. estime 

'thee. He goes away. It was the 2golden 'age. Do not go 

te. se en-va. Ce 6tait de or age. — ne allez pas 

there. If he comes. If they please. What has he said 1 Till 

la.. Si vient. Si veulent. Que a-t- dit t Jusque au 

night. Though he says. Since he 2knows 'him. When he ^saw 
soir. Quoique dise. Puisque connait le- Lorsque vit 
'them. Between them. Some body is come. I have 2done 'nothing 

les. Entre eux. Quelque un est venu. ne ai fait rien. 
He loves nobody. He ^has 3never ''seen 'it. 
ne ne a jamais vu. 

32. There are many words which are alike in both 
languages, and others which differ only in their termina- 
tion. The words which are perfectly alike, are those 
particularly, which have the following terminations : viz. 
in a/, hle^ ace,, ance, ence, ice, acle, ade, age, ege, ge, ule^ 
He, ine, ion, ant and ent. 

33. Many other words require only a change of termi- 
nation, as follows : 

English. French. 

as energy, energie. 
. , military, militaire. 
. . glory, gloire. 

. . clemency, clemence. 
. . beauty, beaute. 
. . dangerous, dangereux. 
. . favour, faveur. 

. . error, erreur. 

. . clandestine, clandestin 
. . expressive, expressif. 
. . fury, furie. 

words in the order indicated by the figures ; as the order of arrange- 
ment of words in the French language, frequently differs from that 
proper to the English. Thus, the expression, a ^mischievous ^old 
^monkey, is to be rendered into French, arranged as follows : nn vieux 

I singe malin ; which, it will be observed, is conformable to the order 

j of the figures preceding the English words. Occasionally, however, 
for convenience sake, these small figures will precede the French 

I words: in which case, also, the words will of course be arranged as 

, indicated by the figures. 

! • This sign, — , indicates that the English word under which it is 

j (/'aceu, requires nc corresponding word in the French. 

I 



English 


French. 


-^.y 


into -gie, 


-ary 


-aire, 


-ory 


-oire, 


•cy 


-ce, 


'ty 


-te, 


-ous 


-eux, 


•our 


-eur, 


-or 


.... eur, 


-ine 


-in. 


-ive 


.... -if. 


-ry 


.... -ne. 



52 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

English. French. English. French, 

dy .... -die, . . perfidy, perfidie. 

siy .... -stie, . . modesty, modestie. 

JS". B. Adjectives in eux^ if^ in, make their feminines. 
respectively, in euse, ive, ine ; in ant, ent, and al, take e 
mute. 

EXERCISE V. 

The beauty of that fable. The horror of vice, the utility of 

/. /. /. art. 7/1. /. art. 

science. The atrocity of this action. The simplicity of that machine. 

/. /. /. /. /• 

An 2audacious 'conspirator. The absurdity of that opinion. The 

/. /. 

^military 'evolutions. An ^industrious 'nation. An ^important 

/• 
'victory. An ^alimentary 'pension. A ^dangerous 'animal. A 

/. /. m. 

2famous 'general. His 2constant 'generosity. His fidelity is 

/• /• 

indubitable. Your clemency is admirable. The destruction of his 

/• _ /• 

fortune was the consequence of his temerity. She is very scrupu- 

/. fut /. /. 

lous. This history is incontestable. Your facility is prodigious 

/• /• 

His perfidy is odious. The sublimity of his sentiments is still 

/. /• 

preferable to the energy of his expressions. This instrument is not 

/. m. 

harmonious. The prosperity of the wicked is not durable. Your 

/• 
^insidious 'presents are not acceptable. His memory is truly extra- 

m. sont f. 

ordinary. It was a great favour. His modesty is sincere. It was a 

/• /• 

sbnital, 3but ^prudent 'action. 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 53 



PART I 



CHAPTER I. 

OF THE SUBSTANTIVE, OR NOUN. 
See Introduction, p. 16. 

34. The plural, in French, is generally formed, as in 
English, by adding an s to the singular : as, 

sinff. piur, 

le president, the president ; les presidents, tlie presidents. 
un ange, an angel ; des anges, some an^^eU. 

35. Exceptions. 1. Substantives singular, ending m 
«, X or z, remain unalterable : as, 

sing. plur. 

le fils, the son ; les fils, the sons. 

la voix, the voice ,- les voix, the voices. 

le nez, the nose ,- les nez, the noses. 

36. 2. Nouns ending in au or ew, take an x : as, 

sing. plur. 

bateau, boat; bateaux, boat'i. 
feu, Jire,- feux, fires. 

37. 3. Substantives ending in aZ, are changed into 
aux : as, 

sing. phir. 

cheval, horse,- chevaux, horses. 

hopital, hospital; hopitaux, hospitals. 

38. 4. The f, in polysyllables ending in ant or eni^ is 
dropped or retained at pleasure : as, 

sing. plur. 

diamant, diamond; diamans, diamonds. 
appartement, apartment ; appartemens, apartments, 

39. But monosyllables retain the t : as, 

sing, plur. 

gant, gbve ; gants, gloves. 

dent, tooth ; dents, teeth. 



54 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 



40. Remarks. 1. The substantives chou^ caillou^ 
bijou, genou, hibou and joujou, take x, and make chouxy 
&c. 

41. 2. The substantives bal, col, paJ, regal, camavaJ, 
follow the general rule, simply taking s. 

42. 3. The substantives bail, sous-bail, corail, email, 
soupirail, vantail, ventail, change ail into aux, and make 
baux, &c. Ail, garlic, makes aulx ; betail, cattle, makes 
bestiaux ; bercail, sheepfold, has no plural. 

43. 4. The four following have two plurals : 
("work, makes travaux ; 

travail J ^ tmve (wilh farriers), makes travails ; 

j occupation of a minister with a sovereign, makes tra- 
1^ vails. 

rtke tester of a bed, makes dels de lit ; 
ciel J ^^^ ^''•s^ bed of stone in a quarry, makes ciels de car- 



neres : 
\jky, heaven, makes cieux. 

.. C eye, makes yeux ; 
' "^ an oval window, makes ceils de bcEuf. 

.. , C ancestor, makes aieux ; 
' (_ grandfather, makes aieuls. 

EXERCISE VI. 

The flowers oi the gardens. The niceties of the languages. The 

fleur jardin d^licatesse langue. 

palaces of the kings. The woods of these countries. The walnuts 

palais roi. bois pays. noix 

of their orchards. The pictures of those painters. The feathers of 

verger. tableau peintre. plume 

these birds. The melody of their voices. The gods of the pagans. 

oiseau. m^lodie voir. dieu pa'ien. 

The jewels of my sisters. The cabbages of our gardens. These 
bijou sceur. cliou jardin. 

^charming 'places. 1 he horses of my stables. The fans of these 

charmant lieu. cheval ^curie. 6ventail 

ladies. The front-gates of those churches. The actions of my 

dame. portail eglise. 

ancestors. The evils of this life. The victories of those generals, 
aieul. mal vie,/. 

The works of those architects. The corals of those seas. The 

travail arcbitecte corail xuer. 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 66 

learned-men of those times. The presents of my parents. The 

sarant lemps-ia. 

teeth of your combs. The playthings of our children. The heads 
dent peigne. joujou enfant. t^te 

of these nails, 
clou. 



CHAPTER ir. 

OF THE ARTICLE. 

See Introduction, p. 18. 

44. The article is Ze, for the masculine ; as, 7e joicr^ 
the day : Z«, for the feminine ; as, la nuit^ the niglu: ks^ 
for the plural of both genders ; as, les jours, the days ; les 
nuits, the nights. 

45. It always agrees in gender and number with the 
substantive to which it relates. 

46. Elision of the article takes place before a vowel, 
or h mute : as, V ambition, the ambition ; P honneur, the 
honour. 

47. It never takes place in the plural. 

48. Contraction takes place in the following cases : 

49. 1. Before a masculine singular beginning with a 
consonant or h aspirated : as, 

du prince, of the prince, instead of de le prince 

du heros, of the hero, de le heros ; 

au prince, to the prince, a. le prince ; 

au heros, to the hero, a le heros. 

50. 2. Before any noun in the plural : 

des princes, of the princes, instead of de les princes; 

des enfants, of the children, de les enfants ; 

aux amis, to the friends, ^ les amis ; 

aux ferames, to the women, ^ les femmes. 



56 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

(oiy The article, and the prepositions n and de, whether 
cotrtreicted or not, are invariably to be repeated before 
every substantive : as, 

II dut la vie a la clemenrp He owed his life to the clemeri' 

et a la magnariimite du vain- cy and magnanimity of the con- 

queur. " queror. 

II est comble d'honneur et de He is loaded with honour and 

gloire. glory. 

EXERCISE VII. 

The soul of man, without cultivation, is like a diamond 
&me,/. art. culture diamant, th. 

in the rough. Self-love and pride are always the 

brut art. amour-propre art. orgueil 

offspring of a ^weak 'mind. The top of the mountains, 
partage, m. esprit, m. sommet, m. montage, 

and the bottom of the valleys, are equally agreeable. Silk is 

fond, 771. valine art. Soie, /. 

soft to the touch. The happiness of a ^feeling 'man, is to relieve 
douce toucher, m. bonheur, m. sensible de subvenir h 

the wants of the poor. A man given to pleasure was 
besoin pauvre, in. s. Iivr6 art. plaisir, m. ne f'lt 

never a great man. He obeyed the orders of the king. The 
• ob^it h ordres 

warbling of birds, the murmuring of streams, the enamel 
gazouillement, m. art. murmure, m. art, ruisseau (5niail, m. 

of meadows, the coolness of woods, the fragrance of 

art. prairie fraicheur,/. art. parfuna, m. art. 

flowers, and the sweet smell of plants, contribute greatly to 

fleur douce odeur,/. art. plante contribuent beaucoup 

the pleasures of the mind, and to the health of the body. The 

VI. sant^,/ corps, m. 

history of man, under all the circumstances of life, is the 

art. dans toutes circonstances art. vie,/, 

study of the wise. What we value is health, 

^tude sage, vi. Ce que estimons c6 est art. art. 

frugality, liberty, Nigour of mind and body. 
/. art. f. anrt. f. art. art. 

52. Du^ de la., de Z', rfes, put before substantives taken 
in a partitive sense, always imply that some word or words 
understood precede them, such as rine portion., un mor- 
ceau^ quelques-uns., &c., the equivalent of which, in Eng- 
lish, is some^ or any : as, 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 



^ 



Je mange du pain. I eat bread. 

II prend de la peine. He takes some trouble. 

Vous avez de 1' amitie. You have some friends hip. 

Avez-vous des livres ] Have you got any books ? 

•53. It is to be observed that some, or aw?/, is sometimes 
understood in English too; but the equivalent of du^ de 
la, de /', des, which is of the, is very seldom expressed. 

EXERCISE VIII. 

Give me some bread and butter. Offer him some meat. 

Donnez-moi art. beurre, 7ft. Ofl^rez-lui viande, /. 

'I'rtke some salt. There is mustard. We have some 

I'renez sel, m. Voili art. moutarde,/. Nous avons 

tfherkins. Shall I offer you some chicken 1 Shall I help you to 
•'oriiichons. • 'Vous offrirai-je- • ixjiilef? m. Vous servirai-je — 

sojne fruit ] I will take, with pleasure, some broth. Bring me 

fruit ? m. Je prendrai volontiers bouillon, m. Apportez-moi 

some knives. Pour me out some beer. Drink some wine. 

couteaux. Versez-moi — bi6re,/. Buvez vin, 7/1. 

Take some tea. Put in some sugar and milk. I hear 
Prenez th6, tk. Mettez-y siicre,7n. art. lait, 7n. J6 entends 

some noise. There falls some hail. She has some pride. 

bruit, m. II tombe grele,,/. Ella orgueil, m 

Have you any ink and pens] Put some oil and 
Avez-vous encre art. plumes'? Mettez huile art. 

vinegar to the salad. Eat some lobster. He has 

vinaigre, m. sur salade, /. Mangez h. asp. honiard, m. 

received some gold and silver. 

re§u or art. argent. 



CHAPTER IIT. 

OF THE ADJECTIVE. 

54. The adjective is a word, which is added to a sub 
stantive, to express its quality, or manner of being: as, 

ban papier, good paper,- bonne plume, a good pen ; 
cet habit, this coat ; rnon habit, my coat. 

55. In French, the adjective takes the gender and 
number of the substantive to which it relates. 



68 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

•56. There are two sorts of adjectives ; the qualificative^ 
and determinative. 

57. The qualificative adjective is that which expresses 
the quality of the substantive : as, 

bon, good ; beau, fine. 

58. The determinative adjective is that which deter 
mines or limits the signification of its substantive : as, 

ma maison, my house ; cette porte, this door. 

OF THE QUALIFICATIVE ADJECTIVE. 

59. This adjective can express the quality, either sim- 
ply, or with comparison, or to a very high degree ; hence, 
three degrees of qualification. 

60. The three degrees of qualification are : the posi- 
tive^ the comparative and the superlative. 

61. 1. The positive expresses simply the quality : as, 
Le merite est modeste. Merit is modest. 

62. 2. The comparative expresses the quality with 
comparison. There are three sorts of comparatives : 

63. The comparative of equality, which is formed by 
putting aussi^ as, or autanl, as much, before tlie adjective, 
and que, as, after it : as, 

Cesar etait aussi eloquent que Caesar was as eloquent as 

brave. brave. 

Cesar etait autant admire Caesar was as much admired 

qu' estime as esteemed. 

64. The comparative of inferiority, which is formed by 
placing moins, less, before the adjective, and que, than, 
after it : as. 

La violette est moins belle que The violet is less beautiful than 
la rose. the rose. 

65. And the comparative of superiority, which is 
formed by putting plus, more, before the adjective, and 
que, than, after it : as, 

La rose est plus belle que la The rose is more beautiful than 
riolette. the violet. 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 59 



EXERCISE IX. 

Shipwreck and death are less fatal than the pleasures 

art. naufrage, m. art. mort, /. funeste 

^hich attack virtue. 2pope's Hmages are as perfect 

£ii attaquent, art. vertu,/. De Pope art. f. parfait 

^ his style is harmonious. Delicacy of taste is a gift 

^ TO. art. D61icatesse art. gout, m. don, m. 

f nature, as scarce as true genius. The love ol 

art. f. rare art. vrai g^nie, ?«. amour 

our neighbour is as necessary in society, for the 

ait. — prochain, m. dans art. f. pour 

happiness of life, as in Christianity, for 2eternal 

bonheur, m. art. art. christianisine, m. ^ternel art. 

salvation. It is as easy to do good, as to do evil, 

salut, m. ais6 de faire art. bicn, m. art. mal, m. 

He has as much wit as his brother, but he has not so much 

de esprit autant 

vanity. The republic of Athens was more illustrious than 
de vanity. r^publique,/. Ath6nes illuslre 

tha. of Lacedemon. Homer was, perhaps, a greater genius 

Lac^d^mone. Homere peut-fetre grand 

than Virgil; but Virgil had a more ^delicate and more ^refined 

Virgile ; avait fin ddlicat 

'taste than Homer. Milton ^appears to 'me more sublime than all 

parait — me tou3 

the other ^epjc ipoets. Autumn is less varied than 



other 2epic 


Ipoets. Autumn 


is less varied 


autre ^pique 


po6te. art. Autonme, m. 


vari6 


spring, 


but it is richer. 




printemps, m. 


riche. 





66. The three following adjectives are comparatives in 
tliemselves : 

67. MeiUeur, better, is used instead of plus hon, which 
is never said : as, 

Ceci est bon, mais cela est This is good, but that is bei^ 
meilleur. ter. 

68. Plre^ worse, is used instead of plus mauvais: as, 
Sa condition est mauvaise, mais His condition is bad, but it fun 

«lle a ete pire. been worse. 

69. Moindre, less, is used instead o( plus petit: as. 

Ma depenst est petite, mais la Mi, expense issmall,but yours 
votre est moindre. is less. 



CO COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

70. These comparatives must not be mistaken for the 
three adverbs, mieux, pis,, moins^ which are generally ren- 
dered by the same English words, better, worse, and less. 

71. Mieux is used instead of _pZw5 bien^ more well, 
which is said in neither language : as, 

Ceci est bien, mais cela est This is well, but that is bet- 
mieux. ter. 

72. Pis is used for plus mal^ worse : as, 

II se portait mal, mais 11 est pis He was unwell, but he is warse 
que jamais. than ever. 

73. Moins, is used for plus pen,, which is never heard : 
as, 

Je parle peu, vous parlez encore / speak little, you speak still 
raoins. less. 

EXERCISE X. 

His reasoning is not better than yours. Your style is 

raisonnement, m. le v6tre. Votre m. 
a great deal better than that of his brother. The thickness of 

^de beaucoup: celui ^paisseur,/. 

this wall is less than that of the 2next 'wall. This column is 

mtir, m. celle voisin colonne,/. 

less than the other in height and thickness. The remedy 

autre en hauteur en grosseur. remade, m. 
is worse than the disease. Your horse is worse than mine, 

mal, 7/1. cheval, m. le mien. 

The wine which he brought to-day is still worse than that 

m. a apporte aujourd'hui encore 

of yesterday. Give him more bread and less meat. From 

hier. Donnez-lui de pain de viande. 
bad to worse. It is worse than ever, 
en Ce 

74. 3 The superlative expresses the quality in a very 
high, or in its highest degree : hence, two sorts of super- 
latives, the absolute and the relative. 

75. The superlative absolute, which marks a very hiffh 
degree without comparison, is formed hy puiiing tres, fort^ 
hien,, very, before the adjective : as, 

La niodestie est tres-rare. Modesty is very rare. 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 61 

76. The superlative relative, which marks the highest 
rlegree with comparison, is formed by prefixing the article 
le to the comparatives meilleur, moindre, pire, and to the 
adverbs plus and moins : as, 

La modestie est la plus belle des Modesty is the finest of qua- 
qualites. lities. 

77. Plus and moins, with the article, are repeated be- 
fore every adjective. 

EXERCISE XI. 

That landscape is very diversified, very extensive, and infinitely 

paysage, m. vari6 ^tendu 

agreeable on every side. The Alps are very high and very 

de tout c6t^, m. Alpes, /. 

steep. The style of Fenelon is very rich, and very harmonious, but 
escarp^. m. 

it is sometimes prolix ; that of Bossuet is extremely sublime, 
il quelquefois prolixe; celui 61ev6, 

but it is sometimes harsh and unpolished. The most beautiful 

dur rude, 

comparison that there is, perhaps, in any language, is that which 

/. • -qu'il y ait- • dans aucun langue,/. celle que 

Pope has drawn from the Alps, in his Essay on Criticism. The most 

tir6 Essai art. Critique,/, 

able men 2are 'not always the most virtuous. The most an- 

habile gens pas vertueux. 

cient and most general of all kinds of idolatry, was the 

art. espfice, /. 
worship rendered to the sun. The least excusable of all 
culte, VI. rendu soleil, m. art 

errors, is that which is wilful, 
erreur,/. volontaire. 

OF THE FORMATION OF THE FEMININE. 

\78. ) Rule 1. All adjectives ending in the singular in 
e mute, are of both genders, except maitre and traitre^ 
tvhich make maiiresse and traifresse : as, 

un homme aimable, mi amiable man ; 

une femme aimable, an amiable woman. 

79. Rule 2. Whenever the adjective does not end in 
t mute, the e mute is added to form its feminine : as. 



62 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

un homme prudent, a prudent man; 
une femme prudente, a prudent woman. 

80. Rule 3. Adjectives in el^ien<^ on^ e^, to form their 
feminine, double their last consonant, and take e mute :* as, 

masc. fern. 

cruel, cruelle, cruel ,- 

ancien, ancienne, ancient ; 

bon, bonne, good ; 

net, nette, cltan. 

81. Rule 4. Adjectives ending in/, change this letter 
into u, and take e mute : as, 

■masc. fern. 

bref, breve, short; 

actif, active, active,- 

naif, naive, ingenious ; 

neuf, neuve, new. ^ 

82. Rule 5, Adjectives ending in a?, change this let- 
ter into 5, and take e mute : as, 

vmsc. fem. 

honteux, honteuse, ashamed; 

vertueux, vertueuse, virtuous; 

jaloux, jalouse, Jealous. 

83. Rule 6. Adjectives ending in ewr, form their i 
feminine in three different manners : I 

I 

84. 1. Those that are derived from verbs, change the ji 
r into s, and take e mute : as, 

masc. fem. |j 

trompeur, trompcuse, deceitful; | 







menteur, 


menteuse. 


lying. 








85. 
rice : 


2. 

as. 


Those that are of Latin origin. 


change 


eur 


into 






masc. 
acteur, 
admirateur. 


fem. 
actrice, 
admiratrice, 


actor, actress ; 
admirer. 







* But concret, complete discret, indiscret, inquiet, incomplet, pret, 
replet, secret, suref, form tbeir feminine by changing ef into (te, and ; 
make coficrcte, complete, &c 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 63 



86. 3. Tliosp that indicate opposition or comparison, 
take only an e mute, and follow the second rule : as, 

masc. fevi. 

anterieur, anterieure, anterior ^ 
meilleur, meilleure, better. 

EXERCISE XIT. 

She is decent. This house is well situated. I'his pear is too 
Cette maison, /. bien situ6. poire, /. trop 

ripe. She is tall and well formed. This story is very 
niur. grand fait. histoire,/. trfia 

entertaining. This person is very unsteady. This mountain 
atnusant. personne,/. l^ger. montagne,/ 

IS steep. This road is not very safe. The door is not open. 
escarp6. route,/. sur. porta,/. ouvert. 

This room is dark. This street is too narrow. It is an ancient 
chambre,/. obscur. rue,/. 6troit. Ce 

custom. She is a^ gpod actress. His memory will be immortaV 
coutume,/. Ce • acteur. Sa m^moire,/. immortel. 

His manners are natural. The engagement was warm. That is 
inani6re,/. na'if. action,/. vif. ••Voiia.-- 

an 2original "thought. This cloth is the best of all. They are 
neuf pens^e,/. 6toffe,/. f.pl. Ce 

^delusive 'promises. He seduces by his 2fawning ^manners, 
des trompour promesse, /. s^duit flatteur 

The delightful valley of Tempe is in Thessaly. She is deaf 
d^licieux valine,/. Temp6 Tliessaiie. sourd 

and dumb, 
muet. 

87. The following adjectives form their feminine 
irregularly, and must be learned separately. Some of them 
have no feminine, others have no masculine : 

MASCUXIITE. FEMININE. 

absons absoute absolved 

bailleur bailleresse a lessor 

bas basse loro 

he\, before a vowel or h mute • ■ • T^^^^ '-^"^ 

b^iiin b^nigne benign 

fcisch^, {said of eggs) rotten and broken 

bin lie blanche whitt 

Ino masc. blette overripe 

l''"^""^ • {boSss^'iii^ie;™;^'^;™;^;,^::^"^-^^'^'^ 

['■ailtic caduqne decrepid 

'."" >"nsc. cantatrice a celebrated songstress 

[•^^s-..' casse hoarse. Woken 

I 



64 COLLOT-S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

MASCULINE. FEMIXIXE. 

^^^^^^""^ ''""'«'■{ SasIeJ^V^in'p^e^ai'.tV/ei:::}^''"^'-"' 

cb&tain nvt-brown 

coi coite still, snug 

defendeur defenderesse defendant 

demandeur demanderesse plaintiff 

dispos active, cheerful 

doux douce siceet 

drSle f drole queer 

\ dr61esse a worthless creature ^ 

enchanteur enchanteresse delightful ' 

6pais ■ epaisse tiick 

pxpr6s expresse express 

fot fop 

faux: fausse false 

lavori favorite favourite 

fol, before a vowel or h vivte • • • • 1 ^ „ . 

foJ... r°"« ""'^ 

^fraia,- fraiche fresh 

franc francTie frank 

gentil gentiTIe genteel ^ 

gouverneur governor- -gouvernante goierriess 

eras ?rass§ fat 

Grec CTfecque Greek : 

gros grosse big • 

jouvenceau- --a lad, a stripling- jouvencelle a lass 

jumeau jumelle twin 

Tas • • • • ittsse • ' tired 

long longue long , 

maitre master- -maitresse mistress 

malin maljgne malignant 

metis m^tisse mongrel 

mol, before a vowel or h mute ■ • ") ,, „ -, 

moil-... I"'""^ ^''-^^ 

mulitre mulitresse mulatto 

nouveau... • ••••••••• Inouvelle new 

nouvel, before a vowel or n mute 3 

nul nulle none 

paillet, (said of wine) pale 

pareil pareille like 

Pauvre-; •; {Pauvresse'.'--"-"----"--^}^'''''"'*"^^ 

p^cheur p^p heresse a sinner 

X>rifix ■■ pr?fixe prefixed i 

prof6s monk- -professe nvn 

public publique public ' 

r^sous melted, resolved 

^jfljix rousse red 

• ^ fip .- s?c5^ drtf 

serviteur ser^nte servant 

-. sot^ s otte • sillv J 

t"?moin TSmbin witness ' 

tiers tierce third 

tors torse ticisted 

traitre traitor- -traitresse traitress i 

-■ Turc TuiOUg. - Ti/rkisk 

" vengeur vengeresse revengeful - 

vermeil vermeilte Urely red 

vieil, before a vowel or h mute- lyjgjjig ^14 

vieux J 

vieillot vieilloite eldisk 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. G5 



EXERCISE XIII. 

The grass is very thick. That soup is very good, but too fat. 

herbe,/. soupe,/. mais trop 

It is a foolish undertaking. There is no truth in all that. This 

sot entreprise, /. II u' y a nul v^rit^, /. dans tout cela. 
water is not clean. It is a 2very ^silly 'history. It is in the newest 
eau,/. net. Ce fol /. di 

fashion. It is a fine statue. The law is express upon that point, 
.node,/. beau /. loi,/. m. 

He lives in a state of luxurious idleness. This wax is not very 

vit dans — — mou oisivet^,/. cire,/. 

vvnite. She is as fresh as a rose. The paint on that wainscot 
— comma /. peinture, /. de lambris,?« 

is not dry. His answer is a mere evasion. The th'mg is public. 

r6ponse,/. franc d^faite, /. chose,/. 

1 hat plant possesses a ^pernicious 'property. She is of a ^benevolent 

herbe,/. a malin quality, /. a — b^nin 

'character. The Avenging 'thunderbolt smote that impious wretch, 
humeur,/. vengeur foudre,/. frappa imjue, rw. — 

He ^extended to 'us a protecting hand. This woman is jealous and 

tendit — nous protecteur main,/. jaloux 

deceitful. His temper is mild. This colour is too red. These 
faux. Son humeur,/. doux. couleur, /. roux. 

old clothes are good for nothing, 
hardes,/. ne h rien. 

OF THE FORMATION OF THE PLURAL. 

88. General Rule. Every adjective forms its p^ral 
by the simple addition of s : as bon^ Ions ; bonne^ bonnes. 

89. This rule is without exception, as it regards the 
feminine termination ; but the masculine has the three fol- 
lowing exceptions. 

90. 1. Adjectives ending in s or x, do not change 
their termination : as, gros, gfas, heureux. 

9L 2. Those ending in aw, take x : as beau, beaux ; 
nouveau, nouveaux. 

92: 3. Some adjectives ending in al change this termi- 
Ination into aux ; as, egal, egaux ; general, generav^ : 
jothers take only s; as, fatal, fatals ; nasal, nasals: some 
'have no plural-, as, menial, vocal, &c. 



Ga COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 



EXERCISE XIV. 

They are en\ious and jealous. Those fowls are big and fat 

Us jaloiix. poulet 

Owls are 2frightfuPbirds. There are some beautiful jewels 

art. JlihovL des hideux oiseau. •■Voiia.-- de beau bijou. 

The two new operas have succeeded. Men an 

deux nouveau ont r^ussi. art. ne 

2only lequal in the infirmities of nature. The ^genera 

par art. 

'officers are assembled. This fruit is excellent. His proficiency 
assemble. m. pi. sont Ses progr^s, m. pi 

is slow, but solid. All his friends have been very glad to ^set 
soiii solide. ami €t€ bien aise de voij 

him. Those ladies are tired with walking. You have powerfa, 
le. las de marcher. avez de , 

eneniies, but their efforts will be vain and useless. The four 2cardi- 
I'Miieini, leurs seront inutile. quatre 

nal 'points are the east, west, south and north 
orient, Occident, sud nord. 

OF THE DETERMIXATIVE ADJECTIVE. 

93. There are four kinds of Determinative Adjectives 
the JWrneraJ.) Demonstrative^ Possessive^ and Indefinite. 

94. I. The JSumeral are those which determine thf 
signification of the substantive, by adding to it an idea of 
number, or order. 

95. There are two sorts of numeral adjectives: the 
Cardinal and Ordinal. 

96. The Cardinal are those which express the num^ 
ber : as, «n, deux^ trois^ quatre^ &c. ; one, tAvo, three, 
four, &c. 

97. The Ordinal are those which mark the order, oi 
rank : as, premier^ second^ iroisienie, quatrieme. Sec. ; first 
second, third, fourth. Sec. 

98. 2. The Demonstrative are those which determine 
the signification of the substantive, by giving to it the idea 
of indication. These adjectives are : ce, cet^ celte, ces : as, 

ce soldat, *kis soldier ; 

cet enfant, this childs 



GRAMxMAR AND EXERCISES. ^T^'' '^ 



rf-tkyV*^" 



cette femme, Mi5 woman ,• 
ces animaux, ^Aese animals. 

99. 3. The Possessive are those which relate to pos- 
session or property. These adjectives are 



7/1. 


/• 


pl. 


m.4-/. 


V 'a. '^>Vt ^' -t'^ ^^ 


mon, 
ton, 
son, 
notre. 


ma, 
ta, 
sa, 
notre, 


mes, 
tes, 
ses, 
nos, 


my. 

thy. 

his, her, its. 

our. 


O-riAn-Xt ^i<^>'>v\.J 


votre, 
leur, 


votre, 
leur, 


vos, 
leurs. 


your, 
their. 





I 

I 

>' Q22*' These adjectives, in French, always agree in gen 
III der and number with the object possessed^ and not with 
J; the possessor, as in English, for which reason they must 
be repeated before every noun : as, 

Man pere, ma mere et mes My father, mother and bra- 

freres sont a la campagne, avec thers are in the country with 

vos amis et leurs enfants. your friends and their children. 

Mon cousin est alle consoler 5a My cousin is gone to conwlc 

sojur, qui a perdu son fils. his sister, who has lost her son. 

lOijj Mon, ton, son, instead of ma, ta, sa, are used be- 
fore a noun feminine beginning wim a vowel or h mute : 
thus, mon ame, my soul ; ton humtur, thy humour ; son 
amitie, his friendship, must be saic*) instead of ma ame, ta 
humeur, sa amitie. 

J 02. 4. The Indefinite are thoae which express then, 
subjects in an indefinite or general manner. These adjec- 
tives are : 



EXERCISE. XV. 

'JMy principles, my love of retirement, mv taste for 

< principe, gout, m. pour art. retraite, /. amour, m. 

jevery thing that is connected with learning, and my detestation 

, >out ce qui •■••tient t art. ins '^c\ljn, h asp. hoiine,^ 

\\ 



chaque. 


every. 


quelque, 


some. 


nul, 


no. 


plusieurs, 


several. 


pas un. 


not one* 


tel. 


such. 


aucun. 


any. 


quel, 


what. 


meme. 


same. 


quelconque. 


whatever. 


tout, 


all. 







68 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

of all spirit of party, every thing has induced me to prefer a 
pour esprit parti, tout a port6 preterer — 

life passed in the closet, to the 2active 'life of the world. Do not 
art. — de — cabinet, m. — 

think, my daughter, that thy candour, thy ingenuousness, thy taste, 
pense, que /. /. gout, t/i. 

so delicate and so refined, and even thy graces, can shelter 

d^licat fin, mfime puissent raettre i 1' abri 

thee from censure. His wit, his talents, his honesty, and 

de art. f. esprit, in. honnetete, 

even his good nature, make him beloved by every body. Our 

bonhomie, /. font aimer de tout le monde. 

constancy and our efforts will, 2at last 'surmount all obstacles. 

/. — enfin surmonteront art. 

I see nothing that can be censured in your conduct. Their 

ne vois rien que on puisse reprendre dans conduit-e. 

taste for the fantastical, the monstrous, and the marvellous, 

bizarre, m. monslrueux, m. merveilleui, m. 

gives to all their compositions, although very fine in themselves, an 
donne /. quoique en elles-memes, 

air of deformity, which shocks at first sight. Every age has 
m. difformit6, qui choque i art. coup-d' ceil, m. a 

its pleasures; every condition has its charms. He wiD submit 

6tat, m. charms. ne veut se soumettre 

to no authority whatever. Several historians have related that 
d. aucun autorite,/. historiens ont racont6 

action in the same manner. Man fears to ^see ^himself such i 

/. de /- art. craint de voir se que 

he is, because he is not such as he ought to be. Great crimes * 

parce que devrait etre. art. m 

are always preceded by some other crimes. Kot one of all those 
Eont pr6c6d6 de — Nul w 

who 2went 'there has returned. Not one believes that intelligence, 
qui ont 6t6 y ne en est revenu. ne croit nouvelle, /. 

You have no means of succeeding in that affair. This'r 
ne avez moyen, m. r^ussir dans /. 

poem is the same as that I was 2mentioning to 'you. AH 

po6me, m. que celui dont ai parle — 

the ^celestial 'bodies are in motion. What people of anti- 

celeste corps en mouvement. peuple, m. art. 

quity ever had better laws than the Egyptians! 
a eu de loi,/. que Egyptien? 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 69 



AGREEMENT OF THE ADJECTIVE WITH THE SUB- 
STANTIVE. 

103. Rule 1. The adjective always agrees in gender 
and number with the substantive to which it relates : as, 
de beaux jardins, Jine gardens. 

de belles promenades, Jine walks. 

^04) Rule 2. When the adjective relates to two sub- 
stamives singular of the same gender, it must be put in the 
plural, and agree with them in gender : as, 

Le roi et le berger sont egaux The king and the shepherd are 
apres la mort. equal after death. 

y /lQ^ Rule 3. When two substantives, to which the ad- 
jective relates, are of different genders, the adjective is to 
be put in the masculine plural : as, 

Mon pere et ma mere sont Mi/ father and mother are con- 
contens, . tented. ,. . , . 

EXERCISE XVI. 

These hills are covered with trees loaded with fruit already 

coteau, m. couvert de arbre, m. charg6 m. pi. dej^ 

ripe. A pure stream rolls its ^limpid 'water through the 
mur. Clair ruisseau, m. roule limpide crista! ^ 

midst of meadows enamelled with flowers. Every thing interests 
milieu prairie,/. ^maill6 fieur. Tout int^res&e 

the heart in this abode which is full of charms. Fly, ^incon- 
coeur, TO. s^jour, TO. — — plein attrait. Fuyez, iiicoiv- 

siderate 'youth, fly from the 'enchanting ^allurements of a 2vain 

sid6r6 jeunesse, /. — enchanteur attrait, to. 

iworld : its ^perfidious 'sweets are a 2slow 'poison, which 
monde, m. ses perfide douceur, /. lent to. 

would destroy in your soul the noble enthusiasm of 

d^truirait dans &me,/. enthousiasnae, m. art. 

goodness, and the precious seeds of ^sublime 'virtues. 

bien, m. germe, m. art. art. 

Uprightness and piety are much esteemed, even by the 

Droiture,/. art. pi^te,/. tr6s estiin6, meme de 

wicked. A man in sthe 4]:nost ^elevated, and 

m^chant, pi. — art. dans ^lev^, ^art. '^^tat 

a man in ^the ^most ^obscure Zgituation, are equally 

— art. obscur 'art. 6tat, to. ^galement 



ro 



COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 



precious in the eyes of God. Pilpay and Confucius are verj t 
a Dieu. ! 

celebrated among the nations of Asia. His probity and 

c616bre parmi peuple, m. on-t. Asie. f. son 

disinterestedness are known every where. The love of life, 
d^sint^ressement, m. connu partout. amour art. 

and the fear of death are natural to man. 

crainte, /. art. mort,/. naturel art. art. 

Ignorance and self-love are equally presumptuous. My 

/'. art. amour-propre pr^somptueux. { 

sister and brother were very attentive to the instructions of j 

mon ont ^t6 

their masters, 
maitre. 



NUMBERS. 

106. Numbers are dirided into six classes, viz. : Car- 
dinal, Ordinal, Collective, Adverlial, Distributive, and 
Proportional. 



J^''ombres Cardinal 

Cardinaux. Numbers. 

un, une 1 

deux 2 

trois 3 

quatre 4 

cinq 5 

Bix 6 

sept 7 

huit 8 

neuf 9 

dix 10 

onze 11 

douze 12 

treize 13 

quatorze 14 

quinze 15 

seize 16 

dix-sepl 17 

dix-huit 18 

dix-neuf 19 

vingt 20 

vingt et un 21 

vinsrt-deux, &;c. 22 

trente 30 

trente et un, &c. 31 

quarante iO^ 

quarante et un, &c. 41 

cinquanle 50 

cinquanle et un, &c. 51 

soixante 60 

soixante et un, &c. 61 

goixante et dix- • 70 

eoixante et onze 71 

Boi^ante dou^e. &c. 72 

ituatre-vingt • 80 



^''ombres Ordinal 

Ordinanx. Kiuiibers. 

premier, premiere 1st. 

deuxifime, second, seconds 2«/. 

troisi^me 3t/. 

quatrifime 4f/i. 

cicquifime 5th. 

sixi6me • •• : 6th. 

f eptidme 7/ A. 

Imiti^me 8/ A . 

neuvi6me 9th. 

dixi^me lOth. 

onzi6me Uth. 

douzieme 12r A 

treizifeme I3ih. 

quartorzifeme I4rth. 

quinzi6me 15/A. 

seizifime IPih. 

dLx-septiSme 17^' . 

dix-huiti6me IS:, 

dLx-neuvieme IPr 

vinsti6me 20? 

vinet et uni^me 21.- 

vine1-deuxi6tae, &:c. 22 

trentieme SC//;. 

trente et unifeme, <fcc. 31st 

quaranti^me 40^,';. 

quarante et unidme, &c. 4lff. 

cinquar.ti6me 50ih. 

cinquante et uni^me, &c. 5L^f. 

soixantifeme 60r; 

soixante et unieme. &c. 61.- 

soixante et di.\i6nie 70^; 

soixante et onzi^nie 7].--*. 

soixante-dniizi6me,&c. T^d- 

quatre-vingn^me 8(1/A 



GBAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 



Komhres 

Cardinaux. 
quaire-vingt-un, &;c. • • 

qiiatre-vingt-dix 

quatre-vingt-onze, &c. 

cent 

cent-un, &x. 



Cardinal 
M umbers. 

81 

90 

91 

100 

101 



deux cents 200 

mille 1,000 

deux mille, &c 2,000 

dix mille 10,000 

million 1,000,000 



JVombres Ordinal 

Ordinaux. Numbers. 

quatre-vingt-uni6me, &c. Hist. 

quatre-vingt-dixifime QOth. 

quatre-vingt-onzi6me, &.c. 9\st. 

chTi^me^: . TTT" 1 00(//.. 

cent-uni6me, &c. lOU-f. 

deux centi^me WOtk. 

milli6nie lOQUth. 

deux milli6me, <fec. 2000</t. 

dix milli6me 10,000fA. 

millioni6me millionth. 



Jfovibres Collective 

Collectifs. Numbers. 

une couple a couple. 

une demi douzaine half a dozen. 

une huitaine a week. 

une neuvaine nine days of prayer. 

une dixaine half a score. 

une douzaine a dozen. 

deux douzaines, <fec two dozen, ^-c. 

une qulnzaine a fortnight. 

tfhe douzaine et ") . .5"' dozen and a 

demie, &c. j (. halfSfC. 

une vingtaine a score. 

urie""'tr"entaine, ") fa score and a 

&:c. S""\ halfSfc. 

une centaine Jtoe score. 

un millier one thousand. 

deux milliers, «fcc.- -two thousand, ifc. 



JVombres Distributive 

Distributifs. Numbers. 

la moitie the half. 

un tiers one third. 

deux tiers t7co thirds. 

un quart one quarter. 

deux quarts tico qvarters. 

un cinqui6me one fifth. 

deux cinquidmes two fifths. 

un sixifime one sixth. 

deux sixi6mes tv:o .tiith.':. 

un septi6rne one. .serenth. 

deux septi^mes, Scc.-two serai>ths,i^-c. 

JVombres Proportional 

Proportionnels. Numbers. 

double double. 

triple triple. 

quadruple fourfold. 

quintuple -fircfold. 

sextuple sixfold. 

septuple sevenfold. 

octuple lightfidd. 

nonuple ninefold. 

decuple, &c. tejifi'ld, ^t. 

centuple, &;c. hundredfold, ifc. 



JVombres Adverbial 

Adverbiaux. Numbers. 

promi6rement first. 

en premier lieu in the first place. 

secondement secondly. 

troisidmement thirdly. 

luatri^mement fourthly. 

cinquifimement, &c. fifthly, ^c. 

C^Tjy When mentioning the days of the moiuh., the 
French make use of the cardinal instead of the ordinal 
number, and say, le onze (f Avril^ not le onzieme^ &.c. ; 
except, however, that instead of Z' wtz du moi.s^ they say, 
le premier du mois^ the first day of the month. 

108. Mille never takes s in the plural; thus, v'mat 
mille^ is twenty thousand, and not vingt milles^ whicli 
would mean twenty miles; and when mentioning the 
Christian era, they curtail this word into mi/, and write, 
for example, V an mil hull cent trente hidt^ and never /- an 



109. There are many other numerical expressions, 



1 



I ~ ■ 

72 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

used in poetry, music, games, &c. : as, distique^ tercet^ 
quatrain,, sixain, Jmitain, &c. ; solo, duo, trio, quatuor 
quinque, quinte, octave, &c. ; beset, sonnez, &c. 



CHAPTER IV. 

OF THE PRONOUN. 

110. A pronoun is a word substituted for a noun. 

111. There are six kinds of pronouns : the Personal, 
Possessive, Relative, Absolute, Demonstrative, and /»t- 
dejlnite. 

SECTION L 

OF THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 

112. Personal Pronouns are used for the names cf 



srsons, or 


things 


. 








Subject. 


Object. 




Subject. 




Object. 


C fje 


te 


connais, 


I 


know 


thee. 


■iitu 

^iil 


me 


conduis, 


thou 


leadest 


me. 


le 


voit, 


he 


sees 


him. 


« telle,/. 


la 


cherehe, 


she 


seeks 


her. 


Tnous 
"« 1 vous 


vous 


croyons, 


we 


believe 


you. 


nous 


persuadez, 


you 


persuade 


us. 


e1"=^ 


les 


punis&ent, 


they 


punish 


them. 


Lelles,/. 


les 


admirent, 


they 


admire 


them^ 



niS/ The pronouns me and te, are changed into moi 
armfoz, when put after the verb : as, crcis-vaoi, je te con- 
nais, toi et ton fr ere ; 

1 14. And also when put before it, to give more strength 
to the phrase : as, moi, je dis ; toi, tu ne vois rien. 

115. When the verb has no regimen direct, the objec- 
tive pronouns, le, la, les, are changed thus : 

Subject. Object. Subject. Object, 

je lui parle (a lui), I speak to him. 

je lui donne (a elle), I give to her. 

je leur ecris (a cux, or a elles), I write to them 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 73 

116. The same pronouns, ?e, Za, Zes, when put after 
the verb, are changed thus : 

Je le felicite, lui et ses amis. I congratulate him, and his 

friends. 
Je la vois, elk et ses enfants. I see her, and her children. 

Je les meprise, eux (or dies) I despise them, and their ac- 
et leurs complices. complices. 

EXERCISE XVII. 

I cast my eyes upon the objects which ^surrounded 'me, and 

portai vue,/. objel qui environnaient me, je 

eaw with pleasure that all was calm and tranquil. My father is 
vis que ^tait calme tranquille. 

satisfied with me. We have told the . truth. If we desire to 
content de avons dit v6rit6,/. d^sirons 

be happy, we must not deviate from the path of 

devons nous dcarter sentier, m. art. 

virtue. Thou art greater than I, and from thee I have 
/. es moi, toi 

2at once 'learned humility and wisdom. I was telling 
en m6me temps appris art. f. art. f. disais 

thee that dancing is to the body what taste is to the 

te que art. danse,/. m. ce que art. m, 

mind. You ^have Sshown 'us great talents; when 2will 

montr6 de m. quand mon- 

you show 'us great virtues] How Amiable 'you 2are ! How 
irerez-vous Que 6tes ! 

good you are to have thought of us! It was said of you the 

de vousetre occup6 • -on disait- • 

other day, that you intended to spend a winter in London, 
autre jour, vous vous proposiez de passer m. h LondreSj 

in order to see every thing ^curious 'which ^that ^city ^prejents. 

pour-"' voir tout ce que ville offre de. 

YoM will go with him. They received kindly neither him 

irez On ne nous accueillit ni 

nor me. You ^blame 'them, they who have ^only 'followed 
ni blamez qui ne ont que siiivi 

your counsels. When I 2saw 'them, they were at home, 
conseil. Lorsque vis 6taient chez elles. 

117. The pronouns eZ/e, elles, eux, lui, leur, used as 
regimen indirect, generally apply to persons only. 

118. When speaking of things, these pronouns are to 
be replaced by en and ?/, which are used both for persons 
and things. Thus, we say, in speaking 



74 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

of a poet: Que pensez-vous de lui ? What do you think of hint, ? 

of his works : Qu' en pensez vous? What do you think of them ? 

of a woman : Je m' approchai d' e//e. I approached her. 

of a table: Jem' en approchai. I approached it. 

of men : Je parlais d' eux. I was speaking of them. 

of books: J' en parlais. I was speaking of them. 

of women : Je pensais a elles. I was thinking of them. 

of flowers : J' ?/ pensais. 1 was thinking of them. 

119. Fand en are always put before the verb, except 
vvith the imperative affirmative. 



L20^ The pronoun se, of the third person, and com- 
mon to both numbers and genders, is used for the conju- 
gation of pronominal verbs : as, 

II se donne des louanges. He gives himself praises, 

Ella se flatte. She flatters herself 

lis se sont deshonores. They have disgraced theni- 

selves. 
Elles se sont flattees. Tliey have flattered them- 

selves. 

Q21^ Se is always put before the verb. 

J 22. Soi.) pronoun singular of the third person, and 
of both genders, is generally used in phrases where there 
is an indeterminate pronoun either expressed or under- 
stood : as, 

Chacun tire a soi. Every one draws to himself. 

N' aimer que soi, c' est n' etre To love only ourselves, is to be 
bon a rien. good for nothing. 

123. Soi may also apply to things : as, 

Le yice est odieux de soi. Vice is odious in itself. 

La vertu est aimable en soi. Virtue is amiable in itself. 



EXERCISE XVIir. 

They speak a great deal of it. That is a 2Jelicate 'affair; the 

On ••beaucoup-- Ce 

success, of it is doubtful. This tree is very high; do not 
Buccds, m. douteux. arbre, in. haut ; — 

2climb upon Ut to gather its fruit, you would fall. See 

montez — y pour en cueillir lea toinheriez. Voye* 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 



them ; I ^consent to 'it, but do not trust them. That is a fine 

••consens-- — vous fiez y. Ce 

appointment : he had ^l^ng 2aspired to 'it. In a thousand 

charge,/. — ^depuis long-temps • -aspirait' • — ^ mille 

instances we do not watch sufficiently over ourselves. The glory 
occasions on — veille assez sur soi. /. 

of the world passes away in an instant. He gives himself a great 

m. se ^vanouit en donne se 

deal of trouble. She tires herself. People should very seldom 

peine. lasse se. On doit rarement 

speak of themselves. We must take upon ourselves the care 

On doit sur soin, m. 

of our own affairs. We must help one another ; it is the law 

ses propres affaires. '-Ilfaut se entr'aider;-- • ce 

of nature. 

SECTION II. 

OF THE POSSESSIVE PRONOUN. 

124. Possessive pronouns mark the possession of per- 
sons or things which ihey represent. Some relate to one 
person, and others to several persons. 

125. Those which relate to one person, are : 

m. sing. f. sing: m. phtr. f. plur. 

1st. le mien, la mienne, les miens, les miennes, mine. 

2d. le tien, la tienne, les tiens, les tienncs, thine. 

3d. le sien, la sienne, les siens, les siennes, his, hers, its, 

126. Those which relate to several persons, are : 

m. sing. f. sing. pi. m. 8^ f. 

1st. le notre, la notre, les notres, ours. 

2d. le votre, la votre, les votres, yours. 

3d. le leur, la leur, les leurs, theirs. 

The following are examples : 

Votre pere et le mien etaient Your father and mine were 
amis. friends. 

•C est votre avantage et le It is your advantage and 
notre. ours. 

EXERCISE XIX. 

Is it your temper or hers, that 2hinders lyou from living well 
ce humeur,/. qui empdche de vivre 



76 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

together 1 If it be yours, it 2is ^easy for 'you to remedy it, 
ensemble? ce est il ais^ — de porter remade y, 

by mastering your temper; if it be hers, redouble your ccm- 
en • -prenantsurvousineme:" redoublez de — 

plaisance, attention, and good behaviour; it is very seldom 

de de proc6d6, m. pi. il tr6s rare 

that this method proves unsuccessful. If my friends had served 
moyen, m. • ••ne reussisse pas- • • avaient servi 

me with the same zeal as yours, it is very certain that I 

z61e, 771. que il trfis sm 

should have succeeded : but 3'ours have been all fire, and mine all 
■ • • aurais • • • r^ussi : €t€ de 

ice. All the pictures which we expected from Rome are 
de glace. tableaux, vi. attendions 

arrived : there are some that are a little damaged ; but yours, his, 

arrives: il y en a qui peu endommages ; 

and mine, are in good condition. We know perfectly well what 
en 6tat, vi. eavons — quels 

are your amusements in town, and I assure you we are 

a. art. f. assure que sommes 

very far from Envying 'you ^them ; but if you knew ours 
bien 6loign^e envier connaissiez 

in the country, it is most likely you would not be long 

a. campagne, /. il y a toute apparence que • -ne tarderiez pas- • 

m ^giving 'them the preference. You have opened your heart to me 
a, donner leur /. ouvert 

with that noble frankness which 2so Swell 'becomes an honest man.* 

franchise,/, qui sied t. honndte 

this confidence ^well 'deserves mine 
confiance, /. m^rite 

SECTION m. 

OF THE RELATIVE PROXOUXS. 

127. Relative pronouns are those which relate to a pre- 
ceding noun, or pronoun, called the antecedent. In the 
phrase, Z' homme qui joue^ the man who plays, qui relates 
to the substantive homme : V homme is then the antecedent 
to the pronoun relative qui. 

("who .' Dieu qui voit God v:ho sees 

. j tout everything. 

* ' ] which: Les chevaux oui The horses which 



I 



qui 
courent. are running. 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 



77 





^of which: 


L* insulte dant 


The insult of 






vous vous plaignez. 


which you com- 


dont, 


whose : 


La nature dont 


plain. 

Nature whose se- 


^ 




nous ignorons les 


crets are unknown 


de qui 




secrets. 


to us. 


* 


of whom : 


Les gens de qui 


The people of 




^ 


vous parlez. 


whom you speak. 




''whom : 


L' homme que 


The man whom 






vous cherchez. 


you seek. 


que. 


which . 


Les lois que nous 


The laius which 




L 


observons. 


we observe. 




"which : 


C est une condi- 


It is a condition 


lequel, 




tion sans laquelle il 


without which he 


laquelle, 




ne veut rien faire. 


will do nothing. 


< 


to whom : 


Ceux auxquels il 


Those to whom he 


auxquels, 




s' est adresse ont 


applied have refus- 


auxquelles, 


L. 


refuse de le defen- 
dre. 


ed to protect him. 




"what : 


J' ignore ce a quoi 


lam ignorant of 






il pense. 


what he is think- 


quoi, 


why: 


La cause, pour 


ing. 

The reason why 






quoi on 1' a arrete, 


he was arrested is 




L 


estconnue. 


known. 



128. Q?u, dont., que, are of both genders and both 
numbers. Lequel is a compound of quel, and the article 
le, la, les, with which it coalesces in the following man- 
ner: 

m. sing. f. sing-. m. plur. f. plur. 

lequel, laquelle, lesquels, lesquelles, which. 

duquel, de laquelle, desquels, desquelles, of which. 

auquel, a laquelle, auxquels, auxquelles, to which. 

129. Lequel always agrees in gender and number with 
its antecedent. Quoi, which sometimes supplies its place, 
is always governed by a preposition. 

EXERCISE XX. 

The man who sold me these pens is very cunning. The lady of 
1 a vendu rus6. dame 

! whom you speak is not handsome. The person to whom X 
j pailez personne,/. 



78 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 



wrote %st Jyear has answered me this morning. She 

6crivia art. derniere ann6e r^ponda matin, 7/1. 

will not hear of the lady whom he is going to marry. 

veut entendre parler va--. 6pouser. 

Shun vice, and love that which is just. Men ^generally 

Evitez art. m. aimez juste, art. 

'love him who 2flatters Hhem. Do 2you ^speak of the lady whose 
aiment celui flatte — parlez 

husband is so avaricious 1 There is nothing for which he ^is inot 
ruari avare 1 II ne y a rien i soit ne 

fit. -Lying is a vice for which young people 

propre. art, menBonge, m. m. pour art. gens 

ought to have the greatest horror. The table upon which you 
doivent avoir horreur,/. /. 

write is broken, 
ecrivez cass6. 



OF THE ABSOLUTE PRONOUNS. 

130. Absolute pronouns are those which have no an- 
tecedent. They are the five following : 

Cwho: Je vous dirai qui V I will tell you who 

. I a fait. has done it. 

^'^^^ ] whom: Qui consulterez- Whom will you con- 

{_ vous] sultP 

que, what : Que ferez-vous 1 WJiat will you do ? 

quoi, what : En quoi puis-je vous In what can I serve 

servir 1 you P 

quel, what : II ne sait quel parti He does not know 

prendre. what part to take. 

lequel, which .• Lequel aimez-vous le Which do yx)u like 

mieux % best ? 

131. Qui applies only to persons. f^M^ ^ 

132. Que and quoi relate to things only. ^''^^^J^^ 

133. Que?, masc, quelle., fem. sing.; quels.) masc. 
quelles.) fem. plur., always precede a substantive, and take 
its gender and number. 

134. Lequel., duquel., auqucl., &c., are used to mark a 
distinction between several persons or objects. 



' GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 79 



EXERCISE XXI. 

Who can give credit to a young man who does not speak the 
pent ajouter foi — dit 

truth? Of whom were you speaking, when I came 1 To whom 

v€nt€,f. parliez-vous vins 1 

have you lent my slate 1 Whom do you seek 1 W^hat 

avez pr6t6 ardoisel/. — cherchezi 

are you doing! What do 3you ^ask of 'mel What is 

• ••failes-vous?--« — demandez — 

the name of your father? In what city does he live? Of what 

nom, TO. Dans /. -demeure-t-ill- 

are you speaking 1 What is the country in which he was born ? 

• ••parlez-vous?-"« pays, ?/i. dans est nd'i 

There is in that affair I know not what that I do not understand. 
••Ilya-- dans /. sais entends. 



SECTION V. 
OF THE DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 

135. Demonstrative pronouns are those which indi- 
cate, in a precise manner, the persons or things which 
they represent. They are : 

S. VI. S. f. pi. 7/1. pi. f. 

ce, ce, this, or that ; ce, ce, these. 

celui, celle, this, or that ; ceux, coUes, these, or those. 

celui-ci, celle-ci, this ; ceux-ci, celles-ci, these. 

celni-1^, celle-i&, that; ceux-1^, celles-1^, those. 

cS ZfZ: ;,*ij;}Thesehave„op,„ra,. 

136. Ce is of both genders and both numbers : as, 
Est-ce la votre plume 1 Is this your pen P 

Sont-ce la vos livres ] Are these your books ? 

■nSTr^ Celui, celle ; ceux, celles^ when followed by the 
preposition de, are rendered into English by that, those : 
as, 

Cette montre ressemble a celle This watch is like that of your 

de votre frere. brother. 

Vos livres, et ceux de votre Your books, and those of your 

soeur, sant dechires. sister, are torn. 

138. When followed by a pronoun relative, these pro- 
nouns are expressed, in English, by he, she, they, him, her% 
'htm. that, those : as, 



80 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

Celui qui pratique la vertu vit He who practises virtue Uvea 

heureux. happy. 

Vous punissez celui qui n' est You, punish him who is not 

pas coupable. guilty. 

139. Celui-ci, and celui-la^ adopt the gender and num- 
ber of the substantives whose place they supply. When 
opposed to each other, celui-ci marks the nearest object, 
and celui-la the remotest : as, 

Celui-ci plait, mais celui-ld This pleases, but that cap- 
cajitive. tivates. 

140. Ceci and cela apply only to things. They may 
be used singly; but when they are opposed to each other, 
ceci expresses the nearest object, and cela the remotest : a:*, 

Je n' aime point ceci, donnez- / do not like this, give me 
moi cela. that. 

EXERCISE XXII. 

The disorders of the mind are more dangerous than those of the 

maladie, /. 
body. Gentleness, affability, and a certain urbanity, distinguish 
art. douceur,/, art f. distinguent 

the man that frequents polite company ; these are marks 

vit dans art. grand monde, m. art. f. 

by which he is known. He that ^suffers 'himself to be ruled by bis 
auxquelles on le reconnait. laisse se ••dominer-- 

passions must renounce happiness. You have punished him 

doit renoncer S. art. bonheur, m. pimi 

w ho did not 2{3eserve Ut, and rewarded her who was guilty. We 

— m^ritait le, r6compens6 

ought to pray for them who 2persecute 'us. Of all virtues, that 
devons prier ners^cutent / 

which 2most 'distinguishes a Christian, is charity. I have 

le plus distingue ce art. f. 

seen the %ing's ipalace, and that of the queen. That gold 
Sfflrt. palais, m. , 

watch which you have shown me, is not yours, it is that of your 
montre,/. que montr6e ce 

brother. The body perishes, the soul is immortal; yet all 

p^rit, immortel ; cependant 

our cares are for that, while we neglect this. This is low 

soins, m. tandis que n^gligeons bas - 

and mean, but that is grand and sublime. 

rampant, ; 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 



81 



SECTION YI. 

OF THE INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 

141. Indefinite pronouns are th^se which express, in 
an indefinite or general manner, the persons or things 
which they represent. These are : 

Cone: On aime d. se flat- One is apt to flatter 

I ter. one's self. 

I \ somebody : Onfrappe ^la porte. Sowebody knocks at 

on, -i the door. 

I I people : On dit tout haut. People say openly. 

] \ we, or they : Si *1' otivous bl&me, If they blame you, 

[_ on a tort. they are wrong. 

Quiconque est riche Whoever is rich is 

est tout. every thing. 

Quelqu^un m' a dit. Somebody has told 
me. 

Chacun s' en plaint. Every one complains 
of him. 

Ne faites pas ft. au- Do not do to others 

trui, ce que vous ne what you would not 

voudriez pas qu' on they should do to you. 
vous fit. 

I,a fiert6 ne con- Pride becomes no- 

vient a. personne. body. 

Je vous prenais pour / took you for an- 

un autre. other. 

On ne vit jamais JVo such thing waa 

rien de tel. ever seen. 

U un et V autre sont Both are good. 
bone. 

Tout nous aban- Every thing for- 

donne. sakes us. 



EXERCISE XXIIT. 

If you behave yourself in that manner, what will 2people 'say of you ? 
vous conduisez ainsi — on dira-t- 

riiey write me word from Ispahan that thou hast left Persia, 

6crit — as quitt6 art. Perse,/. 

I and art now at Paris. One can not read Tele- 

I que tu es actuelleraent ^ peut lire T^16- 

mach us, without becoming better: we there find every where a 
j maque, devenir meilleur: on y trouve •••partout-- • 

ttiild philosophy, 2nobIe ^and Elevated 'sentiments ; we there find 
I /. des volt 

I * This /' is placed between the tw^o vowels for the sake of euphony 
j It has no other use, 

! f3 



quiconque, 


whoever : 


quelqu'un. 


somebody : 


ebecun. 


every one : 


autrui. 


others : 


personne, 


nobody. 


autre, 


other : 


tel. 


such : 


r un et 1' autre 


, both.- 


tout. 


every thing 



B2 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

in every line the effusions of a noble soul, and we admire 
a chaque ligne ^panchenient beau /. des 

precepts calculated to effect the happiness of the world. Thii 
jtropre faire m. m. 

speech is addressed to whoever is guilty. Somebody has come 
.iiscours, m. • s' adresse- • est venu 

to 2spea]j^ to lyou. Every one should, for the sake of his own 
pour — devrait, — — — propre 

happiness, listen only to the voice of reason and of 

m. ne 6couier que — voix,/. art. f. art. 

truth. lie sees the faults of others, but he ^never mentions 
/. remarque d^fauts ••■'ne-en 

them. Nobody is certain of living till to-morrow. Do no< 
^parle. ne assure vivre — 

speak ill of other people, if you wish that nobody should speak 

parlez mal voulez ne parle 

ill of you. Both serve to the same purpose. You cannot per- 
servent usage, m. ne sauriez per- 

suade me of any such things All is in God, and God is in all. 
fluader — rien de — en ' 



CHAPTER V. 

OF THE VERB. 
See Introduction, pp. 19 — 22. 

142. The verb expresses the action, or the state of' 
the subject. When it expresses an action, the person or" 
thing affected by such action is called the object. 

143. Thus : Pierre punit Jean^ Peter punishes Jolip 
Here John is the object^ because he suffers the action 
which Peter performs: Peter is the subject; and punishes 
IS the verb. 

144. When the verb expresses a state, the word which , 
marks that state is called the attribute : as, Pierre dart ■ 
(Pierre est dormant)^ Peter is sleeping. Here, sleeping is 
the attribute^ because it marks the state in which Peter i«. 

145. The object., when spoken of in its connexion I 
with verbs, is more properly termed the regimen. Tliere 
fire two sorts of regimen • the direct^ and indirect. 



i\ 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 83 

146. The regimen direct is so called, because it com- 
j pletes the signification of the verb without the help of 
I any other word : as, Pierre ecril une lettre^ Peter writes 
, a letter. 

i 147. The regimen indirect is that which cannot com- 
plete the signification of the verb without the aid of a 
preposition : as, Pierre nuit a Jean^ Peter hurts John. 

148. AH the neuter verbs have only one regimen — the 
I indirect. There are many active verbs which have both 
I regimens : as il a fait un present a sa soeur^ he has made 
' a present to his sister. 

i 149. Though the greater part of the French verbs are 
regular^ there are, as in other languages, some that are 
irregular, and others that are defective. Regular verbs 
are those which are conjugated conformably to a general 
standard ; irregular verbs are those which do not conform 
to a general standard ; and defective verbs are those which 
want certain tenses, or persons. 

OF CONJUGATIONS. 

150. To conjugate a verb, is to rehearse it with all its 
different inflections. 

151. The French have four conjugations; which are 
easily distinguished by the termination of the present 
tense of the infinitive mood. The 

First ends in -er, as, parler, aimer, donner, Sfc. 

Second -ir, . . finir, sentir, ouvrir, Sfc. 

Third evoir, recevoir, apercevoir, 4"C. 

Fourth -re, . . rendre, plaire, ^c. 

152. The French, like most modern nations, not hav 
ing a sufficient number of inflections in their verbs to re- 
present the great variety of their tenses, supply this de- 
ficiency by the aid of two auxiliary verbs, avoir, to have, 
and efre, to be. 

153. Those tenses in a verb which are formed by in- 
'' flections of the present tense of the infinitive mood (which 
'I is called the root of the verb) are called simple tenses, am], 
; of course, are always expressed by a single word. But 

I 

,1 
I 



84 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

those which are formed by the union of the tenses of the 
verbs avoir or etre with a participle past, are called com- 
pound tenses. Thus : avoir, f ai, &c. ; parler, je parle, 
&c., are simple tenses : but avoir eu^f ai eu; avoir parU, ,, 
f ai parle, &c., are compound tenses. ' \ 

JYote. — In the conjugations of the verbs in this Gram- 
mar, the simple tenses are placed in the left, and the 
compound tenses in the right hand column. 



CONJUGATION OF THE AUXILIARY VERB AVOIR,TO 
HAVE, IN THE FOUR FORMS. 



1. AFFIRMATIVE FORM. 
INFINITIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT. PAST. 

avoir to have avoir eu to have had 

PARTICIPLES. 

PRESENT. 

ayant having past. 

PAST. ayant eu having had 

eu, m.; eue,/. had 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT. PRETERIT INDEFINITE. 

j' ai I have j'aieu I have had 

tu as thou hast tu as eu. thou hast had 

il a he has il a eu he has had 

nous avons we have nous avons eu tee have had 

vous avez you have vous avez eu you have had 

ils ont they have ils ont eu they have had 

IMPERFECT. PLUPERFECT. 

j' avals I had j' avals eu I had had 

tu avals thouhadst tu avals eu thou hadst had 

11 avait he had 11 avait eu he had had 

nous avions ice had nous avions eu we had lad 

vous aviez you had vous aviez eu you had had 

ils avalent the.y had ils avaient eu they had had 

PRETERIT DEFINITE. PRETERIT ANTERIOR. 

j' ens Ihad j' eus eu I had had 

tu eus thou hadst tu eus eu thou hadst had 

il eut he had 11 eut eu he had had 

nous eumes we had nous eiimes eu we had kid 

vous eutes yo^l had vous e^tes eu you had had 

Us eurent they had ils eurent eu they hud had 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 



85 



FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 

j' aurai / shall have j' aurai eu 



FUTURE ANTERIOR. 



■I shall 



til auras thou shalt have 

il aura he shall have 

nous aurous we shall have 

vous aurez you shall have 

ils auront- • 



tn auras eu thou shalt 

il aura eu he shall 

nous aureus eu we shall 

vous aurez eu you shall 

they shall 



PRESENT. 

j' aurais / should have 

tu aurais thou shouldst have 

il aurait he should have 

r\ous aurions- • • • we should have 
vous auriez you should have 



they shall have lis auront eu 

CONDITIONAL MOOD. 

PAST.* 

j' aurais eu / should 

tu aurais eu thou shouldst 

il aurait eu he should 

nous aurions eu we should 

vous auriez eu you should 



have had 
have had 
have had 
have had 
have had 
have had 



ils auraient they should have ils auraient eu- 



have had 
have had 
have had 
have had 
have had 
they should have had 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

aie have (thou) 

qu' il ait let him have 

ayons let us have 

ayez have (jjou) 

qu' ils aient let them have 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



PRESENT. 

que j' aie that I may have 

que tu aies- • that thou mayst have 

qu' il ait that he may have 

que nous n.yons- that we may have 
qne vous ayez- -thatyou may have 
qu' ils aient- • -that they may have 

IMPERFECT. 

que j' eusse- • • • that Ivdo-ht have 
que tu ewssesthat thou mig-htst have 

■^u' il eut that he miffht have 

que nous eussions • • that we mia-ht 

[have 
^ue vous eussiez- --that you vnn-ht 

[have 
lu' ilseu&sent-tAat they might have 



PRETERIT. 

que j' aie eu that I may have Jiad 

que tu aies eu- • -that thou mayst have had 

qu' il ait eu that he may have had 

que nous ayons eu- -that we may have had 
que vous ayez eu- -that you may have had 
qu' ils aient eu that they may have had 

PLUPERFECT. 

que j' eusse eu that I mighf] 

que tu eusses eu- • • -that thou mightst j 

qu' il eiit eu that he viight "^ 

que nous eussions eu- - -that ice might ["^ 

que vous eussiez eu- • -that you might ^ 

qu' ils eussent eu that they viight j 



2. NEGATIVE FORM. 
INFINITIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT. PAST. 

ue pas avoir not to have n' avoir pas eu not to have h 

PARTICIPLES. 

PRESENT. PAST. 

n' ayant pas not having n' ayant pas eu not having had 



* J' eusse eu, tic eusses eu, il eut eu, nous eussions eu, vous eussiez 
€u,ils eussent eu, I should have had, thou shouldst have had, &c., is 
also used for the Past tense of the Conditional mood. This remark 
holds good for everj' verb. 



A(i 



COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 



PRESENT. 

je n' ai pas I have not 

lu n' as pas thou hast not 

il n' a pas he has not 

nous n' avons pas we have not 

vous n' avez pas- •• -you have not 
ils n' ont pas they have not 

IMPERFECT. 

je n' avals pas I had not 

tu n' avals pas thou hadst nut 

il n' avait pas he had not 

Tious n' avlons pas \ce had not 

vous n' aviez pas you had not 

ils n' avaient pas they had not 

PRETERIT DEFINITE. 

je n' eus pas I had not 

tu n' eus pas thou hadst not 

il n' eut pas he had not 

nous n' e times pas we had not 

vous n' eutes pas you had not 

lis II' eurent pas they had not 

fi;ture absolute. 
je n' aural pas- • • -I shall not have 
tu n' auras pas- thou shalt not have 

11 n' aura pas he shall not have 

nous n'aurons pas we shall not have 
vous n'aurez pas yoii shall not have 
ils n' auront pas they shall not have 



preterit indefinite. 

je n' ai pas eu / have 

tu n' as pas eu thou hast 

11 n' a pas eu he has 

nous n' avons pas eu tee have 

vous n' avez pas eu you have 

ils n' ont pas eu they have 

PLUPERFECT. 

je n' avals pas eu I had 

tu n' avals pas eu thou hadst 

il n' avait pas eu he had 

nous n' avions pas eu we had 

vous n' aviez pas eu you had 

lis n' avaient pas eu they had 

PRETERIT ANTERIOR. 

je n' eus pas eu I had 

tu n' eus pas eu thou had"* 

11 n' eut pas eu he haa 

nous n' eumes pas eu we had 

vous n' eutes pas eu you had 

ils n' eurent pas eu they had 

FUTURE ANTERIOR. 

je n' aural pas eu / shall 

tu n' auras pas eu thou shalt 

il n' aura pas eu he shall 

nous n' auron? pas eu- • • -we shall 

vous n' aurez pas eu you shall 

ils n' auront pas eu they shall 



PRESENT. 

je n' aurais pas I should^ 

tu n' aurais pas ■t/to2t shouldst % 

il n' auralt pas he should I ^ 

nous n' aurions pas -we should f -g 
vous n' aurlez pas-v/ou should s 
ils n' auralent paiS- they should] 



CONDITIONAL MOOD. 

PAST.* 

je n' aurais pas eu I should 

tu n' aurais pas eu- -thou shouldst 

11 n' aurail pas eu he should 

nous n' aurions pas eu- -kc should 
vous n' aurlez pas eu- you should 
ils n' auraient pas eu- -they should 



not had 
not had 
not had 
not had 
not had 
not had 

not had 

not had 
not had 
not had 
not had 
not had 

not had 
not had 
not had 
not had 
not had 
not had 

not"} 
not II 
not I ■« 
not 
not 
not. 



nof] 
not II 
not ! •** 
not It 
not 4 
not] 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

n' ale pas have not (thou) 

qu' 11 n' alt pas let him not have 

n' ayons pas let us not have 

n' ayez pas have not (you) 

qu' ils n' alent pas let them not have 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT. PRETERIT. 

que je n' ale pas- -that Iniay^ que je n' ale pas eu that I may'] 

que tu n' ales pas- --that thou | que tu n' ales pas eu- that thou mayst | 1 
[mayst I « 

qu' 11 n' ait pas- --f/iat /ie wa^/ § qu' il n' ait pas eu that 

que nous n' ayons pas -tAat we >-^ que nous n' ayons pas euthat we may 

[may \ o 

q>ie vous n' ayez pas-«Aaf ?/oji ^ que vous n' ayez pas eu-(/ia< you may 

[may \ 

qn'jlsn'aiier>tp3isthattheymayj qu' lis n' alent pas eu- '-that they may. 



It 1 may \ 
u mayst ''. 

he may \ 

we mav >': 



* Also, je w' eusse pas eu, tu rC eusses pas eu, il n' eut pas eu, 
nous ?i' eussions pas eu, vous »i' eussiez pas eu, ils n' eu,ssent 
pas eu. 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 



87 



IMPERFECT. « 

que je n' eusse pus that 1 1 g 

que tu ii' eusses ^-as- that thou ■^ 

qu' il n' eilt pas that he [ g 

que nous n'eussions pas that wc \ Z 
quevousn'eussiezpas that iiou "^^ 
qu'ils n'eussentpas- -that iheij j '^ 



PLUPERFECT. „ 

que je n' eusse pas eu that /"] § 

que tu n' eusses pas eu- • • that thou ■^ ^ 

qu' il n' eut pas eu that Ae i | a 

que nous n' eussions pas en- that we | « "^ 
que vous n' eussiez pas authat yon "^^ 
qu" ils n' eussent pas eu- - -that they } g 



3. INTERROGATIVE FORM. 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT. PRETERIT INDEFINITE. 

ai-je have I ai-je eu hai-e I had 

as-tu hast thou as-tu eu hast thou had 

a-t-il has he a-t-il eu has he had 

avons-nous have ice avons-nous eu have we had 

avez-vous have you avez-vous eu have you had 

ont-ils have they ont-ils eu have they had 



IMPERFECT. 

avais-je had I 

avais-tu hadst thou 

avait-il had he 

avions-nous had we 

aviez-vous had you 

avaient-ils 



■had they avaient-ils eu- 



PRETERIT DEFINITE. 

eus-je had I 

eus-tu hadst thou 

eut-il had he 

eunies-nous had we 

eutes-vous had you 

eurent-ils had tltey 

FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 

aiirai-je shall I have 

auras-tu shalt thou have 

aura-t-il shall he have 

auroiis-nous shall ice have 

aurez-vous shall you have 

auront-ils shall they have 



PLUPERFECT. 

avais-je eu had I had 

avais-tu eu hadst thou hud 

avail-il eu had he had 

avions-nous eu had we had 

aviez-vous eu had you had 

had they had 



PRETERIT ANTERIOR. 

eus-je eu had (had 

eus-tu eu hadst thou had 

eut-il eu had he had 

eumes-nous eu had we had 

eiites-vous eu had you had 

eurent-ils eu had they had 

FUTURE ANTERIOR. 

aurai-je eu shall I have had 

auras-tu eu shalt thou have had 

aura-t-il eu shall we have had 

aurous-nous eu shall me have had 

aurez-vous eu shall you have had 

auront-ils eu shall they have had 



CONDITIONAL MOOD. 



PRESENT. 

aiirais-je should I have 

durais-tu shouldst thou have 

aurait-il should he have 

aurions-nous should we have 

auriez-vons should you have 

auraieut-il5 



•should they have auraicnt-ils eu- 



PAST.* 

aurais-je eu should I have had 

aurais-tu eu shouldst ti/ou have had 

aurait-il eu should he have hod 

aurions-nous eu should we have had 

auriez-vons eu should you have had 



should they have had 



* Also, eiisse-j'e eu, eusses-tu eu, 
emsiez-vous eu, eussent-ils tu. 



eut-il eu, eussions-7ious eu. 



BR 



COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 



4. NEGATIVE AND INTERROGATIVE FORM. 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 



PRESENT. 

n' ;ii-je pa.s have I not 

n' as lu pas hast thou not 

n' a-t-il pas has he not 

ri' avoiis-jious pas have tee not 

n' avsz-votis pas have you not 

n' oiit-ils i)as have they not 

IMPERFECT. 

n' avais-je pas had I not 

XV uvais-tu pas hadst thou not 

n' avait-il pas hud he not 

n' avidus nous pas had we not 

n" aviez-vous pas had sou not 

n' avaient-ils pas had they not 

PRETERIT DEFINITE. 

n' eiis-je pas had I not 

n' eus-tu pas hadst thou not 

n' etit-il pas had he not 

n' euiiics-iious pas had we not 

n' eutes-vous pas had you not 

n' eurent-ils pas had they not 

Fl'TURE ABSOLUTE. 

n' aiirai-je pas- •• • shall I not have 
n' auras-ui pas shalt thou not have 
n' a\ira-t-il pas ■ ■ shall he not have 
n" a\irons-r\ouspa.s.sha}l7cenot have 
iraiirez-\ ous pa.s. shall you not have 
n"auroiit-ils pas s/taZZ they not have 



PRETERIT INDEFINITE. 

' ai-je pas eu have I not 

as-tu pas eu hast thou not 

a-t-il pas eu has he not 

avons-nous pas eu have wenot 

avez-vous pas eu have you not 

ont-ils pas eu — • • have they not 

IMPERFECT. 

avais-je pas eu had I not 

avai.«-tu pas eu hadst thou not 

avail-il naseu had he not 

avions-nous pas eu had icenut 

a\iez-vous pas eu. had younot 

avaient-ils pas eu had they not 



PRETERIT ANTERIOR. 

n' eus je pas eu had I not 

n' eus-tu pas eu hadst thou n^t 

n' e;it-il pas eu had he not 

n' euines-nous pas eu had ice not 

n' eutes-vous pas eu had you not 

n' eurent-ils pas eu had they not 

FURURE ANTERIOR. 

n' aurai-je pas eu •• • - shall I not have 
n'auras-tu pas na-shalt thou not have 
n' aura-t-il pas eu • -shall he not hare 
n' aurons-nous pus en. shall ice not have 
n' aiirez-vous pas eu.shall younot have 
n' auront-ilspas eu . shall they not have 



had 1 
hail 

had 
had 
had 
had I 

had . 

had 

had 

had 

had 

had 

had 
had 
had i 
had 
had t 
had I 

had ; 
had 
had 
had 
haa ' 
had I 



CONDITIONAL MOOD. 

PRESENT. PAST.* 

n' aurais-je pas- - -should Inot have n' aurais-je pas eu should I not'^, 

n' aurais-tupas • •shouldstthou not ii' aurais-tupas eu- -shouldst thou \ot 

[have I 

T]' a.\ira\X-\] PB.S- -should he not have n' aurait-il pas eu should ke not | "^ 

n' aurious-nous pas- -should tre not n' aurions-nous pas eu- -should ice not ( -^ 

[have 

■n aurisz-vouspas- -should you not n' auriez-vous pas eushould you not 

[have 

n' auriaent-ilspas- -should they not n' auraienc-ils pas eu- should they not 

[have 



EXERCISE XXIV. 

154. The substantive being taken in a partitive sense 
in this exercise, the article, where the adjective follows 



• Also, n^ cusse-Je pas eu, n' eusses-tu pas et^ ri' eiif-il pas eu, 
Ki cussions-nous pas eu, n' eussiez-vous pas eu, n eussent-ils pas eu. 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 89 

the substantive, must be used as directed in art. 52 and 53, 
page 56 and 57 ante. 

I have 2very ^black 'ink. Thou hast had 2hoTiest 'procoedings. 
/. hoDiiete proc^d^. 

She has 2uncoiT)rnon 'graces. You had had 2exquisite 'melons. 

rare exquis 

They have had 2ready 'money. I shall have 2vei7 ^studious 'pupils* 

coniptaiit argent. appliqu6 ^16ve. 

We shall have 2uscless 'cares. You will have 2true ^and •'real 'plea- 
inutile soin. r^el 
Bures. They will have 2poignant 'griefs. 

cuisant chagrin, m. 



l'55 y The article, however is to be omitted, if the ad- 
jective, or an adverb of quantity (as plus^ more, &c.), 
precedes the substantive ; and only rfe, rf', is to be used : 
except bien^ much, which requires rfw, de la^ de /', des. 
The article is also to be omitted in negative sentences, 
excejptjwhen the substantive is followed by an adjective, 
6'r~~any other word which determines its signification. 
Examples : 

J' ai de bon pain, I have good bread. 

Je n' ai pas de pain, I have no bread. 

Je n'ai pas de I'argent pour le de- / have not money to spend 

penser foUement, it in a foolish way. 

I shall have good paper. She will have had charming flowers. 

VI. charmant fleur,/. 

We have had good pens. I should have fine engravings. 

plume, /. gravure, /. 

They should have long conversations. We should have had a great 

/• 
deal of trouble. You have not 2ungrateful 'children. He has not 

peine. 
2dangerous 'enemies. 

156. When a verb is followed by two or more sub- 
stantives, the proper article and preposition must be re- 
peated before each. ^ 

Let him have modesty, ajid 2more ^correct 'ideas. Let us have 

juste /. 
courage and firmness. That I may have books and prints. That 
ra. fermet6, /. estainpe. 

I)* 



DO COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

they may have more condescension and 2more ^prepossessing 

condescen dance pr6venant 

'manners. That I might have a sword, musket and pistols, 
tnani^re,/. 6p6e,f. fusil, ?«. pistolet, m 

That we might have a knife, a spoon and a fork. 

couteau, m. cuiller, /. fourchette, /. 

That they might have had friendship and gratitude, 
amiti^, /. /. 

EXERCISE XXV. 

We have not had generosity. They have not had money. He had 

/. 
not a skilful gardener. I shall not have great business. You shall 

habile vi. affaires,/, 

not have had ^q^iet 'days. They should not have bad 

tranquille m. mauvais 

pictures. Have not such whims. Let them not have ^sa 
tableau, m. caprice, m. 

''whimsical % 2pxoject. That he may not have had perseverance. ^ 

bizarre projet, m. f. 

Have we had ^convenient 'houses ] Had she silk 1 Shall we have 

commode /. 

2odoriferous 'shrubs 1 Should you have good wine and ^nice 
odorif^rant arbuste 1 vi. m. fin 

'cordials] Have you not ^indulgent 'parents] Has she not had 
liqueur f f. vi. 

contempt, and even hatred for that man 1 Have they not 
m^pris, m. meme haine, h. asp. 

^inattentive 'children ] Has he not used ^far-fetched 'expre» 
enfant ?jn. fait usage de recherche /. 

gionsl Had they not excellent models'? Shall I not have sweet 
modeiel m. con- 

meats ] Shall we not have a good preacher? Should ^he not 
fitures ? /. predicateur 1 

have 2clear ^and ^just 'ideas? Would they not have had ^more 

/• 
^extensive 'knowledge? 
6tendu connaissances 1 /. 



CONJUGATION J^THE AUXILL^RY VERB ETRE, 
TO BE. 
INFINITIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT. PAST. ^ 

fetre to be avoir ^te to have bttn 



GRAMMAh AND EXERCISP:S. 



91 



6t6- 



PARTICIPLES, 



PRESENT. 

^tant being- 



ayant 6t6- 



having been 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 



PRESENT. 

je suis lam 

tu es thou art 

il est he is 

nous somnies we are 

vous eies yoii are 

ils sont they are 

IMPERFECT. 

j' ^tais I was 

lu ^lais thou wast 

il etait he was 

nous 6tions we zoere 

vous etiez you were 

ils 6taient they were 

PRETERIT DEFINITE. 

je fus I was 

tu fus thou wast 

il fut he was 

nous fumes we were 

vous futes you loere 

ilsfurent they were 

FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 

je serai I shall be 

tu seras thou shalt be 

il sera he shall be 

nous serons we shall be 

vous serez you shall be 

ils seront they shall be 



PRETERIT INDEFINITE, 

j' ai ^t6 Ihavebf-en 

tu as ^X.€ thoH hast been 

il a €i€ he has been 

nous avons ^\.€ we have been 

vous avez €i€ you have been 

ils ont 6t6 they have been 

PLUPERFECT. 

j' avais ^i€ ■• . -I had been 

tu avals ^t6 thoa hadst been 

il avait 6te -he had been 

nous avions €\.€ we had been 

vous a viez €\.€ yoit had been 

ils avaient ete they had been 

PRETERIT ANTERIOR. 

j' eus 6t6 / had been 

tu ens et6 ^ thou hadst been 

il eut 6t^ he had been 

nous eunies 6t6 joe had been 

vous eutes 6t6 you had been 

ils eurent ^te they had been 

FUTURE ANTERIOR. 

j' aural 6t6 1 shall have been 

tu auras 6t6 thou shalt have been 

il aura 6te he shall have been 

nous aurons 6t6 we shall have been 

vous aurez ^t^ you shall have been 

ils auront €i€ they shall have been 



CONDITIONAL MOOD. 



PRESENT. 

je serais I should be 

tu serais thou shouldst be 

il serait *■• -he should be 

nous serions we should be 

vous seriez- •• 
ils seraient • • • 



PAST 

j' aurais 6t6 T should have been 

tu aurais ^t6 • - • -thou shouldst have been 

il aurait 6t6 he shouid have been 

nous aurions 6t6 we should have been 

•you should be vous auriez 6t6 you should have been 

they should be ils auraient 6t6 they should have been 



IMPERATIVE MOOD, 

sois be (thou) 

qu' il soit let him be 

soyons let us be 

soyez be (you) 

qu' ils soient let them be 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT. PAST. 

que je sois • • -that I may be que j' aie ^t6 that I may have been 

que tu sois that thoumayst be que tu aies 6t6that thou mayst have been 

qu' il soit that he may be qu' il ait ^t^ that he may have been 

que nous soyons that we may be que nous ayons €x€-1hat we may have been 

que vous soyez- • • -that you may be q>ie vous ayez 4tt€that you may havt been 

qu' ils soient that they may be qu' ils aient 6t6 • -that they may have been 



92 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

IMPERFECT. PLUPERFECT. 

que je fiisse that I might be que j' eusse 6te that I mighty _^ 

que tu fusses- -that thou mightst be que lu eussfs et6- ■•that thou viightst S 

qu' il fut that he might be qu' il eut ete that he might [M 

que nous fussionsthat we might be que nous eussions ^t6- -that we viight j § 

que voiis fussiez- that you might be que vous eussiez et6- that jjou might | _s 

qu' lis fussent- • ■ that they might be qu' ils eussent 6t6 that they might) "^ 

157. The scholar will observe that the adverb, in the 
following exercise, is to be placed before the adjective. 

(J58j Whenever, in interrogative sentences, a substan- 
tive is the subject, it is to be placed at the beginning of 
the sentence, adding a pronoun for the interrogation im- 
mediately after the verb : SiS,monfrere est-il venu? is my 
/brother come ? instead of, est monfrere venuf 

l§^ In interrogative sentences, when the third person 
singular of any tense ends with a vowel, for euphony, a /, 
with a hyphen before and after it, thus -^, is introduced 
between the verb and the pronoun : as, parle-t-on, aura- 
t-elle, a-t-il, &c. 

EXERCISE XXVI. 

I am very glad to see you. Are your friends still in Philadelphia? 

bien aise de encore h Philadelphie ? 

Have not I been constant] Have we not been firm and cou 

ferme 
rageous 1 Have those men always been good and benevolent ] 

bienfaisant 1 
I was too busy to see you. Were we not too uiitractable 1 

occupe pour recevoir indocile? 

I had hitherto been very indifferent. Have you not been too 

jusqu' alors insouciant. 

imprudent 1 Had his wife been sufficiently modest and re- 

^pouse assez 

served? Was not that princess too proud 1 Were you not 

princesse fieri 

too hasty? To-morrow I shall be at home till twelve o'clock. 

prompt? chez-moi jusqu' A midi 

Will your father be at home this evening? Will 2you 

Monsieur chez-lui soirl m. 

^always ^then ^be capricious, obstinate and particular? Shall 

done quinteux, opini^tre pointilleux 1 

I not have been too severe? Will not his sister have been 

whimsical and capricious? Shall we not have been -eager 
fantasque em^rfss^ 



1 

' GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 93 

! 1, 



enough'? I would not be so rash. Would not his son 
I tdm^raire. 

joe ready in time"? But for your instructions, I should have 

pr6t k --Sans-' conseil, 

I been proud and haughty. Would that man have been 

d^daigneux hautain. 

I so • destitute of common sense 1 Do not be so lavish, 
tenement d^pourvu bon sens ? prodigue. 

j Is it possible I can be so credulous] They wish us to be more 

cr^dule 1 
j assiduous. That you should have been so avaricious. That 
! assidu. avare. 

j she might not be so arrogant. That I might have been more studious. 
j That she might have been neater. 



FIRST CONJUGATION— IX ER. 
INFINITIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT. PAST 

parler to speak avoir parl6 to have spoken 

PARTICIPLES. 

PHESENT. 

parlani speaking past. 

PAST. ayant parl6 having spoken 

parl6 spoken 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT.* PRETERIT INDEFINITE.f 

Je parle T speak j' ai parl6 T have spoken 

tu paries thou speakest fu as parl6 thou hast spoken 

il parle he speaks il a parl6 he has spoken 

nous parlons we speak nous avons parl6 we have spoken 

vous parlez you speak vous avez parl6 you have spoken 

ils parlent they speak ils ont parl6 they have spoken 

* Also, I do speak, or am speaking; thou dost speak, or art 
speaking, &c. 

Remark. The additional meanings to the different tenses given 
in these notes, are as correct as those used in the text, and apply 
equally to every verb in the French language ; but are not so fre- 
queully used. The scholar, when reviewing the verbs, should re- 
hearse each tense with the meanings in the text and notes united, in 
each of the four forms. 

t Also, I have been speaking, thou hast been speaking, &c. 



94 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

IMPERFECT.* PLUPERFECT.I 

je parlais I was speaking j' avais parl^ I had spoken 

tu parlais thou wast speakivg tu avais parle thou, hadst spoken 

il parlait he was speaking il avail parl6 he had spoken 

nous parlions- • • wc tcere speaking nous avions parle we had spoken 

vous parliez- • • -you were speaking vous aviez parle you had spoken . 

ils parlaient • • • they were speaking ils avaient parl6 they had spoken 

PRETERIT DEFINITE.t PRETERIT ANTERIOR. $ 

je parlai I spoke j' eus parl6 1 had spoken 

tu parlas thou spokest tu eu parl6 thou hadst spoken 

i\ parla he spoke il eut parl6 he had spoken 

nous parlames we spoke nous eumes parl6 we had spoken 

vous parlates you spoke vous eutes parle you had spoken 

ils parl6rent they spoke ils eurent parI6 they had spoken 

FUTURE ABSOLUTE II FUTURE ANiERIOR.^ 

je parlerai I shall speak j' aurai parl^ I shall hace spoken 

tu parleras tho7i shalt speak tu auras parl6- • • • thou shall have spoken 

il parlera he shall speak il aura parle he shall have spoken 

nous parlerons ice shall speak nous aurons parle- we shall have spoken 

vous parlerez you shall speak vous aurez parl6- - you shall have spoken 

ils parleront they shall speak ils auront parl6- • • they shall have spoken 

CONDITIONAL MOOD. 

PRESENT.** PAST.T+ 

e parlerais Ishovld speak j' aurais parl6 I shouiu have spoken 

tu parlerais- •• thoushouldst speak tu aurais ppirl^thou shouldst have spoken 

il parlerait he should speak il aurait parl6 he should have spoken 

nous parlerions- •■ we should speak nousaurions pdiTl6we should have spoken 

vouS parleriez- • you should speak vousauriez parl6- you should have spoken 

ils parleraient- • ikey should speak ils aurient parl6- they should hace spoken 

IMPERATIVE MOOD.JJ 

parle speak or do speak (thou) 

qu' il parle let him fpeak 

parlous let us speak 

parlez speak or do speak {nou) 

qu' ils parlent let them speak 

* Also, I spoke, thou spokest, &c. 

f Also, I had been speaking, thou hadst been speaking, &c. : 

i Also, I did speak, thou didst speak, &c. 

§ There is a fourth ^relent, called preterit anterior inde^nite. which. 
is used, instead of the preterit anterior, when speaking of a time not 
entirely elapsed : as f ai eu acheve mon ouvrage ce matin, cefte 
semuine, &c., and not f eus acheve. As it is found in every conju- ' 
gation, it will be inserted here : f ai eu parte, tu as eu parle, il a eu ' 
•narle, nous avons eu parle, vous avez eu parle, ils ont eu parle. 

il Also, / will speak, thou wilt speak, &c. 

t Also, I will have spoken, thou wilt have spoken, &.c. 

** Also, I would, could, or might speak ,- thou wouldsf, couldst^ 
or mightst spatk, &c. 

If Also, / would, could, or might have spoken ,• thou wouldst, 
touldst, or mightst have spoken, &.c. 

^■^ The second person singular of the imperative of this conjugation, 
tnd likewise of some verbs of tlie second, takes s after e, before the 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 95 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT.* PRETERIT. f 

que je parle that I may speak que j' aie parle that Imay^ 

que lu paries • that thou mayst speak que tu aies parl6 that thou mayst e 

i|u' il parle that he may speak qu' 11 ait parl6 that he may \ ^. 

que nous parlions that we may que nous ayons parl6- • • that we may 

[speak 

que vous parliez that youmay que vous ayez parl6- • -that you may 

[speak 

qu' lis parlent-fftat they may speak qu' Us aient parl6 that they may 

IMPERFECTt PLUPERFECT. $ 

que je parlasse that /"] .« que j' eusse parl6 that Imight'] 

1 que tu parlasses thatthotil « que tueusses parl^- that thou miff htst \ 

I <iu' il parlat that he [^ qu' il eut parl6 that he might \ 

\ que nous parlassions- that we [5 que nous eussioT\spar\€.that we might 

j que vousparlassiez- -i/iflt you .^0 que vous eussiez-paTl^.thatyouviight 

j qu' ils parlassent- •• -t/tat tAcj/J S qu' ils eussent parl6- -f/iaif/tej/mi^At 



5 






de 



OBSERVATIONS ON SOME VERBS OF THE FIRST 
CONJUGATION. 

160. 1. In verbs ending in ger^ in those tenses where 
g is followed by the vowels a or o, the e is preserved, in 
order to prevent the g from taking its hard sound : as. 
'j mangeani^ jugeons^ je negligeai. 

[i 2. In verbs ending in cer^ for a like reason, a cedilla ia 
I put under c, when followed hy a or o : as, sugant^ pla- 
i^ons, / effagai. 

\^ In verbs ending in ayer, eyer^ oyer, uyer^ the y ia 
changed into i before a mute e : as, il paie, il grasseie^ 
f emploie, il essuie, f appuierai. 

4. In some few verbs ending in eler and eter, the Zand i 
are doubled in those inflections which receive an e mute 
after these consonants : as, from appeler, il appelle ; from 
Jeter, je jetterai. 

words y and en, for the sake of euphony: sls, portes-en a tonfrere, 

carry some to thy brother ; offres-en a ta soeur, offer some to thy sis 
j ter ; apportes-y tes livres, convey thy books there. But when the 
I word en is a preposition, the letter s is not to be added : as, demeuve 

en France, remain in France. 
•\ * Also, that I can speak, that thou canst speak, &c. 

f Also, thai I can have spoken, that thou canst have spoken, &c 
j t Also, that I should, could, or would speak; that thou shouldst^ 

couldst, or wouldst speak, &c. 

§ Also, that I should, could, or would huve spoken; that thou 
ti^ihouhlst, couldst, or wouldst have spoken, &c. 



96 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

161. The first person singular of the present of the 
indicative, in verbs of the first conjugation, when used 
interrogatively, takes, for the sake of euphony, an acute 
accent on the e mute final : thus, parle-je^ prefere-je^ &c. 
The same is also the case with some verbs of the second 
conjugation, ending in -vrir^ -frir and -lir^ as, offre-je^ 
cueille-je, &c. 

EXERCISE XXVII. 

I play sometimes, but I ^never 'win. We do not command; we 

jouer gagner. 

entreat. You ^always 'borrow ; you ^never Uend. I was desiring 

emprunter; preter. prier 

them to sing a song. We wept for joy when we found 

de chanter chanson,/. pleurer de joie trouver 

her. They will empty the bottle if you do not take it away. 

vider bouteille,/. emporter — 

Bridle my horse, and bring him to me. They have broken all the 
Brider aniener On casser 

panes of glass in their windows, because they had not illuminated" 
carreau vitre fenetre,/. illuminer 

as had been ordered. We would have sent them to 

comn>e on le — ordonner. envo> er er 

prison, if they had resisted. Do I prefer pleasure to my 

r6sister. pr6f6rer. art. 

duty 1 He does not propose Salutary ^advice to his friends, 
devoir f m. proposer un avis, m. 

We do not neglect any thing to please you. I have given up 

n6gliger •••rien pour ••c^der- 

my 2favourite ^horse to my cousin. We did not protect that bad 

favori m. prot^^er m^chant 

man. The bees were there sucking the cups of the flowers. I 

abeille y sucer calice, m. 

had drained an ^unwholesome hnarsh. i Had his father re- 

dess6cher mal sain marais, m. 

jected these ^advantageous 'offers 1 He judged lightly of my inten 
rejeter avantageux /. juger 

tions. I had soon wasted my money, and exhausted my resources, 
manger ^puiser ressource,/ 

We had not ^soon 'enough closed the shutters, and let down the 

tot assez fermer volet, baisser- 

curtains. In the twinkling of an eye, they had dispersed the 
— un Clin — ceil, dispcrser 

mob. We relieve the poor. Will he support you with all 
popuUce,/. soulager pauvre, pZ. appiiyer dd 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 



97 



2We, ^perhaps, shall not 
Wonia 



his credit] We do not afflict them. 

m. affligetr 

nave 2rewarded 'enough the merit of this ^good 'man. 

r^compenser "^de bien 

not his attorney clear up that business 1 They would not unravel 

procureur d^brouiller affaire 1 d6m6ler 

the clue of that intrigue. Would those merchants have paid 

fil, VI. f. marchand payer 

their debts 1 In all thy actions, consult the light of reason. 

dette? Dana /. consulter /. art. f. 

Let us not cease to work. That you may pout incessantly, 
cesser de travailler. bouder sans cesse. 

That he might inhabit a hut, instead of a palace. That 

habiter chaumi6re,/. wt 

they would have struck their enemies with fear, 
frapper de crainte. 



SECOND CONJUGATION— IN IR, 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT. PAST. 

finir to finish avoir fini 



PARTICIPLES. 

PRESENT. 

finissant -finishing 

PAST. ayant fini- • 

fini finished 



■ to have finished 



• having finished 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 



PRESENT. 

je finis I finish 

tu finis thou finishest 

il fip.'t he finishes 

nous finissons we finish 

vous finissez you finish 

ilsfinissent they finish 

IMPERFECT. 

je finissais I was finishing 

in finissais thou wast finishing 

il finissait he was finishing 

nous finissions- --wc were finishing 
vous finissiez- • -you were finishing 



ils finissaient- • -they were finishing lis avaient fini- 



PRETERIT INDEFINITE. 

j' ai fini Ihavefinishei 

tu as fini thou hast finishe-i 

il a fini he has finished 

nous avons fini we have finished 

vous avez fini you have finished 

ils ont fini they have finished 

PLUPERFECT. 

j' avais fini I had finished 

tu avais fini thou hadst finished 

il avait fini he had finished 

nous avions fini we had finished 

vous aviez fini you had finished 



they had finished 



PRETERIT 'lEFINITE. PRETERIT ANTERIOR. 

je finis I finished j' eus fini I had finished 

tu finis •' thou finishedsf, fu eus fini thou kadst finished 

il finit • -^ he finished il eut fini he had finished 

nous finimes we finished nous eumes fini we had finished 

vous finites you finished vous eutes fini you had finished 

]i finirent they finished ils eurent fini they had finished 

E 7 ■ 



98 



COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 



FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 

je finirai J shall finish 

tu tiniras thou shall finish 

il finira he shall finish 

nous tinirons ice shall finish 

vous finirez you shall finish 

.ils tiniront theij shall finish 



FUTURE ANTERIOR. 

j' aurai fini I shall have finishei'- 

tu auras fini thou shall have finishtij 

il aura fini he shall havefinishti 

nous aurons fini ice shall have finishu 

vous aurez fini you shall havefinishei 

ils aurout fini theij shall havefinishei^ 



CONDITIONAL MOOD. 



PRESENT. 

je finirais / should finish 

lu finirais thou shouldst finish 

il iinirail he should finish 

npus finirions we should finish 

vous finiriez you should finish 

ijs finiraieut they should finish 



PAST. 

j' aurais fini /j 

tu arais :' 
il aurait 

nous aurions fini we should \^ 

vous auriez fini you should 

ils auraient fini they should} 



s fini lihould^ "3 

fini thou shouMift ^ 

L fini he should I g 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

finis finish (thou) 

qu' il finisse let him finish 

finissons let vs finish 

finissez finish (ijou) 

qu' ils finissent let them finish 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



PRESENT. 

fne je finisse that I may finish 

•^ » tu finisses that thou maystfinish 

• ?' il finisse that he may finish 

~t e nous finissions that we may 

\^finish 
ye VOUS finissiez that you may 

[finish 
«tt' Us finissent -t/tat they may finish 

IMPERFECT. 

'^ae je finjsse • that I") ^ 

\u e tu finisses that thou -^ 

qu' U finit that he [^ 

que nous finissjons- •• -that we j ^ 

que vous finissiez that you \ "^o 

qu' ib finissent that they J g 



PRETERIT. 

que j' aie fini that Imay"\ , 

que tu aies fini that thou mayst ■*" 

qu' il ait fini that he may % 

que nous ayons fini that we may \ g 

que vous ayez fini that you may [ S^ 

qu' ils aient fini that they may J j 

PLUPERFECT. 

que j' eusse fini that Imighf] % 

que tu eusses fini- •■that thou mightst ■* 

qu' il eut fini that he might j 

que nousi eussions fini • -that tee might j 
que vous eussiez fini- -that you might ». 
qu' ils eussent fini that they might j 



OBSERVATIONS ON SOME VERBS OF THE SECOND 
CONJUGATION. 

162. 1. The verb denir has two participles past:. 
henit^ which means consecrated; as, pain lenity holy 
bread ; eau henite^ holy water : and heni, which has all 
ihe Other significations of the verb ; as, peupJe heni de 
Dieu<f people blessed by God, &c. 

163. 2. 1 Hair takes a diaresis on the i in the whole 
conjugation: except irj the three persons singular of the 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 99 

present of the indicative, je hais^ iu hais^ il hait; and in 
the second person singular of the imperative, hals. 

164. 3. \Flcurir^ when used figuratively, makes ^ori's- 
sait in the imperfect of the indicative, and jlorissant in the 
participle present: as, les sciences ^orissaient^ the sciences 
were flourishing; un etat Jlorissant, a flourishing state. 
Refieurir follows the same rule. 



EXERCISE XXVIII. 

Why do you hate him 1 They cure the diseases of the body 

hair gu6rir maladie, /. 

and not those of the mind. I was building my house, when you 

bAtir /. quand 

demolished yours. We hated him because he did not act 
d6molir agir 

kindly towards us. We leaped over the ditch, and seized the 
honnfitement envers ••franchir-- foss^, m. saisir 

guilty. This plant will soon blossom if you water it often. 

plante,/. fieurir arroser 

Let him enjoy the fruit of his labours. Does ho thus define that 

jouir du travail. ainsi d^flnir 

word % Do you not pity his sorrows % I fortified his sou! 

TO. compatir &. mal 1 pr^munir 

against the dangers of seduction. Did we not frequently 

contre aTt. f. fr^quemraent 

warn our friends of the bad state of their affairs 1 Did not the 
avertir 
enemy invade an 2immense 'country ! t softened my father by my 

envahir pays 1 m. fl^chir 

submission. He did not succeed through thoughtlessness. Did not 
nouraission, /. r^ussir par 6tourderie,/. 

Alexander sully his glory by his pride 1 We never betrayed that 

ternir traliir 

'important 'secret. Will he not embellish his country-seat 1 

TO. erabellir maisoii de campagne I 

Will those men enrich their country by their industry 1 I should 

enrichir pays 

still cherish life. Couldst thou soften that ^flinty iheartT 

ch6rir art. f. attendrir de rocher 

Would men always grow old without growing wiser, if they 

art. vieillir devenir 

reflected on the shortness of life ] Shudder with horror and 

r^fl6chir brievet6 art. Fr6mir de 



100 



COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 



terror. Let us feed the poor. ]\ ever submit to Sgo -Junjust 
de effroi. nourrir vi. pi. fl^chir sous 

•a 2yoke. That I may never blemish my reputation. That they 
joug, »«. fl^trir /. 

may establish ^wise ''and sjust ^aws. That I might stun ^thc 

'des 6iourdir 

'whole neighbourhood. That they might weaken the force of their 
tout voisinage, m. affaiblir- • ■ • /. 

reasons. That we might become younger, 
raisonnement. rajeunir. 



THIRD CONJUGATION.— L\ EVOIR. 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 



recevoir to receive avoir regu • 

PARTICIPLES. 

PRESENT. 

fecevant receiving 

PAST. ayantregu- 

fegu received 



'te have receiveu 



•having received 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 



PRETERIT INDEFINITE. 



je regois 

tu regois 

il regoit 

nous recevons- 
vous recevez- • 
ils regoivent- • 



I receive j' ai regu 

thoureceivest tu as regu 

• ■ he receives il a regu 

■ •■ -we receive nous avons regu- 

• • -you receive vous avez re§u • 

• -they receive ils ont re§u 



/ have received 

■ thou hast received 

he has received 

• • we have received 
•you have received 

■ they have received 



IMPERFECT. PLUPERFECT. 

je recevais I was receiving j' avals regu I had received 

tu recevais- • • • thou wast receiving tu avals regu thou hadst receivea 

ii recevait he was receiving il avait regu he had received 

nous recevions • •we were receiving nous avions regu we had received 

vous receviez- •you were receiving vous aviez regu you had received 

ils recevaient- •they were receiving ils avaient regu they had received 



PRETERIT DEFINITE. 



PRETERIT ANTERIOR. 



jeregus 

tu regus 

il reqnt 

nous regtimes 
vous restates-. 
!ls rejurent • •• 



I received j' eus re^u I had received 

■thou receivedst tu eus regu thou hadst received j 

■ •• • he received il eut leqn he had received 

we received nous euraes regu we had received 

• • ■ you received vous elites r-equ you had received 

• ■ -they received ils eurent regu they had received • 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 



101 



FUTURE ABSOLUTE. FUTURE ANTERIOR. 

je recevrai I shall receive j' aurairegu I shall have received 

tu recevras thou shalt receive tu auras regu thou shalt havereceived 

il recevra- •• •- he shall receive il aura regu he shall have received 

nous recevrons we shall receive nous auroiis regu- zee shall have received 

vous recevrez you shall receive vous aurez re§u -you shall have received 

ils recevront they shall receive ils auront re§u- • they shall have received 

CONDITIONAL MOOD. 

PRESENT. PAST. 

je rccevrais J should receive j' aurais regu I shovld have received 

tu rccevrais- -iftoM shouldst receive tn aurais Te<^u.thou shouldst havereceived 

il recevrait he should receive il aurait regu- •• -he should have received 

nous recevrions- -we should receive nousaurions Tequ.we should havereceived 

vous recevriez- -you should receive vous aunezre<^u. youshouldhavereceived 

ils recevraient- -they should receive ils aui&ientiequ.they should havereceived 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 



regois 

qu' 11 resolve 

recevons 

recevez 

qu' ils re9oivent 



• -receive (thou) 

• let him receive 

• • -let us receive 

• - -receive (you) 
-let them receive 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



que je regoive thatl^ « que j' aie regu that Imay'^ *« 

que tu regoives that thou g que tu ales regu that thou mayest , -g 

qu' il regoive that he [^ qu' il ait regu that he may I ^ 

que nous recevions--- that ice T ^ que nous ayons re§u--- that we may j ?~ 

que vous receviez that you ^ que vous ayez regu- • • -that you may \ p 

qu' ils regoivent that they j S qu' ilsaient regu that they may j 4 



IMPERFECT. 

que je regusse that I~\ § 

que tu recusses that thou [ "S 

qu' il regut that he\^ 

que nous regussions- • -that we j « 
que vous regussiez- • -that you "So 
qu' ils regussent that they j '| 



PLUPERFECT. 

que j' eusse regu thatlmi^ht'] "g 

que tu eusses regu . that thouviightst .g 
qu' il eut ^egu that he might i S 



que nous eussions regu. «Aatit'e7/n^)^ /if 
que vous eussiez xe^u-that youm 
qu' ils eussent regu- that they m 



REMARKS ON THE THIRD CONJUGATION. 



165. This conjugation contains only seven regular 
verbs : which are, 

percevoir, to receive; decevoir, io deceive; 
apercevoir, to perceive ; devoir, to owe ; 
concevoir, to conceive ; rede voir, to owe again ; 

and recevoir^ the model verb, which has just been con- 
jugated. 

166. In verbs ending in cevoir^ the c, to preserve its 
soft sound, takes a cedilla, when followed by o or u. 



102 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

EXERCISE XXIX. 

I perceive the summit of the Alps covered with 2perpetual 
apercevoir sommet Alpes de' 6ternel 

'snow. What gratitude dost thou not owe to her who, in 
neige, /. pi. reconnaissance, /. devoir 

thy infancy, has discharged to thee the duty of a mother] Do 

remplir prfes de 
you not perceive the snare] Did I not receive him kindly 1 

pi6ge ? m. avec amiti6 ? 

We did not receive our income. I perceived him walking by 

qui s€ promenait k 
moonlight. Shall men always owe their misfortunes 
art. clair, m. de la lune. art. malhcur 

to their faults 1 -^Should 'a ^wise^man give himself up thus to 

faute ? Devoir • -s'abandonner-- art. 

despair 1 You would easily perceive 3so ^gross 'a ^rick. Do not 

m. grossier ruse, /, 

receive that mark of confidence with indifference. Let us entertain a 

•••Concevoir — 

horror of vice. That they may not collect 

de art. pour art. m. percevoir de 

^unjust itaxes. That you could not conceive the depth of this 

/. profondeur,/. 

book. I am to write to your brother to-morrow, to ^let 'him 
devoir ^crire pour faire lui 

know that your father is arrived. Were you not to siet 2them ■^know 
savoir Devoir — 

Ut sooner ] Receive this small present as a token of my friendship, 

marque, /. 
When did you hear from your sister ? We have not 

avez-vous regu des nouvelles 

heard from her since her departure. That they might not per- 
re^u de ses nouvelles depart, m. 

ceive the masts of the ship. 

m&t vaisseau, m. 



FOURTH CONJUGATION— IX RE. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT. PAST. 

vendre to sell avoir vendu to have soli 

PARTICIPLES. 

PRESENT. 

vendant selling ' past. 

PAST. ayant vendu \avvng »M 

▼endu sold 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 



103 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 



PRESENT * 

je vends / sell 

tu vends thou sellest 

il vend he sells 

nous vendons we sell 

vous vendez you sell 

ila vendent they sell 

IMPERFECT, 

je vendais Iicas selling 

tu vendais thou wast selling 

il vendait he was selling 

nous vendions we were selling 

vous vendiez you were selling 

Us vendaient they wire selling 



PRETERIT INDEFINITE. 

j' ai vendu I have sold 

tu as vendu thou hast sold 

il a vendu he has sold 

nous avons vendu we have sold 

vous avez vendu you have sold 

ils ont vendu they hace sold 

PLUPERFECT. 

j' avals vendu I had sold 

tu avais vendu than hadstsold 

il avail vendu he had sold 

nous avions vendu we had sold 

vous aviez vendu you had sold 

lis avaient vendu they had sold 



PRETERIT DEFINITE. PRETERIT ANTERIOB. 

je vendis I sold j' ens vendu I had sold 



tu vendis thou soldest 

il vendit he sold 

nous vendJmes we sold 

vous vendites you sold 

Us vendirent they sold 



tu eus vendu thou hadst sold 

il eut vendu he had sold 

nous eumes vendu we had sold 

vous eutes vendu you had sold 

ils eurent vendu they had add 



^ vendrait he should sell 

Qous vendrions we should sell 

'ous vendriez- 
\s vendraient- • 



sold 
sold 
sold 
sold 
sold 
sold 



sold 
sold 

SK)ld 

sold 
sold 
sold 



FUTURE ABSOLUTE. FURUUB ANTERIOR. 

je vendrai T shall sell j' aurai vendu I shall have 

M vendras thou shalt sell tu auras vendu thoti shalt have 

X vendra he shall sell il aura vendu he shall have 

nous vendrons we shall sell nous aurons vendu- • • -we shall have 

v^ous vendrez you shall sell vous a,inez vendu you shall have 

Us vendront they shall sell ils auront vendu they shall have 

CONDITIONAL MOOD. 

PRESENT. PAST. 

je vendrais T should sell j' aurais vendu I should have 

Ui vendrais thou shoiddst sell tu aurais vendu- -thou shoiddst have 

il aurait vendu he should have 

nous aurions vendii- we should have 
they should sell vous auriez vendu -7/0?^ should have 
they should sell Us auraient vendu- -they shotUd h^ive 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

vends sell (thou) 

qu' U vende let him sell 

vendons let vs sell 

vendez sell {you) 

qu' Us vendent let them sell 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT. PAST. 

lue je vende that I may sell que j' aie vendu that I may 

lue tu vendes-t/iot thou mayst sell qiie tu aies vendu- --that thou viayst 

■in' il vende thai he vtay sell qu' U ait vendu that he may 

que nous vendions thatweviay sell que nous ayons vendu- -fhat ve way 

que vous ver\d\ez- that you way sell que vous ayez vendu- • that you may 

qu' ils vendent- that they may sell qu' ils aient vendu • • • that they may 

* The first person singular of this tense, in verbs of all the conju- 
j gations in which it has only one syllable, is used thus, interrogatively : 
I instead of vends-Jf), we say, est-ce qne je vends ? The only excep- 
. Uons that custom authorizes are: /aiS;/>.? dis-je? dois-Je P vais-je? 
I d'jt P vois-je P 



104 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

IMPEBFECT. PLUPERFECT. 

que je vendisse that I^ ^ que j' eusse vendu that I mighty 

que tu vendisses that thou | "« que tu eusses vendu that thou mightst 2 

qu' il veiidit that he \Z qu' il eut vendu that he might I 5 

que nous vendissions-tAa« we [ "^j que nous eussions vendu f/iai?ce77//|'/t« | § 

que vous vendissiez iAat you 'a que vnus en psiez vendu ^Aa«7/0M?n?^At S 

qu' ils veiidissent- • • that they] " qu' ils eussent vendu that they viightj "~ 

EXERCISE XXX. 

I wait his return with impatience. Do you not confound these 

attendre confondre 

notions one with another 1 Do not those workmen waste 
/. art. art. ouvrier perdre 

their time about trifles ? Did those orators throw the graces 

^ des bagatelles 1 r^pandre 

of expression into their speeches? I aimed at an %onest 

art. discours ? tendre & 

'end. Did we offer our incense to the pride of a blockhead? 

"rut, TO. vendre encens sot 1 

Did not the children comedown at the first summons? Shall 

descendre ordre?OT.s. 

I hear the music of the new opera ? Will you not new-model a 

entendre /. to. refondre 

work so full of ^charming 'ideas ? They will assiduously correspond 
/. assidument correspondre 

with their friends. Should we sell our liberty ? Expect not 

Attendre 
happiness from ^external 'objects ; it is in thyself. Let us 

art. art. ext^rieur vi. 

not descend to 2useless 'particulars. Ye sovereigns, make 

descendre dans des particularite. — rendre 

the people happy. That he may not reply to ^gydi Sabguj-jj 

r^pondre un 
'criticism. That we may have aimed at the same end. That they 
critique,/, 
may not depend on anyoody. That she might not melt into 

d^pendre de personne. fondre en 

tears. That they might wait for the opinion of ^sensible 'persons. 
larmes. •••attendre"- sens6 /. 

Did I not interrupt him, while he was answering themi 

interrompre pendant que • •r^pondre- • • 

As soon as I had received my money, I returned them what they 
••Des que- • rendre 

nad lent me. I shall shear my flock in the month of May. 

I)r6ter "tondre^^ troupeau, m. 

If you do not take care, the dog will bite you. Speak loud, 
prendre garde, mordre haul, 

that I may hear what you say. 
entendre 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 



105 



OF THE NEUTER VERBS. 

167. There are, in the French language, about six 
nundred neuter verbs, the larger portion of which, like 
the active verbs, take the auxiliary avoir, to form their 
compound tenses. The exceptions, given belovv^, are 
some few which take etre; and others which take avoir 
or etre, according to the sense. The latter are marked 
with an asterisk, *. 



iborder* to land 

iccoucher* to be brought to bed 

accourir to run to 

accroitre* to increase 

aller to go 

apparaitre* to appear 

arriver to happen 

avenir to happen, to chance 

cesser* to cease, to leave off 

changer* to change 

choir to fall 

convenir* to agree, to suitf 

croitre* to grow 

decamper*- • to decamp, to run away 

ddc^der to decease 

d6choir* to decay 

decroitre* to decrease 

domeurer* to remain, to stay 

descendre*- • • -to go doion, to descend 

devenir to become 

disconvenir to deny, to disown 

disparaitre* to disappear 

^chapper* to escape 

^choir to become due 

6chouer*-fo run aground, to miscarry 

Colore to be hatched, to bloio 

embellir* to embellish 

einpirer* to grow worse 

entrer* to enter, to go in 



expirer* to expire 

intervenir to intervene 

m^savenir to succeed ill 

monter* to ascend, to go up 

mourir to die 

naitre to be born 

partir to depart, to set off 

parvenir to attain, to reack 

passer* to pass 

p6rir* to perish 

provenir to proceed 

rajeunir* to become young 

redescendre* to go down again 

redevenir to become again 

remonter* to go up again 

rentrer*- • • -to re-enter, to go in again 

repartir to set off agaiv% 

repasser* to pass again 

ressortir* to go out again 

rester* to remain, to stay 

r^sulter* to result, to follow 

retomber to fall again 

retourner to return, to go back 

revenir to come back again 

sortir* to go out 

survenir to befall, to happen 

tomber to fall 

venir -to come 

vieillir* to become old 



168. The verb avoir is used to form the compound 
tenses of those verbs which express the action of the 
subject; and the verb etre, the compound tenses of such 
verbs as express the state of the subject. 

169. The participle of those neuter verbs which take 
etre for their auxiliary, must agree, both in gender and 
number with its subject. 

f Convenir, to agree, takes etre ; and convenir, to suit, to become, 
takes avoir. 

^ Repartir, to set off again, takes etre ,- but repartir, to reply, takes 
woir. 



106 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

The following are examples : 

state: Elle es^ sortie. ., She is out. 

action : EUe a sorti ce matin, et She went out this morn* 
elle est de retour. ing, and she hus returned. 

state: Elle est montee dans sa She is gone up to her 

chambre, et elle y est restee. room, and has remained 
there. 

action : Elle a monte quatre fois She went up to her room 
a sa chambre pendant la four times in the course of 
joumee. the day. 

EXERCISE XXXI. 

They came to see us with the greatest haste. When 

— voir empressement. Quaiid 

did they arrive 1 That estate fell to his lot 

est-ce que arriver? terre,/. lui est 6chu en — partage 

He fell from his horse, but happily received only a slight 

tomber — il ne 16ger 

contusion on the knee. That thing escaped from my 

/. k genou, m. m'est — 

memory. She expired in the arms of her mother. All those 

art. a 

that were on board of that ship have perished. He is gone up to his 

room, and has remained there. 



OF THE PRONOMINAL VERBS. 

170. The pronominal verbs are those in which each 
person is conjugated through all the tenses with a double 
personal pronoun : as, 



Subj. 


Obj. 


Subj. 


Obj. 


Subj. 


Obj. 


Subj. 


Obj. 


je 


me, 


I 


myself; 


nous 


nous. 


we 


ourselves; 


tu 


te, 


ih(ni 


thyself; 


vous 


vous, 


you 


yourselves ; 


il 


se. 


he 


himself,- 


ils 


se. 


they 


themselves ; 


elle 


se, 


she 


herself ; 


elles 


se. 


they 


themselves. 



171. There are four kinds of pronominal verbs. 

172, 1. The pronoviinal verb active, which expresses 
an action of tlie subject falling, or reflected, upon the ob- 
ject: as,j'e mejlaite, I flatter myself. 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. lO: 



173. The participle past of these verbs must always 
agree in gender and number with the objective pronoun : 
as, elles se sont Jlatlees^ they have flattered themselves. 

Almost all the active verbs are susceptible of being re- 
flected. 

174. 2. The pronominal verb neuter^ which indicates 
only a state or disposition of the subject: as, se rej^entir, 
to repent. 

n75. 3. The reciprocal verb, which expresses a re- 
ciprocity of action between two or more subjects : ^s.'^'*"'^*^ 
s' entr'^ aider, to help one another, pi-- ,.^ *. )v"ti.''{3i>*-*^*3:^Alo 

176. 4. The pronominal verb impersonal, which is 
only used in the third person singular. Active verbs fre- 
quently assume this form for the sake of brevity and 
energy : as, il se faisait, there was doing ; il s' est dit it 
has been said. 

177. All the compound tenses of the pronominal verbs 
are formed by means of the auxiliary verb etre. 

178. The inflections of all the tenses of these verbs 
follow the conjugations to which they belong. 

CONJUGATION OF THE PRONOMINAL VERB SE 
LEVER, TO RISE, IN THE FOUR FORMS. 

1. AFFIRMATIVE FORM. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT. PAST. 

se lever to rise s' 6tre \ev€ to have rieen 

PARTICIPLES 

PRESENT. 

66 levant rising past. 

PAST. s' ^tant lev6 having risen 

lev6 risen 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT. PRETERIT INDEFINITE. 

je me 16ve I rise je me suis lev6 1 have risen 

tu te 16ves thou risest tu t' est lev6 thou hast risen 

A se 16ve he rises il s' est lev€ he has risen 

nous nous levons we rise nous nous sommes lev^s- •ice have risen 

vous vous levez you rise vous vous 6les lev^s you have risen 

il se 16vent they rise ils se sont lev^s they have risen 



108 



COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRE^CH 



IMPERFECT. 

je me levais / was rising- 

tu te levais thou tcast rising- 

il se levait he was rising 

noHs nous levions- -we were rising 
vous vous leviez- -you were rising 
ils se levaient they were rising 

PRETERIT DEFINITE. 

je me levai I rose 

tu te levas thou rosest 

il se leva he rose 

nous nous lev&mes we rose 

vous vous lev3.tes yuu rose 

11 se lev6rent they rose 

FUTURE ABSOLUTE. 

je me leverai I shall rise 

tu te le veras thou s halt rise 

il se levera he shall rise 

nous nous le verons • • • we shall rise 
vous vous leverez- • -you shall rise 
ils se leveront they shall rise 



PLUPERFECT. 

je m' ^tais lev6 1 had rietn 

tu t' 6tais leve thou hadst risen 

il s' 6tait leve he had risen 

nous nous etions lev6s we had risen 

vous vous 6tiez lev6s you had risen 

ils s' 6taient leves they had risen 

PRETERIT ANTERIOR. 

je me fus lev6 1 had risen 

tu te fus lev6 thou hadst risen 

il se fut leve he had risen 

nous nous fumes lev6s we had risen 

vous vous futes lev6s you had risen 

ils se furent le v^s they had risen 

FUTURE ANTERIOR. 

je me serai leve I shall have risen 

tu te seras leve thou shall have risen 

il se sera leve he shall have risen 

nous nous serons lev^s tee shall have risen 
vous vous serez leves you shall have risen 
ils se seront lev6s- -they shall have risen 



CONDITIONAL MOOD. 

PRESENT. PAST. 

je me leverais T should rise je me serais \ev€- •• I should^] 

tu te leverais thou sitouldst rise tu te serais leve thou shouldst » 

il se leverait he should rise il se serait lev6 he shLiild [x 

nous nous leverions -we should rise nous nous serions lev^s- -we should j g 

vous vous leveriez- youshouldrise vous vous seriez leves- -you should \ a 

ils se leveraient- --they should rise ils se seraient leves they should j "^ 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

16ve-toi rise (thou) 

qu' il se 16ve let him rise 

levons-nous let us rise 

levez-vous rise (you) 

qu' ils se 16vent let them rise 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT. PRETERIT. 

que je me I6ve that /I que je me sols lev6 that 

que tu te 16ves that thou \ J que tu te sois lev6 that thou 

qu' il se 16ve that he I S qu' il se soit lev6 that he 

que nous nous levions that xce j g> que nous nous soyons lev6s that we T "• j. 
que vous vous leviez that you j g que vous vous soyezlev6sfAa« j'ou j g 

)ient lev6s- -tAat tAcyJ 



qu' ils se I6vent- 



•that they 



u * 



que' ils se soient 



IMPERFECT. 

que je me levasse that r\ 

que tu te levasses- •• •that you 

qu' il se .e v&t that he 

que nous nous levassions that 

[tee 

quv. vous vous levassiez- •that 

[you 

qu' il.s se levassent- -that they^ 



PLUPERFECT. 

que je me fusse lev6 that F 

que tu te fusses lev6 that you 

qu' il se fiut lev6 that he 

que nous nous fussions lev6s- • 'that 
\we 

que vous vous fussiez lev^ that 

[you 
qu' ils se fussent lev^s- • • •that they 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 



109 



2. NEGATIVE FORM* 



PRESENT. 

ne se levant pas 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT. PAST. 

na pas se lever not to rise ne s' 6tre pas leve not to have risen 

PARTICIPLES. 

PAST. 

•not rising ne s' 6tant pas lev6 not to have risen 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT. PRETERIT INDEFINITE. 

'e ne me 16ve pas Irise not je ne me suis pas lev6 T") ^ 

in ne te 16ves pas • -thou risest not tu ne t' es pas lev6 thou 2 

il ne se 16ve pas he rises not il ne s' est pas lev6 he ! ~ 

nous ne nous le vons pas we rise not nous ne nous sommes pas lev^s • -we f e 

vous ne vous levez pas you rise not vous ne vous 6tes pas lev6s you -S 

ilane se 16 vent pas- ••they rise not ils ne se soiit pas laves they J ^ 



&c. 



&c. 



&c. 



&c. ♦ 



3. INTERROGATIVE FORM. 
INDICATIVE MOOD. 



PRESENT. 

me lev6 je do Irise 

te 16ves-tu dost thou rise 

se 16ve-t-il does he rise 

nous levons-nous do -we rise 

vous levez- vjOus do you rise 



se Idvent-ils do they rise se sont-ils lev6s 

&c. &c. &c. 



PRETERIT INDEFINITE. 

me suis-je lev6 have F risen 

V es-tu lev6 Jtast thou risen 

s' est-illev6 has he risen 

nous sommes-nous lev^s- •have we risen 

vous fites-vous lev^s have you risen 

• '-have they risen 

&.C. 



4. NEGATIVE AND INTERROGATIVE FORM. 
INDICATIVE MOOD. 



PRESENT. 

ne me lev6-je pas do I^ 

netel^ves-tupas^ •• •dostthou \ ; 

ne se 16ve-t-il pas does he t •; 

ne nous levons nous pas do we ( ■ 
ne vous levez-vous pas do you 

ne se 16vent-iis pas do theyj 

Sec. &.C. 



Dost thou not 



when he is doing 
k faire de art 



PRETERIT INDEFINITE. 

ne me suis-je pas lev6 have 

n« t' es-tu pas lev6 hast thou 

ne s' est-il pas lev6 has he 

nenoussommes-nouspaslev6s/iaue?oe 
ne vous etes vous pas lev6s have you. 
ne se sont-ils pas lev^a- • -have they 
&c. &,c. 

EXERCISE XXXII. 

deceive thyself? He is never happy but 

• • -se tromper ■? • -ne se plaire-- que 

wrong ! Do we not nurse ourselves too 

mal!m. •••s' 6couter-'> 



* It is not deemed necessary to give an example of more than two 
or three tenses of the negative, interrogative, or negative-and-inter- 
rogative forms of the pronominal verb ; as the scholar is already fami- 
liar with these forms in preceding verbs If he should lind any 
difficulty in conjugating them, he will readily surmount it by refer- 
Lng to pages 85, 86, and 87, taken in connexion with page 108, anto 



110 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

much 1 They mean to travel in the spring. Didst thou not ' 

se proposer de & m. 

lose thyself in the wood 1 It is said that he killed himself from 
••s'^garer-' -On dit- ••••se tuer- •• • 

despair. Wast thou not laying the foundation for much sorrow 

se preparer bien regret, pi. 

by thy foolish conduct! Did you not laugh at us? They ' 

se moquer de 
ruined themselves wantonly. Didst thou not confide too 

se perdre de gait6 de coeur. se confler 

inconsiderately in this man 1 Had you not been engaged in 
I6g6reinent k • -s' occuper •• de 

trifles 1 Had those travellers gone out of the right way 1 I 
bagatelle 1 se d^tourner droit chemin 1 

^ repent-ed, but too late, of having taken ^such 'a step. Did 

Be repentir, tard, avoir fait d-marche,/, 

not those ^rash 'children applaud themselves for their folly 1 

t^m^raire s' applaudir * • • • de sottisel 

As soon as I discovered that they sought to deceive me, I was 
••Ddsque^' s' apercevoir chercher se teirir 

on my guard. When he had rejoiced sufficiently, we parted. 

pi. se r^jouir assez, se s^parer. 

When they had walked enough, they sat down at the foot 

se promener s' assirent ^ 

of a tree. I will yield if they convince me. We shall not f 

se rendre on convainc 
forget ourselves so far as to be wanting in respect to him. Will fi 

• • • s' oublier • • • -jusque- -manquer-- de 

you employ the means I point out to you 1 He will have 

se servir de indiquer — 

been proud of this trifling advantage. Should I suffer myself 
B'enorgueillir faible m. • • se laisser • • 

to be drawn into the party of the rebels 1 We should not rejoice 

• •entraiiier- • m. se plaire 
to see the triumph of guilt. Would those lords avail 

triomphe art. crime, m. seigneur •••se 

themselves of their birth and fortune, to do violence to our 

prevaloir • • /. richesses, pour 

feelings "? Would this pleasing hope have vanished so soon ? 

Bsntimenti doux espoir s' ^vanouir 

Let us take an ^exact 'account of our actions. It is time that they. 

• Se rendre- compte 

should have relaxation from the fatigue of business. Did they 

se d^las^.er /. art. pi. on 

not wish that he sh )uld practise fencing 1 They required 

voulait • • s'exercer-- a. faire des armes 7 On exigeail 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. Ill 

that I should go to bed at ten o'clock. Would they have wished 

a: coucher k vouloir 

that I had revenged myself 1 We could have wished that they had 

• •• -se venger 1 

extricated themselves more skilfully from the difficulties in which 

se tirer adroitement embarras • oil • • 

""* they had placed themselves, 
•••se mettre. 



OF THE PASSIVE VERBS. 
179. There is but one mode of conjugating passive 
verbs : it is by adding to the verb etre^ through all the 
moods and tenses, the participle past of the verb active ; 
which must agree in gender and number with the sub- 
ject : as, 

Je suis aime. I am loved. 

Hon pere fut respecte. Mi/ father was respected. 

Ma mere fut reveree. Mi/ mother was revered. 

Nous serons loues. We shall be praised. 

EXERCISE XXXIII. 

That young lady is so mild, so polite, and so kind, that she 

jeune demoiselle doux, (;. honn^te, bon, 

is beloved by every body. He performed with so much 

aimer.; de jouer. tant dfe 

ability that he was universally applauded. He is known by no- 
intelligence applaudif. ' de 
body. How many countries, unknown to the ancienjsj bave been 

Que de pays, inconnu 

discovered by 2modern ^navigators ! If they had got into it 

- ■ art. navigateur I 

through the door, they should have come out of it through the window. 

To be happy and to be praised are two very different things. 

- .. art. 
Men are too often exposed to lose their life in order to get their 
: — art. 

livelihood. 



OF THE IMPERSONAL VERBS. 
180. Verbs that are conjugated only in the third per- 
son lingular are called impersonal verbs ; and are gene- 



il2 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

rally preceded by the pronoun il. Observe that the il has 
no relation to a substantive, as may be seen by the im- 
possibility of substituting a noun for it in the following ; 
examples . 

iLpleut it rains il convient it heccrmes 

trSfed. it is becoming il s' ensuit it follows 

il messied it is unbecoming i Lest a propo s it is proper 

il semble it seems il faut it is necessary 

irparait it appears il y a there is, or are 

il suffit it suffices il importe it matters 

CONJUGATION OF THE IMPERSONAL VERB NEIGER, 

TO SNOW. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT. PAST. 

neiger to snow avoir neig6 to have snowed 

PARTICIPLES. 

PRESENT. 

nel»eant snowing past. 

PAST. a yant neig6 having snoiced - 

ne\g6 snoiced 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT. PRETERIT INDEFINITE. 

il neige if snows il a neig6 it has snowed 

IMPERFECT. PLUPERFECT. 

11 neigeait it was snowing il avail neig6 it had snowed 

PRETERIT DEFINITE. PRETERIT ANTERIOR. 

il neigea it snowed il eut neig^ it had snowed 

FUTURE ABSOLUTE. FUTURE ANTERIOR. 

li neigera it will snow il aura neig6 it will have snowed 

CONDITIONAL MOOD. 

PRESENT. PAST. 

11 neigerait it should snow il auraijt neig6- -it should have snowed ;, 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

PRESEA^T. PRETERIT. 

qj a neige that it may snow qu' H ait neisi.that it may have snowet 

IMPERFECT. PLUPERFECT. 

qu' il neige&t that it might snow qu' il eut neig6. that it might hart 

[snoices 

Conjugate in like manner the following verbs. 

il arrive if happens il regele it freezes again 

il bruine it drizzles il grele it liaib 

il degele if thaws il gresille if rimes 

il edaire // liii^hte7is il rosolte it follow f 

il gele if freezes il tonne ..it Thunders 



I GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 113 

EXERCISE XXXIV. 

Does it rain this morning "? Did it hail 2 last 'night? I thought 
pie u voir m. greler /. croyais 

it had thundered. Does it not lighten 1 Do you think 
que toiiner. croyez 

it freezes 1 It was not my friend's fault that it was net 
que geler 1 • n' a pas tenu k mon ami- • la chose fut 

so. It was of great importance to succeed. Would it be proper to 
insi. •••importait beaucoup-" de Apropos dn 

vrite to your friends'? It appears that he has not attended to that basi- 
s' occuper de 
less. Perhaps it would be better to abandon the undertaking. It 

vaudrait entreprise. 

tvas sufficient to know his opinion. T advise you not to go out 

• •suffisait- de conseiller de 

this mof ning ; I think it will soon rain. It matters little whether 

que que 

you do your exercise now or later, provided it be well done. 

fassiez ponrvu que 

»You 'must speak to him about that affair. It was necessary 

II faut que sub. pr. de a fall u 

for him that he should consent to that bargain. How much do you 
— march^, m. Combien 
want 1 He does what is requisite. Do that as it should be. What 
falloir? •••fclloir faut Que 

must 'he have for his trouble 1 I could not suspect that I 
falloir lui — peine 1 f. pouvais soupyonner 

ought to ask pardon for a fault I have not committed, 
dusse — de /. que commise. 

Observe that the impersonal verb falloir can be used 
in two different ways, thus : 

II me faudra payer les frais ; or, il faudra que je paie les frais. 1 
must par/ the costs. 



CONJUGATION OF THE IMPERSONAL VERB Y AVOIR, 
THERE TO BE. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 





PRESENT. 




PAST. 






PARTICIPLES. 




y ayanl- 


PRESENT. 


• ■ there being y ayant cu- • 


PAST. 

there having been 



114 COLLOT'S PROGRESSRE FRENCH 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT. PRETERIT INDEFINITE. 

il y a there is, or there are il y a e\i..there has heen,oi there hare been 

IMPERFECT. PLUPERFECT. 

il y avail- • • there was, or there were il y avail eu there had been 

PRETERIT DEFINITE. PRETERIT ANTERIOR. 

il y eut there was, or there were il y eul eu there had been 

FUTURE ABSOLUTE. FUTURE ANTERIOR. 

lI y axrra there will be il y aura eu there will have been 

CONDITIONAL MOOD. 

PRESENT. PAST. 

il y aurait there should be il y aurait eu there should have been 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

qu' il y ait let there be 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

PRESENT. PRETERIT. 

qu' fl y dit' • that there maij be qu' il y ail eu • that there may have been 

IMPERFECT. PLITPERFECT. 

qu' 11 y eut Hhat there might be qu' il y eut e\i.that there might have been 

181. Y avoir ^ in En;^lish, is used in the plural, when 
followed by a substantive plural ; in French it remains 
always in the singular. 

EXERCISE XXXV. 

2There imust be a great difference of age between these two persons. 

II doit /. 

There being so many Svicious 'people in this world, is it 

• • -tant- • • de gens, m. 

astonishing that there are so many persons who become the \-ic- 

^tonnant ail deviennent 

tims of the corruption of the age 1 It is a thousand to 

perversity si6cle ? m. — mille ^ parier contre 

one that he will not succeed. There would be more happiness 

de bonheur 
if every one knew how to moderate his desires. I did not think 
••chacun-' savait — — croyais 

that there would be any thing to blame in his conduct. There 

rien reprendre 

would not be so many duels, did people reflect that one of the first 

si r on 
obligations of a Christian is to forgive injuries. Could 

/. Chretien de pardonner art. Pourrait-il 

there be a king happier than this, who has always been the father 

celui-ci, 
of his subjects 1 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 115 

OF THE FORMATION OF TENSES, 

182. The tenses of the verbs are divided into primi- 
iive and derivative. 

183. The 'primitive tenses are those which form all the 
other tenses, ai.d are five in number, viz. : 

The present of the infinitive, 
i The participle present, 
I The participle past, 
I The present of the indicative, and 
j The preterit definite. 

184. The derivative tenses are those which are formed 
by the primitive tenses. 

185. The present of the infinitive forms two tenses : 

186. 1. The future absolute, by changing r, re, or oz>, 
into rai : as, parler, je parlerai ; jinir, jejinirai ; vendre, 
je vendrai ; recevoir, je recevrai. 

187. 2. The conditional present, by changing r, re, or 
oir, into rais : as, parler, je parlerais ; jinir, je Jinirais ; 
vendre, je vendrais ; recevoir, je recevrais. 

188. The participle present forms two tenses : 

189. 1. The imperfect of the indicative, by changing 
ant into ais : as, parlant, je parlais ; finissant, je finissais. 

190. 2. The present of the subjunctive, by changing 
ant into e : as, parlanf, que je parle ; finissant, que je 
fmisse ; vendant, que je vende : 

191. Except the verbs of the third conjugation, which 
change evant into oive : as, recevanf, que je regoive. 

192. Observe, that the first and second persons plural 
of these two tenses, which end in ions and iez, make iions 
and iiez, when the participle ends in iant ; and make 
yions and yiez^ when the participle ends in yant : as, 
priant, nous priions, vous priiez ; pay ant, nous pay ions, 

ous payiez. 



116 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

193. The participle past forms all the compound tenses 
with the help of the verb avoir, or etre : as, f ai estime, 
je suis estime ; il avail Jini, il elait jini. 

194. The present of the indicative forms the impera- 
tive^ by suppressing the pronouns which serve as subjects : 
as, tu paries, paries ; nous parlous, parlous ; vous parlez, 
parlez. 

195. Observe, that in the first conjugation only, the 
second person singular of the imperative does not take the 
s final of the same person of the indicative. 

J 96. The preterit definite forms the imperfect of fhe 
subjunctive, by changing i into sse, for the first conjuga- 
tion, and by adding se, for the three others : as, je parlai, 
que je parlasse ; je finis, que je fiuisse ; je regus, que je 
regusse ; je vendis, que je vendisse. 

TABLE OF THE TERMINATIONS OF THE SIMPLE 
TENSES OF THE FOUR CONJUGATIONS. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 









PRESENT. 










pari 


er 


fin ir 


rec evoir 


vend re 








PARTICIPLES. 














PRESENT. 










pari 


ant 


fin issant 

PAST. 


rec 


evant 


vend aHt 




pari 


6 


fin t 


reg 


u 


vend « 








INDICATIVE MOOD. 












PRESENT. 








je 


par! 


e 


fin is 


re 5 


OlS 


vend 3 


ta 




es 


is 




ois 


8 


U 




e 


it 




oil 




nous 




ons 


issons 




evons 


ons 


vous 




ez 


issez 




evez 


ez 


Us 




ent 


issent 

IMPERFECT. 




oivent 


ent 


je 


pari 


ais 


fin issais 


rec 


evais 


vend ais 


tu 




ais 


L'ssais 




erais 


ais 


il 




ait 


usait ' 




erait 


ait 


nous 




ions 


issions 




evions 


ions 


vous 




iez 


issiez 




eviez 


iez 


ils 




aieiU 


issaient 

PRETERIT DEFINITE 




evaient 


aieiU 


je 


pari 


ai 


fin is 


re 9 


W5 


vend is 


tu 




as 


is 




us 


is 


il 




a 


It 




ut 


it 


nous 




Ames 


imes 




Unus 


imes 


vous 




dies 


hes 




ittts 


ites 


iSs 




irejU 


irent 




urent 


irsnt 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 



117 







FUTURE ABSOLUTK. 






Je 


pari erai 


fin irai 


rec evrai 


vend 


rat 


tu 


eras 


iras 


evras 




ras 


il 


era 


ira 


evra 




ra 


nous 


erons 


irons 


evrons 




rons 


VOUB 


erez 


irez 


evrez 




rez 


ila 


eront 


iront 


evront 




ront 






CONDITIONAL MOOD. , 










PRESENT. 


'■ ' 






je 


pari erats 


fin irais 


rec evrais 


vend 


rats 


tu 


erais 


irais 


evrais 




rais 


il 


erait 


irait 


evrait 




rait 


nous 


erions 


irions 


evrions 




rions 


V0U8 


eriez 


iriez 


evriez 




riez 


lis 


eraient 


iraient 


evraient 




raient 






IMPERATIVE MOOD. 








pari e 


fin is 


re 5 ois 


vend 


8 


qu'il 


e 


isse 


Give 




e 




OTIS 


issons 


evons 




ons 




ez 


issez 


evez 




ez 


qu* ils 


ent 


issent 


oivent 




ent 






SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD 










PRESENT. 








queje 


pari e 


fin is»e 


re§ oive 


vend 


e 


que tu 


es 


isses 


oives 




ei 


qu' il 


e 


isse 


oive 




e 


que nouR 


ions 


issions 


evions 




ions 


que vous 


iez 


issiez 


eriez 




iez 


qu' ils 


ent 


issent 

IMPERFECT. 


oivent 




ent 


queje 


pari asse 


fin isse 


req usst 


vend 


isse 


que tu 


asses 


isses 


usses 




isses 


qu'il 


At 


it 


^t 




it 


que nous 


assions 


issions 


ussions 




issiov-s 


que vous 


assiez 


issiez 


ussiez 




issiez 


qu' ils 


assent 


issent 


ussent 




issent 



OF THE IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS. 



197. Irregularities never occur but in the simple 
tenses. 

198. When a primitive tense is wanting, its derivative 
tenses are also wanting. 

199. The imperfect of the indicative is always regu- 
larly formed by the participle present. 



118 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

200. The future, and conditional never change their 
terminations, and the irregularity which they undergo is 
always uniform ; so that, the first person of the future 
being known, it is easy to form both tenses. 

201. The preterit definite is always regular. 

202. The imperfect of the subjunctive is always regu- 
larly formed by the preterit definite. 

203. The imperative is always regularly formed by 
the present of the indicative, except in the verbs avoir, 
etre^ and savoir^ for which see the following table. 

204. The third person singular and plural of the 
imperative being always the same as in the present of 
the subjunctive, may be considered as belonging to that 
tense. 

205. By attending to these directions, and applying 
them to the annexed " Table of the Irregular and Defec- 
tive Verbs," and the " List of all the Irregular and Defec- 
tive Verbs in the French Language not contained in the 
Table," immediately following it, the study of the im- 
portant branch of grammar here treated of may be mastered 
certainly, and without difficulty. 

206. In the " List," which consists chiefly of com- 
pounds of verbs in the Table, reference is made from eac'i 
verb to a model in the Table, conformably to which it is 
to be conjugated. 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 



119 



C aj C CO? 



> c s 
c <u « 



c 0) c 

? CD. 



i $ e 

'o 'o 'o 

> > > 

c c c 
0) V V 



C.S.Q< 'S'Sw 



2 ^ ^ 2 

C U S C 

<== g F 



>S^ 



<^«' 



CO N t; 

C 3 3 



2 f^ ?J 

C oj G 
C »i w 



o. a a i3 « : 



.s s 



«J3 



•-" s: 
5 « 






•i.§° 



C rt " 



^ 3 o 



5 S 



- a 



'- if:!'": I 

^•s «^ » 

2 c t -s %. - 

si:-^ .= 

g CO _-. -;2 .;x ofl 

» aT *" -«^ O .S 

j^ O 'S v;U rt ^ 

;S 2 l^r^= g- 

B — — r. M tU 

^ o i « 2 S 

a> L ■ ■ 2 o '^ 



120 



COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 






o^^ 



5 I 

O S' 
g I 



§J 



•s s 



I-J 

H II 



c a> c c V s 

'C ^9> ^ iS •" -"a 

S crS CS 5« ai 

O S O g « t3 



<ns*e "Nri "ES*-" 

CqjC POjC cok 

_c s ^ o 'r; a> c •— ^ 

3Co O'^- "^-^ 



ID a> (u 

o "(u -S 



^i?« S«S<i _ 

QMoi'i, CSS P33 a>Do 

^ m VI SOOO OOO 333 

3csc! cr^^ja uwo ««o 






es 



'e s 



« ^ <u 



2 S — "EN' 
C U 3 C « 

c i- <a c = 



<a D QJ ~ ^ — _aj 
"=.'=."1. ""S rt rt "> 



« N Tj 

C OJ 3 „ 



lurs*- mN** ajNt: 
3aiS co3 3ci3 



« to K 



»-lW"^ J-N^i/^ ^tJ^ ^(yi— >H 

c::Ji ®b2^ — ~— — — S 

S ■= •'3 s o 3 3: "S S -"S rt S S ^ 

CUO <l>3<u,ci^,rt >;C 

• • • ...'". "3 • • 



sJrt cacSsS.-jSpCxi 



m I» 4-9 t ;-i >a 

3 3 3 S 3 3 
^ COO OOO 



; ~ XD "> 



C .-3 






s ^ 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 



121 



S V S B v S 
O •-; 4> O T- « 






to s! ♦; 
C 0) C 



0) o .« 



*1^ 



gsa 



sss 



> > 

3 3 
O O 



s s 



to S! *J 

(3 <U C 
O i- O) 



O C S 

a?s 



I lis 

M !D 4J a> 

=3 Hag 



=^ =! S 

3 O 3 

O 



:?= « 



5 2 



3 4j « 53 

•" i^ 2 o) 



iig 



5^.5 



o 



o a 



a> ss^tw ■ 
> ^ 52 o 

.Si 05 2 K > >-• 
a, 3 s M ^ i,^ 

V, o 2 S - -p *^ 
02-^ S2 2 S 2 

« cu , <i> >tsg -2 

" M -5 c :> '^ *- 

«^ .. §--2 >>>» 

30 >>" s'c « 
3 S rt ^ S o o 






•=, "^ 









; <D 3 & c3 






« a> w a; 



q; (U « <^ 

is 



122 



COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 






> ^ £: 



0, <u a) -« -J 



« « « ^ ^ 
CSC C ^ ^ % 

m en <n tb m cq c 



C aJ S C 0) S 



i^i 'r>f 



V 0) V 

u a> o ^<j <« 
•S -a '3 > > > 



0) OQ V O CiQ a^ 



n K 



c 1) ™ 

M CS CS 



S) CJ « 

05 m M 
EC » X 



<n N ti m S3 w 

32 g *>>« 



O 

"=5 ? 



■«'3 

fi 



33a) ^•S<4> r' ™ 

■Z'S'S > > > t*i — 



c .s~- 



cj cj d 



^•<i 
o o 



2 £ 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 



123 



" *> s 






oo'S' 

o o o 
^ no; *^ 



D O aj 



V a> a> 
> > > 

3 3 3 

V (U (U 

esa 



m N ♦^ 

C « 3 

■>.C p 



2 o o 
o ac- 
o. . • 

• m ■ 

.- .2 .2 

SSS ojojiu "rjTSr; 
rrr osmm £5?? 



3 3 3 
O O O 

CO. a, 



3 3 3 



^y^ s^ \^ v<D 



o^ 2 



"o o o 






3 C 



^§3 

C Q,0 



nQ N *; 
c 4) a 

« > 5 



.■s.:^. ."3 



sS 



'o o 'o 






X !«! « 

3 3 3 
Ri k3 nj 



en m M 

^ > > > > > > 



^ a> a> k. k. iM 

o-co, can, 






.Is . 01 



5 >. .S 

f C CO 

i2 >> V-. 



*> (X> O) 
& t3 E- 



124 



COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 



1 




«i 


g 




»^ 


Ph 




■^ 


w 




«< 


> 


-a 


, 


Ui 


>§ 


!■ 


> 


^ 




E^ 


8 


•rl 


O 


O 


^ 


c^ 


J 


a. 


P^ 


k 




H 


5 




P 


f^ 




ft 


§ 


i 


?; 


b 


H 


<i 


i 


•1 


< 


o 


a 






■•3 




£ 


"ft. . 


B 




Is 






r 


H 




^ . 


fe 




1<S 


o 




1^ 


» 






g 




•is 



•sS 



5 o s 



g 5 « rs-- 

S3 



OSS;:? aiN*; "NrS ais»- 

CajC sojC ccC ccjC 

"^ii i?l '§•>> 111 

Ei^3 'r:> >:: E>o 



i = S 



aj aj Qj 

'c'oo « oj a) 

w m m s — — 

i: ii '3 —■—■■:" 



%^ ^ iJ 



05 S-- m 

CO— c 

c >..2i c 



2 c > s 



m X w 

"c'c'S 

> > > 



£>2 



_ = a 









GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 



125 



« *• s 

.K o o 
O a> m 



I b 
o 

g 

o 



C5 o o 
o « o 



CSS 
o o o 
o o u 

*S'3'3 






d .a OS'S 



m n ' 



S 3 S 5? 5 S 

o 9 o 5 is S 

n m en m m <n 

cd n cS d cS cd 






B a> S c a; S 
o2« o > « 
S rt ^ > s > 



I m • to oc ♦» ^ ja 

.— <-,>-,« -o ,a jQ mS 



A^o^a .a. 



«=! « ?, 

o 2 ^ 

.a o -S 

2 c S 

s o s 

o o o 

u >> o 



•3 ggg 

a *S 3 « 
. .ss 



S ii 
O ed 
a>.2 



•1§ « S.I 

Is i lo 

OS T* r; >- 

CO >•«-« 

£ . ^ o 'O •- 



5:i=tt;t;= 



2 *S 
o is 






s^ s 

sM 



— ©So. 

g«-Srf s 

S — . o 2 e 
g-aaJ-S g 

£t3S^ o 
.« « "u S '5 c .2* 

,c 5^ e cs • • c o 
c " ..-3 4,5- 

<u . •- S ts ■^ 
So«-.S s.S 

3 C- S c ni tn m 



126 



COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 



S ?; 5 5 P o 



02 CO 



« « « • m • 

2 'K w o V o 

etCG mSm <»S>» mmoo 

o§§ §§§ Is 2 2 22 

uuw uuu uuu wuu 



o sj V 



C 3 



e 2S^ ""N-i "»s:ti "N 

c Cos coC Ca)S Co 

w C2^ oSo c>,a> oS 

3 «HC.2 resm >, p-- ^ m 

" "5 S C =53 C £ 2 Jo- 

o P"S o-u «:• 25 



00 X •• 
C SJ C 
<= - S 



000 <c<C!n 'c-s'O 

CCG see 333 

poo 000 --- 



u u u u u u 



000 £ 2 2 

u u u u u w 



coo 
www 









GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 



c v a 



C a3 c 
c > s> 



o -4> .S .- . 



ns .— >« sK >« 



3 M 



C Q C 

'm to tc 



gs- 



-^;=-- 



0) <U V 

c c c 

bo SC SD 



2 N ti 



M s t; 

c SJ C 

O C «e O m <u 



03 (» <j 

*c o "o 



127 



s -S 






III 






J "S 



128 



COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 









13 = s 

= rt rf 

i = s 



eS es rt 



"c sa Ku 



£ c £ 



155 
"^ £ 2 



•t; vu "^ 



sss sss 



s s 



c u s C 9; 

c -s « Or; 

I2S ""BSg S-^.2 

a^s^c cc- •::2=! 



« « o w_2 « ~ 5 3g 

o a> o ceo 'P '5 'rt 

SSS sss SHc 



s^ 



1=1 



01 m 

« 4) « O C C 

sss sss 



^ 5 

s s 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 



129 



5 5c 
5km 



.S .S cS d 



m m xfk ttj 0^ 03 
0,0.0. P«0-Q. 



oj « •; 2 "^ 1:5 

e5 oj fl C2 QJ C 



2 «J 
p'3 



C IJ S 



o :3 « 



ii . qj >- fc. >- 



VQJ vflj 



flituai «S« Smm «a>w 

2 g Q .2 .2 .S- J2 .2 .2 ^ ^ ^ 

BOG "S's's rt'cd'cS "OOO 

SSS ra-a-^ &a-C oaoim 

U)«hl ^4)^4)^q) OJOJOJ v^)^^)^ 

C-Q-O, 1-fc.*- »->->- h.)-i»- 



C aj fl d 0) « 
O ^ aj 5 tp a> 
W.2 2 S.2 2 



OS CD -«-? Cd C4 CQ 

,S .S v>H M »H H 

cd e^ cc cd cd c3 






C 93 S 
O C <^ 
e CI C 



aj s tj 2 N ■§ 
C OJ S C U C 
3 tn o o * *3 






KJ rt rt 

0.0.0. 

aj {» « 



130 



COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FREXCH 



6- «^ 
I 

i I 

§ I 

O 1 






££2 



III 

o »- o 



00 01 . 

CCQ, 

g£S 

2 £ £ 



i» N ♦^ 50 S -J 

C c C p aj c 

III :m 



C a; — <- n. 



S|| !>_> Ill _S£| 
mSloo aoiS iisi >>> '> > > 



SS| SgS £g^ 

S'lJ >-^- ?^-2i 



Sg' 



z i 






m a: <o 

"= 3 3 



'eS '5 's 



i S > > > 






§ §3 1 
^2 S 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 



131 



u 




^ 




w 




Pi 




h 






K 


Ui 


>-A 


K 


W 


H 


<tj 


^ 


H 


1— 1 


O 


r/^ 


^ 


>- 


C 


W 


o 


> 


p^ 






H 


w 


o 


K 


w 


H 



s -i^ .'S b -S -S 



1^^ 
?>.??. 






o 






•~ s S .5 



o £ f • "" «■" -^ 



S.2 



^2 
.2 



3 I 



Hi 






9-tr.-^ L V 



Ut3 « S C £ 



c-'^sg't: 



CCk.k.wixU'j^ 



« « OJ O) o 




-c 0) e. 1 



132 



COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 



•^Iti sli^ ^' III I * 



s^s 



p o s s 



5" 



i':?^ ^ 









to a CD > "w OQ I. 



rsi-3 >2 

.. K O o -^ - 
K h. QQ ^ '^ at 



alps. 



> h 
£ = o 




> « ■S i = -S g = > .= •= c ii c 5^ S-' ■- = = c c- .h c — X - e 

Z f E:.h g c § §>£■- t-.N,-^^ =3 ^^ £r r 1 1 : « 3 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 



133 




<i)-r t, o I, . v.-r 



10 o 



= J^ -2 S 

>i, ii I _ '^ - - 

•a .5 to C « C. i 






— < M t; .S ^ ~ C C fc. — .— 



1 O o 






2 o « »- 



s ,s • « -2 to R-v. K !> =s « - ~ •« 







£ • i: « M : i 

ili|jlll|i| I lull 11 



"2 o4j S 3 



134 



COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 



§ g S 



o 

S 

§ < 
O P 

o 



'2 2 i. ^"S -a 






^ rage's s 



■S S 8 .^ -S S ^f 



a. a e J; a 



2ii--5 






^^S-ai'S S S S S S^ 2^ S " S 5 = £ S :^ 5 






O 2 

IS 



« V. s ■s ?^ ? S ' 



«i -S ^ S 






' S fc« S ■» -2 -~ 'S 'a a 'e .^ 



„||i|tHl||t| 






22 






D<*i^^o%_. — li-ajilS-Cc— '(«»<. ii. Cms '->aj-4)'J3 ^ 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 



135 









•w ^ f- -a s o 



o* 






£■=£■55 



> 2; P <u S 



Bt 



O o O O C O-TS -j ^ 






S5 ^-Sl ^o 

-^^ ^■S'^''' -^^^^ ^ "iH 

~ 15 ^ »; ». . - „^ ._, !S 

2^ s w-o 1; fc 






.2 ^ « 



i: ^^ c c 3 ,::; ~ a. aj "5 

li|iiliiils= 

C •- c « <u P C i- ^ aj c- aj 



5"^ feci n -=* -« -E "^ « .2 e -"S 



2^ 



"s 2 s" 



2 S tj o s "3 
■2 ? tS o s ^ 



c ?; = c c^ c o 



w ao "3 tc « 









136 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 



IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS OF THE FIRST 
CONJUGATION. 

EXERCISE XXXVI. 

SVill you go this evening into the country? I am going 

soir k campagnel /. 

to pay some visits, and if I be at liberty early I 

— faire suis libre- de bonne heure 

shall certainly go home. Go there with thy brother. Go 

chez moL 
and do that errand. Go there and put every thing 

— commission,/. — mettre 

in order. Let him go to church on holidays, 

en art. f. — art. jours de fite. 

By being loaded with scents, and particularly amber, he 
& force d' dtre de odeur, surtout ambre, 

offends the smell. They have woven silk and 

• ■ -sentir mauvals- • de art. 

cotton together, and made a very pretty 

de art. en ont fait 

stuff. I shall send ^spring 'flowers to those ladies. I 

<^rnffe/. des printanier /. 

would go to Rome if I could. We would send back our horse*. 

pouvais. 
Why do you go away so soon ? My brother and sister weit 

yesterday to Boston. I will not go any more a-hunting. 

pins & art. chasse,/. 

Are tj:ey not going away ? I would go with them, if I was lot 

engaged. 
occup6. 

IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS OF THE ^- 
COND CONJUGATION. 

EXERCISE XXXVII. 

May the name of that good king be blessed from generation to 

generation ! These trees blossomed twice every yeai. 

deux fois tout art. an, pi. 
The arts and sciences flourished at Athens in the time of Perides. 
a Ath6nes P^riil^. 

HcrAce and Virgil flourished under the reign of Augustus. We 

Virgile m. Auguste. 

discovered from the top of the mountain a vast plain full of 
d^couvnr ham /. rempli 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 137 

2flowery 'meadows. The empire of the Babylonians was long 

fleurissant m. Babylonien 

a flourishing one. We did not hate the man, but his -vices. 

Does she really hate that vain pomp, and all the parade of 

pompe,/. appareil art 

grandeur. 

EXERCISE XXXVIII. 

j Take that water off the fire, it boils too fast. Do not 
j Retirer /. de dessus m. fort. 

j let 2the Sgoup '•boil-away so much. That sauce has 

' laisser pot •••'tant-- /. est 

I 2ijoiled-away too much. Boil that meat again, it has not 

• • itrop--' Faites viande,/. 

boiled 21ong 'enough. He runs faster than I. t ran about use- 

vite moi. — 

Icssly all the morning. We ran at the voice of that honest man, 

matinee, 
and assisted him. The moment he saw us in danger, he ran 

• -Dds que- • • en 

to us and delivered us. By conduct so whimsical, should 

un /. bizarre, 

we not contribute to our destruction 1 He discoursed so long on 

concourir pertel 

the immortality of the soul, and the certainty of another life, that 

certitude,/, 
he left nothing unsaid. If we were to act thus, we should 

en arri^re. agir 

certainly incur the displeasure of our parents. I would not have 

disgrace, /. 
recourse to ^so ^base 'a ^method. Will men always run 

moyen,™. art. 

after shadows 1 

de art. chim6re 1 

EXERCISE XXXIX. 

He was near losing his life in that encounter. He was 

faillir perdre — art. rencontre,/, 

near falling into the snare which was laid for him. His 
donner on avait tendu — lui. — 

strength 2fa[is ihim every day. Let us have something ^to 
art. d^'faillir Donnez-nous — 

'eat 'directly ; we are fainting with fatigue and hunger. I 
vite ; de faim. 

cannot meet him; he shuns me. When we know not b>w to 
le : Shi' 



38 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

employ oui time, we endeavour to fly from ourselves. WouJ'* 

chercher se — soi-m6me. 

he not avoid flatterers, if he knew all their falsehood! He 

fuir art. f. 

died by a 2very ^painful 'disease. She died of grief for the 
de cruel maladie,/. chagrin de avoir 

loss of her son. He is dying. She was expiring with grief, 
perdu se mourir. • -se mourir- • de 

when the fear of death at last wrested her secret from her. 
crainte/. art. enfin arracher m. — luL 

EXERCISE XL. 

Send for the physician and follow exactly his advice. Go 

and fetch my cane. Every day he acquired celebrity by 

— canne,/. de art. f. 

works calculated to fix the attention of an 2enlightened 'public, 
des fait pour 

That I would acquire riches at the expense of my honesty ! 

des depens probity : /. 

He had acquired by his merit great influence over the opinions 

VI. un /. sin^ 

of his contemporaries. I have inquired about that man every where, 

contemporain. de -Ik partout, 

and have not been able to hear any thing of him. Who ^has 

je . ■ ■ pu_. . . avoir de nouvelles •••en--- 

^requested -it of 'yo^W- Sesostris, king of Egv'pt, conquered a 

en — •^ 
great part of Asia. The 2formidable 'empire which Alexander 
art. Alexandre 

conquered, did not last longer than his life. I have heard that 

oui dire 
^important 'news. He dressed himself in haste, and 

/. • • • se v6trr S. art. h asp. hS-te, /. 

went out immediately. I wish she would dress the children 

Eortir sur-le-champ. voudrais que •••vfetir 

with more care. If his fortune permitted him, he would clothe 

le lui, 
all the poor of his parish. Two servants clothed him with his 

domestique rev6tir de 

2ducal 'mantle. He passed only for a traveller ; but lately 

nianteau. ne depuis peu 

he has assumed the character of an envoy. It begins to be very 

revetir — envoye. 

warm ; it is time to throw off some clothing. 

de se ddvetir. 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 139 



EXERCISE XLI. 



[ will gather, with pleasure, some of these flowers and fruits, since 

vou wish to have some. Do not gather these peaches before 
en. . /• 

they are ripe. That is a country where they ^neither 

que ne soient Ce pays on ni 

2reap corn, nor gather grapes. We shall collect in Can- 
ine recueillir bl6, ni — vin. recueillir 

cient 'history ^important %nd ^valuable ^facts. He received us in 

pr^cieux accueillir de 

3the ''most ^polite 2nianner. Poverty, misery, sickness, perse- 

iart. 
cution, in a word, all the misfortunes in the world have fallen upon 
en malheur de -accueillir • 

him. If you give six inches to that cornice, it will project too 

corniche,/. 
much. That balcony projected too much ; it darkened the dining 

balcon, m. obscurcir 

room. When Moses struck the rock, there gushed out of it 
Moi'se rocher, 771. il -en- 

a spring of 21iving 'water. The blood gushed from his vein 

source veine,/. 

with impetuosity. We shall assault the enemv to-morrow in their 

intrenchments. Were we not overtaken by a horrible storm ? 
retrancliement. assailli temp^te ? /. 

At every word that they said to him concerning his son, the good 
a. chaque de 

old man leaped for joy. Will you not shudder with fear? 
vieillard tressaillir de tressaillir de peurl 

You may set out this morning, but remember to come back at night. 

06 soir 

EXERCISE XIJI. 

Tell me what she has done to you;- but, above all, do not lie. 

2 Were 'I in your place, I would not offer her any money. Why 
Si k de 

do you not open the door for your sister 1 Your actions never belie 

your words. Your brother repents much of having sold his books, 
parole. avoir 

I would serve him with all my heart, if I could. The more we 
de — 



140 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

are above others, the more it becomes us to be modest and 

au-dessus des 
humble. My aunt and 1 came yesterday to see you, but 

nou? pour 

\ou were not at home. I hope that you will keep your word 

and come to-morrow. At last she has agreed to pay her an 

que Enfln de 

annual pension of two hundred francs. Come on Friday morning 

at nine o'clock. You will obtain leave to go out another 

art. permission 
time, if you come back soon. The first time you come to see me, 

que fut. — 

I will keep you two or three days. He is so prepossessed against me, 

that he will not agree that he is in the wrong. The first time I go 

a tort 

out, remind ^me to call on your brother. That hat 

ifaire ^souvenir de passer chez 

would suit you very well, if you were a Uttle taller. I should not 

suffer so much if it were fine weather, 
faisait 

IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS OF THE 
THIRD CONJUGATION. 

EXERCISE XLTII. 

I had apartments that I liked ; I will endeavour to have them again. 

un logement de 

Beware of falling. Since the publication of his last work, he has 

much fallen in the esteem of the public. If he do not alter his 

d^choir changer de — 

conduct, he will decline every day in his reputation and credit. 

• • d^choir • • de jour-en-jout de /. m. 

He has put in the lottery, and he hopes that a capital prize 

mis k loterie,/. — art. gros lot 

will fall to him. That bill of exchange has expired. The 
^hoir lettre,/. change ^tre ^choir. 

first term expires at midsummer. You have drawn on me a bill 

terme k la Saint-Jean, 

of exchange ; when is it payable 1 I did not believe that I must 
• • 6choir in • • devoir 

so soon take that journey. He must have sunk under 

faire voj'age. qu' il — succomb4t 

the efforts of so many enemie.*!. 
• • tant • • de 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 141 



EXERCISE XLIV. 

The spring which moves ^the ^whole machine is very ingenious, 

ressort, m. tout /. 

though very simple. Can you doubt that the soul, though it is 

spiritual, moves the body at pleasure? That is a man 

lie subj.pr. h. sa volenti ■» 

whom nothing moves. We were moved with fear and pity. 

ne ^mouvoir. ^mu de 

When the famous D'Aguesseau was promoted to the dignity of 

c616bre 
chancellor, all France showed the greatest joy. That bishop 
chancelier, art. en t^moigner /. 

well deserved, by his talents and by his virtues, that the king should 

mdriter, 
promote him to the dignity of primate. The people think that it 

primal. sing, croit 

lains frogs and insects at certain seasons. It will not rain to- 

de art. en temps, 

day, but I fear that it may rain to-morrow. Let us sit down upon 

ne 
the grass. Do not make so much noise, I cannot learn my 

herbe,/. •••tant-" 

lesson. Do you know what has happened to her? No; I do 

est 
not know. 

EXERCISE XLV. 

When he arrived at home, he was quite exhausted. The minister 

Chez lui, • -n' en pouvoir plus- • 

had so many people at his levee that I could not speak to him. Are 

monde k audience 
you afraid that he will not accomplish that affaii 1 I 

pouvoir, subj. pr. venir k bout de 

know that he is not your friend, but I know likewise that he is 

de pi. aussi ce 

a man of probity. Let them know that their pardon depends on 
bien. gr^ce de 

Ifteir submission. I could wish that he knew his lessons a little 

soumission. 
better. Let us see if this ^new-fashioned igown becomes you, or 

d' un nouveau gout robe,/, 
not. Be assured that 2too 3gaudy 'colours will not become you. 

Hon. art. voyant /. 

f he head-dress which that lady wore became her very ill. These 



I coiffure * !uj 



142 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

colours become you so well, that you would do wrong to wear 

...avoir tort de en porter 

any others. Set that child in this arm-chair, and take care lest 
de prendre garde que 

he fall. I will sit down on the top of that hill, whence I 
ne sommet 

shall discover a prospect no less magnificent than diversified. We 
— d^couvrir-- sc6ne,/. aussi vari6. 

were seated on the banks of the Thames, whence we were contem- 
bord Taniise,/. 

plating myriads of vessels, which carry every year the 

de art. millier apporter art. pi 

riches of the two hemispheres. 



EXERCISE XLVI. 

See the 2admirable 'order of the universe : does it not announce a 

^supreme 'architect 1 Has he again seen with pleasure his country 
artisan ? 

and his friends'? Had he had a glimpse of the dawn of this fine day ? 

aurore 
To finish their affairs, it would be necessary for them to 

Pour falloir que — — — 

see one another. I clearly foresaw, from that time, all the 

ils s'entrevoir, sM&j. m. bien d6s-lors 

obstacles he would have to surmount. Would you wish that 

m, qjie surmonter. 

the judge should put off the execution of the sentence that he had 

arr^t 
pronounced 1 I shall not put off the pursuit of that affair. If 

rendu 1 poursuite art. 

men do not provide for it, God will provide for it. Would this book 

•y 
be good for nothing 1 You have not paid for this ground more than 
valoir — — terre,/. 

it is worth ; are you afraid that it is not worth six hundred 
ne • -ne suhj. pr.- • 

pounds 1 One ounce of gold is equivalent to fifteen ounces of 
livres sterling'? once,/. 

silver. Doubt not that reason and truth will prevail 

art. art. ne •■subj.pr. 

at last. I can and will tell the truth. If you are willing, he 
la longue. le 

will be willing too. Be so good as to lend me your grammar, 
.e Vouloir — 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 143 

EXERCISE XLVII. 

If I would, I could soon know whether Mrs. D. has seen your aunt, 

si 
or not. The last time I was in the park, I could not distinguish her, 
on account of the trees that were between her and me ; I have only 
■ •a cause" 
been able to have a glimpse of her. When you know your lesson, 

saurez 
come and repeat it to me. Did you not know that Mr. A. was to 
— ' r^p^ler — 

marry Miss B. ? I knew it, but was not willing to tell your brother of 
6pouser parler & 

it. He who cannot command himself, is incapable of commanding 
se 
others. We ought to make a ^judicious 'choice of those 
aux devoir judicieux choix, m. — 

friends, to whom we intend to give our confidence. Do you know 

vouloir 
where Miss B. lives ? Yes, I do ; and I see her every 

demeurer ? — le sais ; 

day at her window. Why will you not tell it me ? Some told me 
that your brother could not pay me ; others told me that he would 
not. We regularly pay all that we owe; but he says that he will pay 
nobody. You saw with what goodness she received him. Every 

body thinks, that, if they had pursued the enemy briskly, they 

vigoureusement, 
might have ended the war on that day. If you want 

finir — La, avoir besoin de 

that book you may take it ; it is at your service. May I go and seo 

him ] Yes, you may ; but come back as soon as you can. 
le aussitdt que fut 



'IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS OF THE 
FOURTH CONJUGATION. 

EXERCISE XLVIII. 

Wood which is burned resolves itself into ashes and smoke. 
Jirt. on bruler se r^soudre en en 

Have they resolved on peace or war? The fog has resolved 
on — art. f. art. f. m. 



144 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

itself into rain. Could that judge so lightly absolve the guilty? 

I6g6rement coupable ? pL 

^Strong ^waters dissolve metals. Those drugs were I 

Jlrt. art. On drogue 

dissolved before they were put into that medicine. My 

avant de les — infin. pr. remade, m. 

sister was sewing ^all ^day ^yesterday. That piece is not * 

^la journ^e 
well seWed, it must be sewed over again. Unstitch that lace, 

la inf. pr. dentelle, /. 

and sew i,* again very carefully. Does he set a great 

avec beaucoup de soin mettre 

value upon riches'? I never admitted those principles. Has he 
priXj m. h art. 
committed that fault 1 If he would take my advice he would resign 

fautel/. me en croyait se demettre de 

his charge in favour of his son. His ^arm ^he put out of joint 

/. en *Le — "Sse 'demettre- 

yesterday. I will omit nothing that depends on me, to 

de ce de pour * 

serve you. God frequently permits the wicked to prosper, 

souvent que m^chants ••subj.pr.-- 

Put this book in its place again. Under whatever form of govem- 
a. /. quelque gouverne- 

ment you may live, remember that your first duty is to be 

ment que devoir de 

obedient to the laws. It frequently happens that fathers transmit 

soutnis art. 

to their children both their vices and their virtues. He has long 

meddled with ^public 'affairs ; but his endeavours have not been 
s' entremettre de efforts 

crowned with success, 
de 



EXERCISE XLIX. 

I took great pains: but, at last, I ground all the coffee. Grind 
beaucoup de sivg. enfin, caf^, m. 

those razors with care. Those knives are just ground. This grain 
rasoir venir d' etre 

is not sufficiently grouna, it should be ground again. I wish 
assez falloir le inf. pr. 

that you would take courage. What news have you learned 1 

Philosophy comprehends logic, ethics 

art. art. f. art. morale,/. 9. art 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES- 145 

physics, and metaphysics. It is with difficulty that he 

physique,/.*. art. f.s. Ce • •difficilement- • 

divests himself of his opinions. I fear you will undertake 

• -se d^prendre- • que ne subj. pr.- •• • 

a task above your strength. Could he have bean mistaken 

t^che au-dessus de pi. 

■50 grossly ■? I reproved him continually for his faults, but to no 

reprendre sans cesse de d^faut, • -inu- 

urpose. We surprised the enemy, and cut them to pieces. In 

lement. pi. tailler en i 

..le middle of the road the axletree of our carriage broke. Bad 

essieu se rompre. art. 

ompany corrupts the minds of young people. Why do you inter- 

pl. sing. gens, 

upt your brother, when you see him busy 1 

occup6 1 

EXERCISE L. 

For a long while 'we ^followed that method, which was calculated 
• •■siong-temps-- /. ne propre 

only to mislead us. What is the consequence ] See the errors 

6garer Que s' ensuivre 1 

that have sprung from this proposition, which appeared so true 1 

s' ensuivre 
We pursued our course when some cries, which came from the 

suivre chemin lorsque J^s sorlis 

midst of the forest, excited terror in our souls. The Greeks 
fond porter art. f. Grec 

vanquished the Persians at Marathon, Salamis, Platea, and Mycale. 

Per&e Salamine, Platte, 

I have, at last, convinced him, by ^such ^powerful -reasons, of 

si fort Ides 

the greatness of his fault, that I have no doubt but he 

6normit6 /. ne doiiter nuUement que ne 

will repair it. It is during winter that they thrash the corn, 

•subj.pr.. Ce pendant art. on battre 

j in 3cold 2countries. The enemy was so completely beaten in 

i ^art. Ttt. pi. 

that engagement, that he was forced to abandon thirty leagues of the 
I rencontre, de lieue — 

I country.- The cannon beat down the tower. They were fighting 
I canon abattre tour,/. 

'iWith unexampled fury, when a 2panic Herror made 

un 2sans Vxemple lacharnement 
jthem take flight, and dispersed them in an instant. Beat 

I leur art. fuite,/ 

I G 10 



146 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

these mattresses again. Happy are those who live in solitadel 

— arL retraite! 

He did not long survive a person who was so dear to him. 

d. f. 

Fathers live again in their children. He was in a strange 

dejection of mind; but the news which he has received has 
accableracnt ont fail 

revived him. 
ivf. pr. 

EXERCISE LI. . 

What will you have him do 1 Do not make so much 
Que vouloir — que — il subj. pr. 

noise. Do they never exact? That woman mimicked all the 
de 

persons whom she had seen ; this levity rendered her odious. It 
que 16g6ret6 

was with difficulty he divested himself of the false opinions 
peine que se d^faire /. 

which had been given him in his infancy. Could it be possible 

on — lui /. 

that we should not again make a journey to Paris, Rome and 

• ••refaire-" le — voyage de 
Naples 1 He says that you have offended him, and that if you do 

not satisfy him quickly, he will find means to satisfy 

promptement, art. moyen, m. de se 

himself. Every night, she milked her goats, which gave 

iui mfeme. art. soir, pi. 

her a great quantity of wholesome milk. Have you milked 

lui ^abondant-' •• ^et ♦sain ^lait, m. 

your goats 1 Are the cows milked 1 Salt is good to entice 

chevrel vache attraire 

pigeons. You will never know the nature of bodies, 

art. connaitre art. 

if you do not abstract their Accidental Equalities from those which 

are inherent in them. The least thing diverts his attention. 

••leuf" moindre le distraire 

"Will you not extract that charming passage 1 Have you darneJ 

your gown? Should he not redeem that landl What! would 

Quoi! 
you that I should screen those guiltj persons from the rigour of the 

••soustraire-' — ft /. 

laws : 



GRAMMAR AIND EXERCISES. 147 



EXERCISE LII. 

Was not Virgil born at Mantua 1 It is from that 2poisoned 'source 

Mantoue 1 Ce empoisonn6 /. 

that have arisen all the 2cruel 'wars that have desolated the universe 
Bont n6 /. 

The fable says, that as soon as Hercules had cut off one of the heads 
/. Hercule / 

of tJie Hydra others spranpf up. While their 2united 

Hydre *de eautre ^il 'en ^renaitre. Tandis que r^uni 

•flocks fed on the ^tender ^and ''flowery 'grass, they sung under 

m. paitre — f. k 

the shade of a tree the sweets of ^imal Uife. Your horses 

ombre douceur art. champfetre 

have not fed to-day ; you must have Hhem fed. 

repaitre d' aujourd'hui; 'faire inf.pr 

He is a man who thirsts 2after nothing 'but blood and slaughter. 
Ce ne se repaitre de — que carnage. 

Young people tell what they do, old people what they have done, 
jfrf, gens vieillards 

and fools what they intend to do. You may set out when 
sot se proposer de 

you please ; we will follow you 
11 vous plaire,/ut. 5. 

EXERCISE Lm. 

The thunder whicli roared from afar announced a ^dreadful 

VI. bruire dans art. lointain 

'storm. They heard roar the waves of an ^agitated 'sea. That 
orage, m. On flot /. 

street is too noisy for those who love retirement and study. I 

/. bruyant art. retraite 

have a glimpse of something that shines through those trees. 

entrevoir au travers de 

A ray of hope shone upon us in the midst of the misfortunes 
raj'on, m. — k milieu 

which overwhelmed us. Every thing is well rubbed in that house ; 

accabler frott^ 

every thing shines, even the floor. Would he not have 

y reluire, jusque S. plancher, m. 
injured you in that affair 1 Will you preserve these peaches with 

confire & 

sugar, with honey, or with brandy 1 Did you pickl« 
art. m. art. m. art. , f. 



148 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

cucumbers, purslain, and sea-fennell If he 

des concoinbre,m. de art. pourpier, m. de art. perce-pierrel/. 

loses his law-suit, all his property will not suffice. 
proc6s, TO. bien, m. 

EXERCISE LIV. 

Always speak truth, but with discretion. Never contradict 

dire art. f. 

any one in public. You thought you were serving me in speak- 
personne — — inf. 
ing thus ; well, let it be so ; you shall not be contradicted, 
eh: bien, soit en dedire 

What ! would you forbid him all communication with his friends ] 
Quoi ! interdire 

That woman who slandered every one, soon lost all kind 

de esp6ce, / 

of respect. You had foretold that event. Let us curse no 

consideration. 

one ; let us remember that our law forbids us to curse even 

se rappeler d^fendre de 

those who persecute us. Write every day the reflections which 

you make on the books you read. Did he not read that 2in- 

que 
teresting history with a great deal of pleasure 1 God is an 2infinite 

ibeing who is circumscribed neither by time nor place. 

6tre ne ni art. m. lieu, m. 

Will you not describe in that episode the ^dreadful ^tempest which 

horrible 
assailed your hero 1 Get ^ti^ose "soles ^and ^whitings ^fried. 

Faire sole merlan inf.pr. 

If you wish to form your taste, read over and over, unceasingly, 

vouioir — sans-cesse, 

the andents. He was elected by a great majority of voices. We 

k 
have laughed heartily, and have resolved to go on. He 

de bon coeur, nous de continuer. 

did not answer him any thing: but he smiled at him, as a 
lui •••rien-'- — lui, en -• 

sign of approbation, in the -kindest 'manner, 
de gracieux air, m. 

EXERCISE LV. 

Seated under the shade of palm-trees, they were milking their goats 

d. palmier, 

and ewes, and ^merrily 'drinking that nectar, which was renewed 
brebis, avec joie m. se renouveler 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 149 

every day. Should they not have drunk with ice 1 This 

k art. f. 
Window does not shut well; when you have made some alterations 

reparation 
in it, it will shut better. He had scarcely closed his eyes 

• •y-' mieux. si peine — art. 

when the noise which they made at his door awoke him. Have 
que on k r^veiller 

they not enclosed the suburbs within the city 1 Will you en- 
on faubourg /, 

close your park with a wall, or a hedge? Put the eggs of 

pare de mur, m. haiel /. ceuf 

those silk-worms in the sun, that they may hatch. Those 

vers-a.-soie, m. & 
flowers, just blown, spread the sweetest fragrance, 

nouvellement r^pandre parfuin,f«. 

When did they conclude this treaty 1 His enemies managed 

trait6? m. faire 

so well, that he was unanimously excluded from the company. 

unanimement 
Did you think me capable of ^so ^black 'an 2act 1 He possesses 

croire traitl m. avoir 

some knowledge ; but not so much as he thinks. 
savoir;7K. •••ils'en faittropaccroire- •• 



CHAPTER VT. 
OF THE PARTICIPLE. 

207. The participle is a part of the verb which par- 
takes of the properties both of a verb and an adjective : 
of a verb as it has its signification and regimen ; of an 
adjective, as it expresses the quality of a person, or thing. 

208. There are two participles : the participle present^ 
and the participle past. 

OF THE PARTICIPLE PRESENT. 

209. The participle present always terminates in ant: 
SiS,parlant.,Jinissant, recevant, vendant. 

210. It always expresses an action, and is indeclin 
able : as, 



150 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

TJne montagne dominant sur A mmmtain commanding im 

des plaines immenses. mense plains. 

Je vols des hommes venant a I see men coming to us. 
nous. 

211. What grammarians call the gerund^ is nothing 
but the participle present with the preposition en prefixed 
to it: as, on se forme P esprit en lisant de bans Uvres^ we 
form our minds by reading good books. 

212. There are adjectives which are spelled like the 
participle present; but as they imply merely an attribute 
of the noun, and do not express an action, and moreover 
agree with their substantives in gender and number, it will 
not be difficult to distinguish them from it. Thus : 

Je vois (3es agneaux hondis- I see lambs skipping in the 

sunt (part.) dans la plaine. plain. 

J' airae a voir les agneaux I like to see skipping lambs 

bondissans (adj.) errer dans la ramble in the plain. 
plaine. 

213. The first sentence of the preceding example con- 
veys the idea that the lambs are Jioio engaged in tlie act 
of skipping ; while the second merely implies that it is au 
attribute, or propensity, of lambs to skip. 

EXERCISE LVI. 

This woman is of good disposition, obliging every one, whenever 

un caract6re, toutUimonde, quand 

she has it in her power. They go cringing before the great, 

lepeut ramper devant pi. 

that they may be insolent to their equals. The state of 

afin de — inf.pr. avec ^gal. 

pure nature is that of the savage, living in the desert, but living in 

his family, knowing his children, loving them, making use ot 

faniille,/. connaitre , user----" -^^ 

speech, and making himself understood. An ^agreeable 

art. parole,/. se fkift entendre 

'languor, imperceptibly laying hold of my senses, suspended the 
langueur,/. insensiblement s' emparer sens, 

activity of my soul, and I fell asleep. Time is a real blunderer, 
s' endormir. vrai brouillon. 

placing, replacing, ordering, disordering, impressing, erasing, ap- 
mettre, ranger. 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 151 

preaching, removing, and making all things good and bad ; and 

rendre 
almost always making them impossible to be known again. Sha 

m^con naisable 

met your father as she was coming here. My mother wai 

en on 

told the day before yesterday that your sister, remembering 

dire & avant hier se ressouvenir de 

the injuries she had received from your brother, refused to see him. 
que 

OF THE PARTICIPLE PAST. 

214. The participle past has various terminations : as, 
aime^Jini^ regu, ouvert, dlssous, &c. 

"^15.^ When accompanied by the auxiliary verb i rf, 
it aTvvays agrees in gender and number with its subject, as, 

Mon frere est tombe. My brother is fallen. 

Ma soeur est tombee. My sister is fallen. 

Mes soeurs sont tombees. My sisters are fallen. 

21^.^, When it follows the verb avoir^ it never agrees 
with its subject. 

217. But it agrees with its object direct^ when, that ob 
ject is placed before it : as, when speaking of 

7ny sister .• Je V ai vue. I have seen her. 
your books : Je les ai lus. I have read them, 
my sisters .• Je les ai vues. I have seen them. 

218. And does not agree M^ith its object direct.^ when 
that object is placed after it: as, 

J' ai vu ma socur. 7 have seen my sister. 

J' ai lu vos livres. I have read your bonks. 

y aivu mes soeurs. I have seen my sisters. 

219. It never agrees with its object indirect.^ whethei 
placed before, or after it : as, 

C' est la lettre dont je vous ai This is the letter of which I have 

parle. spoken to you. 

Je vous ai parle de cette / have spoken to yon of this 

It'ttre. letter. 

220. The participle past of an impersonal verb Im 
always indeclinable : as, 



152 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

Les pluies qu' il afait. The rains which we have had. 

Les chaleurs qu' il y a eu. The heats which we have had. 

221. In the compound tenses of verbs essentially pro- 
nominal^ that is, of those verbs which cannot be conju- 
gated without two pronouns, the participle past always 
agrees with its object, which always precedes it: as, 

Elle s' est moquee de vous. She has laughed at you. 

Elles se sont repenties. They have repented. 

222. There is but one exception to this rule, which ?s 
the verb s' arroger : as, ils se sont arroge des droits, they 
have assumed rights. 

223. The participle past of the verbs accidentally pro 
nominal, that is, of those which can be conjugated with a 
single pronoun, has the same rules as the participle pas% 
of verbs not pronominal, as stated in articles 217, 218, 
219, ante : as, 

art. 217: Lucrece s' est tttee. Lucretia has killed herself. 

ar^ 218: lis &e sor\i partage They have apportioned the 

r empire. empire among themselves. 

art. 219. Ils se sont parle. They have spoken to each other. 

EXERCISE LVII. 

ON THE PAHTICIPLB PAST ACCOMPAlSriEI) BY THE VERB ctve. 

Fire-arms were not known to the ancients. Heaven is that 
Art. armes-&-feu de 

^permanent 'city, into which the just are to be received after this 

cite, /. o\i devoir 

life. In ^Abraham's stime the threatenings of the true God 

De i«r«. /. 

were dreaded by Pharaoh; but, in the time of Moses, all na 

redouter , de Phaiaon ; ■ Moise, art. 

tions were corrupted, and the world which God has made to ma 

pervertir, pour 

nifest his glory, had become a temple of idols. That ^dreadful ^crisis 

terrible cri«e. f 
which threatened the state with ^instant 'destruction, was happily 

de prochain /. 

soon past. She is come to bring us all kinds of refreshments. 

passer. — sorte,/. rafraichisseiuenl. 

My brothers are gone to Dover, and intend to pay you a visiJ 
Douvres, se proposer de rendre — 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 153 

when they are come back. The houses which are built in the winter 

fut. ••revenir-' /. — 

are not so wholesome as those which are begun in the spring and 

sain k 

finished in the middle of summer. ^Virtuous ^people are 

^ art. ^art. 

esteemed and respected, even by those who are not so. 
mfime de le. 

EXERCISE LVIII. 

ON THE PABTICIPLE PAST ACCOMPAIS'IEn BY THE VERB avOlT, ATSTD 
FOLLOWED, OR PRECEDED, BY ITS OBJECT DIRECT. 

All the letters which I have received, confirm that ^important 'news. 

/. /• 

The 2agitated 'life which I have led till now, makes me sigh for 
mener aprfig 

retirement. The sciences which you have studied, will prove 
art. retraite,/. §tre 

infinitely useful to you. What fortunes has not this revolution 

ruined I What tears has she not shed ; what sighs has she 
renverser ! Que de verser ; 

not heaved ! The language in which Cicero and Virgil have written, 

pousser! /. — Cic^ron 

will live in their works. She has taken the resolution of going into 

par /. a 

the country. I am very sorry for the trouble this affair has 

/. de peine,/, que 

given to your aunt. The letter which you have written to me in 

French was well enough ; I have shown it to your aunt, who % 

Smuch ^pleased with it. I have not yet received the goods 

tr6s content •■len-- marchandise,/. 

which you sent me. Ladies, have you returned him the letters 

Mesdames, rendre 

wki^-h he had desired you to read"? Where did you buy those 

prier de 

gloves ■? I bought them in France. Alexander conquered Asia 

art 
with the troops which his father Philip had disciplined. The faults 

which he had committed, ^greatly 'increased his prudence. He has 
beaucoup augmenter /. 

spent all the treasures which his father had amassed with so much 

tr^sor, m. 
care and labour. I have not forgotten the good services which you 



154 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

have done to my mother. The reasons which you have given us 

rendre 
have satisfied us. I have lost my books. What books have you 

lost] The fine actions your brothers have done, will be trans- 

que 
mitted to posterity. 

an. 

EXERCISE LIX. 

OJS THE PARTICIPLE PAST OF IMPEKSOXAI, YEHBS. 

The great changes which have taken place in the administration 

changement y avoir 

have astonished many people. The heavy rains which we have had 

bien grand /. 

in the spring, have been the cause of many diseases. The scarcity 
a. disette,/. 

which there was ^last ^winter, has afiforded the opportunity oi 

lart. donner occasion 

doing much good. What news has reached you 1 How many 

bien. sing, est-il venir Que de 

imprudent steps were taken on that occasion ! How many 

faux d-marche,/. se faire en 

large ships have been built in England within these fifty years! The 
gros ee construire d^puis — 

storm which we had yesterday has done a great deal of damage 

tempdte,/. causer dommage 

to our ships. The high winds which they have had in the county 

grand comt* 

of Lancaster, have blown down many houses and trees. 

renverser 

EXERCISE LX. 

OW THE PARTICIPI.E PAST OF PHOXOMIXAX VERBS. 

The death which Lucretia gave herself has immortalized her. The 
/. --se donner- • immortaliser 

cities which those nations have built for themselves are but a 

ville,/. peuple se b^tir 

collection of huts The chimeras which she has got 

amas, TO. chaumiere. clum6re,/. se mettre 

into her head pass all belief. The Amazons made them- 

— art. croyance,/. • -se rendre- 

selves famous by their courage. The ci^ of London has mads 
' c^ldbrs 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 155 

itself, by its commerce, the metropolis of the universe. iVlen 

m. Art. 

built themselves cities. That woman has bestowed on herself 

seba.tir se donner 

fine gowns. She has cut two of her fingers. I have 
de se couper — — 

given myself a great deal of trouble. They have made an 

peine,/. se donner — 

appointment. My sisters have qu irrelled the whole day, but are 
rendez-vous. se quereller 

now reconciled. He is the man of whom our neighbours have 

Ce ••dont-' 

complained. We saw ourselves surrounded by more than twenty 
se plaindre. ' entourer 

persons. We had thought ourselves able to resist them, but 

secroire de leur, 

we have been deceived. She took ple^isure in contradicting 

• -se tromper- • se plaire ft. 

me. Some of our 2modern 'authors have imagined 

Quelques-uns s' imaginer que 

they surpassed the ancients. 



CHAPTER VII. 
OF THE ADVERB. 

^^§p In the simple tenses, the adverb is generally 
placed after the verb ; and, in the compound tenses, be- 
tween the auxiliary and the participle : as, 

II se porte hmi. He is well. 

II s' est bien porte. He has been ivell. 

225. Compound adverbs, and those which are derived 
from adjectives, are always placed after the verb : as. 

C est d la mode. That is fashionable. 

II a agi consequemment. He has acted consiatently. 

226. Adverbs of order, rank, and those which express 
a determinate time, are placed either before or after the 
verb : as, 



156 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FREXCH 

Nous devons premierement We ought, first, to do mn 

faire notre devoir; secondement duty; secondly, to enjoy lawfui 

chercher les plaisirs permis. pleasures. 

Aujuurd' hui il fait beau; 11 To-day it is fine,- it will rain, 

pleuvra peut-etre demain. perhaps, to-morrow. ^ 

< .227!^ Tlie adverbs comment., 'ou^ (Pcmi^'parou., com'^ 
bien. j^ur'giipi^ 'qudnd', used with or without interrogation 
are always placed before the verb which they modify : as^ 

Com?nent vous portez-vous? How do you do? 

Ou allez-vous ] Wliere are you going ? 

228. The adverb is always placed before the adjec- 
tive which it modifies : as, 

C est una femme fort belle, She is a woman very beautiful, 
ires sensible, et infiniment sage, of gnat sensibility, and infinitely 

\ prudent. 

/^"^ ^^A>W^ - 

(^229jP Beaucoup is not, as in English, susceptible of 
bemg modified by any adverb : thus, we do not say, tres 
beaucoup, trop beaucoup, &c. 

230. Bien, when it precedes another adverb, means 
very, much, &c. : as, 

Bien moins. Much less. 
Bien tard. Very late. 

231. But when it is placed after the adverb, it signifies 
well: as, 

Assez bien. Pretty v:ell. 
Fort bien. Very ivell. 

EXERCISE LXI. 

We do not expect him to-day. If it be fine weather, I shall be 
back this day se'nnight I shall be glad to see you this day fort- 
night, if I am well. This day week I was at your house. A 

• -Chez vous- • 

year hence you will be able to speak French tolerably well. He 

• pouvoir- • 
has as much money and as many friends as you. I was so much 

the more persuaded of what you told me, that I dismissed him this 

day three weeks. My sister has just as much wit, and is just as 



GRAMMAR AND EXFJRCISES. 157 

amiable as yours. Hati. off, gentlemen, and sit down. There is a 

man below, whom you will see with pleasure. Though we said it 

for fun, he was very angry with us. He has much increased his 

contra 
fortune. Sir, I have done my exercise. Well and good. 

th6me. A la bonne heure. 

My father has bought a horse very cheap. They wandered to and 

fro without knowing whither to go. Some went to London 

Les uns 

in a coach, others on horseback. How far is it hence to 

en — art. k 

Dover 1 How long will it be before you send me back the 

Douvres 1 Dans combien de temps 

books I loaned you ] They run up and down all day, and ^do 

'nothing but play. I know how that happened : talk no more of 

ne 
it. I will call upon you to-morrow, and the day after we will 

passer chez 
go and see my uncle. We will pay you the day after to-mor- 
row, if we can. My brother often speaKs with a double meaning. 

Tou have put on your waistcoat the wrong side outwards. My 

mettre 
brother and yours work in emulation of one another. Whatever 

may happen, I do not care for it. He did it in the twinkling 

se soucier 
of an eye. 



EXERCISE LXII. 

This morning I awoke suddenly, but I soon fell asleep again. 
s' dveiller 

Let every one speak in his turn, for if you speak all together, how 

Que k 

can I hear what you say ? They demolished the house from top 

to bottom. How long, O Catiline, will you abuse our pa- 

* Catilina, abuser de 

tience 1 You always come to see me by night ; why do you not 

— de 

come in the day-time T It is not amidst the pleasures of this 

de — — parmi 

world that we find happiness ; it is in the bosom of inno- 
art. seiu art. 



158 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

cence and peace, where we ought to look for it. There is no 

que chercher- 

going any where in winter. He speaks so low that I can hardly 

hear what he says. The Spaniards pursued them so closely 
Espagnol de pr6s 

that they entered the town helter-skelter. Let the worst come 

dans 
to the worst, I will get rid of it. All our rooms are on the same 

•se defaire- 
floor. You give me more than enough. You come very sea- 
sonably, and your brother came in the nick of time. She is better 

than her sister, in all respects. Our eating-room is even with 

t 6gard. 

the ground. 



CHAPTER Vni. 

OF THE PREPOSITION. 

( 

232. Prepositions may be divided, according to their . 
regimen, into three classes : 

233. 1. Those which govern the nouns without the j, 
assistance of any other preposition : as a, de, des, &c. 

234. 2. Those which govern the nouns with the 
assistance of the preposition a : which are, conformed |i 
ment, jiLsqv? or jusques, par rapport, quant, attenant, &c 
And, 

235. 3. Those which govern them with the assistance b 
of the preposition de : as, aupres, autour, &c. 

236. A, de, en, must be repeated before every sub- 

itantive. 

• 

237. The other prepositions, particularly those which ; 
have only one syllable, are to be repeated before sub- 
stantives wliieh have different or opposite meanings : "• 
as, dans la paix, et dans la guerre ; par la force, et par 
/' adresse. 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 159 

238. But they are not to be repeated when the nouns 
are synonymous : as, dans la paix et la tranquillite; j}ar 
la force et la violence. 

EXERCISE LXTII. 
ox pnEPOsiTioxs OF THE FiKST CLASS. See art. 233. 

We find less 2real 'happiness in an ^elevated 'condition than in 

On de 

a ^middling 'state. One is never truly peaceful but at home. 

moyen v^ritablement tranquille soi. 

He walked before me to serve me as a guide. There was a 

pour de — 

^delightful 'grove behind his house. Nature displays her riches 

bosquet, m. d^ployer 

with magnificence under the 2torrid 'zone. ^Eternal -ignows 

3de3 ion 

are to be seen on the summit of the Alps. Towards the north, nature 

'voir sommet 

assumes a ^gloomy ^and "^wild 'aspect. We were up before day light, 

triste se lever — 

m order to enjoy the Smagnificent 'spectacle of the 2rising 'sun. 

•pour-' de 

From my earliest infancy I have had an abhorrence of lying. 

— art. tendre — horreur mensonge. 

With wit, politeness, and some readiness to oblige, one gene- 

un peu de provenance 

rally succeeds in the world. Besides the^exterior 'advantages of 

art 
figure, and the graces of deportment, she possesses an 2excellent 

art. maintien, avoir 

'heart, a ^correct 'judgment, and a ^sensible 'mind. Always act 

sain se conduire 

according to the maxims which I have given you. We 
— inculquer 

cannot long act contrary to our own character; notwith- 
eavoir cond. pr. agir •••contre--- — 

standing all the pains we take to disguise it, it shows itself, and 

que pour -semontrer- 

betrays us on many occasions. I have written to you con* 

en bien de art. 
cerning that business, in which I take the most lively interest ; and 

k lequel vif 

as 1 know well your benevolence towards the unfortunate, 
connaitre nialheureux. 



160 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

I have not the least doubt that you will carefully attend 

ne douter nullement- • • ne donner tous vos soins, subj. pr. 

to it, not so much for the satisfaction of obliging me, as for the pleasure 

• -y moins 

of justifying innocence and confounding calumny. When we 

art. art. 

were in the country, we devoted the morning to study, we 

k consacrer matinee art. 

walked at noon, and at three or four o'clock we went a hunting, or a 

midi, 
fishing. That man with his gloomy Mooks and Sguriy 

pfeche,/. a — art. sombre regard, m. brusque 

^behaviour, seems fit only to serve as a scarecrow. In that happy 
maintien, ne de — ^pouvantail. 

retreat we lived on the milk of our flocks, and the ^delicious 'fruits of 

de brebis, 

our orchards. We were at peace, and ^enjoyed ^all 'its blessings, 

en gouter en *art. charme, 

when ambition rekindled the flames of war, and forced us 

art. rallumer feu art. 

to put our frontiers in a state of defence, 
de — 

EXERCISE LXIV. 

05- PREPOsiTioxs OF THE sEcojTD CLASS. See art. 234. 

A magistrate should always judge agreeably to the laws, and 

according to what they prescribe. He has been punished 
confer moment 

pursuant to an act of parliament. His garden is next to 
conform^ment attenant 

mine. Yesterday we waited for him till five o'clock in the morning. 

attendre de 

If I had not stopped him, he would have gone even to Dover. W^e 

jusque 
accompanied them as far as Antwerp. I will do it for your 
jusque Anvers. a 

sake but never on account of them. As for me, I vdll not 
consideration par rapport Quant 

give him a penny. As to what people may say, I do not care for it. 
sous. r on s' en soucier 

EXERCISE LXV. 

ox PHEPOsiTioxs or THE THIRD CLASS. See art. 235, 

I have sent nothing to your brother, because of his idleness ; but i 



^ ^^ GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 161 

forgU* him on your account. Cut that sorrel even with the 

oseille,/. a. fleur — 

ground. All laid down their arms, except two regiments, 

mettre bas — art. 
who preferred, making their way through the enemy. He is 

sefairejour au-lravers pi. 

become a very good master by dint of study and practice. Under 

il force 
that thick tree we shall be sheltered from the rain. All the prisoners 

a r abri 
made their escape by means of the darkness of the night. I am 
• •• -s' dchapper • • • S. la faveur 

going to meet my aunt ; will you accompany me 1 He took 

ati (levant de 
my hat instead of his. My house is good for nothing in compaVison 

• ••valoir •• au prix 

of hers. I can do nothing for want of money. They were 
• -faute- • 
off the Cape of Good Hope, when they were taken. He is 
ft la hauteur 
gone along the river. The officers and soldiers were lodged in 

le long 
barracks, proof to cannon and bomb, 
a. r 6preuve 



CHAPTER TX. 

OF THE CONJUNCTION. 

239. Conjunctions may be divided into three classes : 

240. 1. Those which either govern the indicative, or 
may be used with any mood : as, e/, om, sinon^ Stc. 

241. 2. Those which require the following verb to be 
in the infinitive mood : as, ajin de^ de fenr de, &c. And, 

242.- 3. Those which require the following verb to be 
' in the subjunctive : as, afin que, qiiolque, &c. 

EXERCISE LXVI. 

ox coxjuxcTTOxs OF THE FIHST CLASS. ScB art. 240. 

Gold and silver are metals less useful than iron. I like 
[ jJ'-t. des ne 

I nnither flatterers nor the wicked. You may choose either a happj 
pi. ou 

P* 11 



162 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 



mediocrity, or a sphere more elevated, but exposed to many dangers. 

/. 
He is an 2inconsistent 'man ; he is sometimes of one opinion, and 
Ce inr.ons^quent tant6t avis, 

sometimes of another. I have nothing more to say to you, only 
ne • autre chose • Biuon 

that I will have it so. The serpent bites ; it is only a 
vouloir — — ce ne 

bite ; but from this bite the venom communicates iteelf to the 
morsure ; /. venin 

whole body : the slanderer speaks ; it is but a word ; but this 

ce ne parole ; 

word resounds every where. The most beautiful flowers last 
» retentir ne durer 

but a moment : thus ^human ^life 'passes away. The greater part 

— plupart,/. 

of mankind have, like plants, ^hidden Zqualities, that 

art. hommes art. 'des propri^t^,/. 

chance discovers. We ought to love what is amiable : now' 
art. hasard faire decouvrir. or 

virtue is amiable ; therefore we ought to love virtue. Despreaux 
art. ' 

was extremely particular in not coming too late, when he was^ 

de la plus grande exactitude ^ 
invited to dinner; he said that all the faults of those whc^ 

d^faut 

are waited for present themselves to those who wait for them. We 

86 faire attendre — ' 

had hardly done when he came in. I 

finir entrer. 

EXERCISE LXVII. 
ON coxjtJKCTioxs OF THE sEcoxD CLASS. See art. 241. 

In order to ^leam 'well, we must study with a great deal of attentionr 

— falloir 
Let us breakfast before we 2begin any thing. A prudent man oughj 

— ... irien • • • 

to think several times, before he acts. I would not do it for fear of 

— agir. ■ 

displeasing you. He is capable of every thing except of doinjg 

— tout — 
good. He lost his arm for want of sending for a surgeon. You.' 

chirurgien. 
cousin has humbled himself till he fell on his knees before the idol 
• ••s' humilier- ••• . • a. •• 

Far from exciting them to fight, I did all that I could, in order to pre 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISP:S. 163 

vent them. She would do any thing in the world, rather than 

•••tout'* a 
speak to him. Rather than study, he loses his time, or spends it ir« 

passer 
trifles. We must, at least, know the 2general 'principles of a lan- 
guage, before we take upon ourselves to teach it. 
de se mcler de 

EXERCISE LXVIir. 

ox cojf JUNCTIONS OF THK THiuD CLASS. See art, 242. 

To listen with joy to a slanderer, and to applaud him, is to cherish 
— medisant, — lui, ce rdchaulf<?r 

the serpent who stings, that he may sting more effectually, 

afin surement. 

Although Homer, according to Horace, slumbers at times, he 

sommeiller quelquefois, n' en 
is, nevertheless, the first of all poets. You will succeed, provideu 
pas moins, r^ussir, 

you act with vigour. I will explain to you every difficulty, 
que afin 

that you may not be disheartened in your undertaking. You will 
d^courager 

never be respected, unless you forsake the bad company you 
abandonner que 

keep. They are not happy, though they be rich. Although you 
frequenter. 

have a good memory, this is not enough to learn any language 

pour une 

whatever : you must make use of your judgment I will not give you 

se servir 
that penknife, lest you should make a bad use of it. God grant 

.veuille que 
you be not disappohited in your hopes ! Would to God I had 

tromper Plut q.ue 

been there ! T would have conquered or perished. God forbid 

vaincie k ne plaise 

I should blame your conduct. However little you give her, 

que Pour peu que 

she is of 3so ^good 'a 2temper, that she is always pleased. If your 

naturel, 
father do not arrive to-day, and if you want money, I 

que avoir besoin de 

will lend you some. 



164 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 



CHAPTER X. 

OF THE INTERJECTION. 

243. There arc interjections of different sorts, ac- 
cording to the different passions which they serve to ex- 
press : viz. 

Aliens! Come! Hol^ho! Ho there! 

Ah mon Dieu ! Oh my God! Hem ! Hem ! 

Ha, quelle joie! Oh joy! Fi ! Fie! 

O ciel ! Oh heaven ! Fi done ! For shame ' 

Helas ! Alas ! Paix ! chut ! st! Hist ! husk ' 

Misericordc ! Bless me ! Silence! Silence! 

Malheur a vous ! Wo to you ! 

EXERCISE LXIX. 

Come ! friends, let us rejoice. Fie ! fie ! Robert, you do not reflect 

• -se r^jouir- • 
on what you say. Oh ! ihow ^lovely -^a ^virtue % ^modesty. Alas 

que 
who can express the torments I suffer here. Wo to you ! usurers, 

misers. Bless me ! T am undone. Hush there ! silence. Oh ! tha 

perdre 1& 

dismal effects of idleness ! 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 165 



PART II. 



Syntax is that part of Grammar which treats of tht 
Agreement and Construction of Words in a Sentence. 



CHAPTER I. 

OF THE SUBSTANTIVE. 

244. Substantives generally have but one gender : there 
are some, however, which are masculine or feminine, ac- 
cording to their signification; and a few which are mas- 
culine in one number, and feminine in the other. For a 
list of these, see ante, page 45. 

^45?) Gens requires all adjectives which precede it to 
bel^rmnine, and all which follow it to be masculine : as, 
les vieilles gens sont soupgonneux ; toutes les mechanles 
gens. 

However, instead of foutes, ious is employed : 1st 
When this adjective is the only one which precedes 
gens : as, ious les gens d? esprit. 2d. When gens is 
preceded by an adjective which has but one termination 
for both genders : as, tous les honnetes gens ; tons les ha- 
biles gens. (French Acad.) 

246. Certain nouns remain in the singular number, 
although there is plurality in the idea. These are : 

247. J . Proper noun : as, Z' Espagne a vu natlre les 
deux Seneque. 

Except when they are employed as nouns common, to 
designate individuals like those whose names we employ . 



166 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

as, la France a eu ses Cesars et ses Pompees ; that is, 
generals equcil to Caesar and Pompey. 

248. 2. Nouns borrowed from foreign languages, and 
which are not yet made French : as, des alleluia, des ave, 
des auto-da-fe, des alinea, &.c. 

249. However, the French j\cademy writes, des fac- 
iums, des debets, des bravos, des operas. 

250. 3. Words used as nouns (parts of speech, &.c.), 
which, naturally, are not declinable : as, les pourquoi, Its 
car, les oui, les non, les on dif, Sec. 

251. In nouns compounded of two or more words, 
the only words that take the sign of the plural, are the 
substantive and adjective : as, un plain-chant, des plains- 
chants ; une plate-forme, des plates-formes, &.c. 

252. There are some compound words, however, 
which, of necessity, from their sense, do not change in 
the plural, even where one of the words is a substan- 
tive: such as, un crcve-cceur, des creve-coeur, literally, 
hurst-heart, that is, great troubles that burst the heart ; 
un coupe-gorge, des coupe-gorge, literally, cut-throat, 
that is, places where a man is exposed to have his throat 
cut. 

253. When a noun is compounded of two substan- 
tives united by a preposition, the iirst alone takes the sign 
of the plural : as, un arc-en-ciel, a rainbow ; des arcs-en- 
cLel, rainbows. 

254. This last rule has the following exceptions : des 
coq-a-V dne, cock and bull stories ; des pied-a-terre, 
counti-y lodgings ; des tete-d-tete, private conversations. 

255. Compound nouns, the second word of which 
always marks plurality in the idea, take s, both in the 
singular and in the plural : as, un cure-dents, a tooth-pick; 
des casse-noisettes, nut-crackers. 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 167 



CHAPTER II. 

OF THE ARTICLE. 

256. The article is to be put bt-fore all substantives 
common, taken in a general sense : as, 

L' hornme se repait trop sou- Man ton often beguiles hinir 

vent de chimeres. self with chimeras, 

Les hommes a imagination Men of intaglnative disposi- 

sont toujours raalheureux. tions arc always unhappy. 

257. In English, the article is not used before sub- 
stantives taken in a general sense. 

258. The article is also to be used before substantives 
taken in a determinate sense, as in English : as, 

L' homme dont vous parlez. TTie man of whom you speak. 

L' enfant qui pleura. The child who cries. 

259. The article is put before proper names of coun- 
tries, regions, rivers, winds, and mountains : as. 

La France est bornee au sud France is bounded oil the 

par les Pyrenees et la Mediter- south by the Pyrenees and the 

ranee, a V est par la Suisse et la Mediterranean, on the east by 

Savoie, au nord par les Pays- Switzerland and Savoy, on the 

Bas, et a /' ouest par 1' ocean. north by the Netherlands, and 

on the west by the ocean. 

Ija Taniise, le Rhone, V aqui- The T'lamcs, the Rhone, the 

Ion, les Alpes, le Cantal. north wind, the Alps, the CantaL 

Except Naples : as, 

Naples est un pays delicieux. Naples is a delightful country, 

260. The article is put before the adverbs plus., mieux, 
mains., to express comparison, and agrees in gender witli 
ihe substantive : as, 

Cctte dame ne pleurait pas, That lady dd not cry, aU 

quoiqu'elle fut la plus aftligee. though she was the most ajfflictid. 

261. The article remains always in the masculine, 
when we express a quality in the highest degree without 
comparison : as, 

Cctte dame ne pleure pas, That lady does not cry, even 
lors meme qu' elle est le plus ivhen she is most [extremely] 
affligce. afflicted. 



168 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 



EXERCISE LXX. 

The moment clejrance, the most visible ♦imaj^e of zfino 

De que 25C* 279 un d^licat 

'taste, appears, it is universally adnaired : men differ respecting the 

se montre, '2L6 but 

other constituent 'parts of beauty, but they all unite without 

iqui 3couiposer — 256 se 

hesitation in acknowledging the power of elegance. Tranquillity 

t 256 256 

of soul is the height of felicity. The man who lives under an 

coiiible dans 

^habitual 'sense of the ^Jivine 'presence, preserves a perpetual 

conviction conserver constant 

cheerfulness o( temper, and enjoys, every moment, the satisfaction of 

thinking himself in company with the dearest and best of friends. 

Europe is bounded on the north by the Frozen Ocean; on the south 

259 
by the Mediterranean Sea, which separates it from Africa; on the 

259 
east by the continent of Asia ; on the west by the Atlantic Ocean. 

Of all the planets, the moon is the most brilliant to us. The moon 

260 
does not give us so much light as the sun. even when it shines 

brishtest. This woman has the art of shedding tears, even whep 

261 
she is least afflicted. 
261 

262. The article is put before substantives taken u 
a jiarliiive sense; see art. 52, 53^ 154 ante : as, 

Du pain. &jnie breed. 

De r eau. Some wafer. 

Dcs tableaux. Su me pictures. 

263. The article is omitted, however, when the sub- 
stantive, taken in a partitive sense, is preceded by an ad- 
jective ; see art. 155 ante: as, 

Je mange de bon pain. 7 eat gnnd bread. 

Je Iiois de bonne eau. / drink uood icaler. 

J' ai de beaux tableaux. 1 have beatil ful picfurea, 

^ That is: See art 256, page 167 ante, for the rule which is ap- 
plicable here, &c &c. 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES.' 169 

264. When the adjective is joined to the substantive 
so as to form but one word, the article must be used : as, 

Des petits-inaitres. Fops. 

Des petits-pois. Peas. 

265. It may not be improper to observe here, that most 
authors who have made literal translations from French 
into English, have erroneously rendered the words da^ de 
la., des, by some ; not thinking that nearly all sentences 
of which these words form a part are elliptical. 

For instance, when, sitting at table, 1 say, Donnez-mol 
dttpniii, Give me some bread, I mean, Donnez-moi une 
portion, on nil morceau dti pain qui est sur la tahle^ 
Give me a portion, or a piece of the bread which is on the 
table. So that it is easy to see, that in Donnez-moi du 
pnin, the word portion., or morceau, which is the equiva- 
lent oi' some, is understood in French ; whereas, du, of the, 
is understood in English. The correct translation would 
then be,* 

Donnez-moi du pain. 

Give me some — bread. 

266. The French, unlike the English, do not put the 
article before substantives employed adjectively, that is, 
to qualify a preceding noun : as, 

'J'clemaque, fils d' U lysse. Telemachus, the son of Ulysses. 

Ijc Due d' York, prince du The Duke of York, a prince of 

san^f. the blood. 

Je suis Franpais. I ant a Frenchman. 

267. But if the substantive be used in a restricted 
sense, un or une must precede it, as in English : as, 

Je snis un Franpais d' une I am a Frenchman of an illuS" 
illustre maison. trious family. 

268. The article is omitted before plus and moins^ 
when either of them is repeated to express a compari- 
son : as. 

Plus une chose est difficile, Tlie more difficult a thing is, 
plus elle est honorable. the more honourable it is. 

\ * See Collet's " PiioonEssivE IxxERLTa-EAB Fhekch Reader*' 
I in which this error has been carefully avoided. 
I u 



170 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 



EXERCISE LXXI. 
I yesterday saw some learned men, who do not think as you do 

I have given him bread, money, and clothes. You always read 

liii 2G2 236 

good books. Bad wine is not worth good water. He is always 
263 valoir 

seen with wits and noblemen. He was a man of 2uncommcn ' 

204 Ce 267 un rare 

'probity, and of ^tvied 'virtue: to recompense him for the ser- 

un €pTcuv6 pour de | 

vices he had rendered to the church and state, the king has made ' 
que 236 ; 

him a bishop. Jupiter, a god of the heathens, was the son 

266 266 2G6 

of Saturn, and the father of the other gods. Robert, duke of Nor- 
mandy, the brother of Henry, king of England, was the son of 

266 
William the Conqueror. 

I 



CHAPTER IH. 



OF THE ADJECTIVE. 



269. The adjective agrees in gender and number with I 
the substantive wiiich it qualifies or determines. f 

OF THE QUALIFICATIVE ADJECTIVE. 

270. From the preceding rule must be excepted, 
when they precede the substantive, wm, bare, and demi, 
half* as, 

Nn-pieds. Barefooted. 

Une demi-heure. Half an hour. 

271. But the agreement takes place if 7im and demi be 
placed after the substantive : as, 

II a les pieds 7ius. His feet are bare. 

Line heure et dernie. An hour and a half 

272. Feu., late, does not agree with its substantive*^ 
when another word is interposed between them : as, 

Feu la reine. The late queen. 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 171 

J273. But the agreement takes place if the adjective be 
placed immediately before the substantive : as, 
La/eiic reine. The late queen. 

274. Adjectives used substantively are, like substan- 
tives common, accompanied by the article : as, 

Les fans inventent les modes, et Fools invent fashions, and ivise 
jes sages s' y conforment. men conform to them. 

275. The adjective takes the article wherever there is 
a noun expressed or understood : as. 

La langue franpaise, et /' an- The French and English Ian- 
glaise soat tres-cultivees. guages are very much cultivated. 

The noun langue is here understood before anglaise. 

276. When two or three adjectives qualify a single 
noun, the article is not repeated : as, 

Le sensible et vertueux Fe- The sensible and virtuous Fe- 
nelon. nelon. 

277. When the adjective is placed after a proper name, 
which it qualifies, it expresses a distinguishing quality : as, 
Varron le savant; meaning the one distinguished for his 
learning from all of the same name. 

278. When a superlative relative precedes a substan- 
tive, the article serves for both substantive and adjective : 
as, 

Les plus hahiles gens font The ablest men sometimes 
quelquefois les plus grandes commit the greatest blunders. 
fautes. 

279. But if the superlative relative follow the substan- 
tive, the article must be repeated : as, 

Les gens les plus habiles font The ablest man sometimes 
quelquefois les fautes les plus commit the greatest blunders, 
grandes. 

280. Adjectives in French, are generally placed after 
the substantive. 

281. This rule is, however, subject to many excep- 
tions, which it would not be possible to present in a 
systematic view to the student: practice and taste will, in 
this instance, be his best teachers. 



173 COLLOTS PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 



282. The adjective, placed after two or several sub- 
stantives wliich are not united by the conjunction c/, 
agrees in gender and number with the last only: as, 

II a nioiitrd une reserve, une He exhibited a reserve, a dis» 
retenue, d.gnc d'eloges. creiion, worlhy to be praised. 

EXERCISE LXXII. 

He ran through the streets Uke a madaian, barefoot and bareheaded. 

270 
His legs were bare. Give me half a guinea, and then you will 
— II 2S6 avoir 271 270 

only owe me a guinea and a half. I shall be at home in half an 

— 271 Chez inoi 270 

hour. The late queen was idolized. The late queen was universally 

272 273 

regretted. The ignorant have, in a large stock of presumption, what 

fort dose 
they want in real knowledge, and that is the reason they are ad- 

ce qui fait que 
mired by fools. We ought to frequent good, and shun bad company. 
274 275 256 , 

The ancient and modern writers are not agreed upon that point. ; 

275 

The wise man preserves the same tranquillity of mind in good or bad ; 

275 237 J 

fortune. The more wc read the fables of the good and artless La 

2G8 on 276 

Fontaine, the more we are convinced thev are a book foi all ages, and 
268 ' 258 

the manual of the man of taste. 






EXERCISE LXXIII. 

It was only under the reign of Louis the Just (the Thirteenth,) that 

277 
good taste began to show itself in France ; but it was under that of 

258 

Louis the Great that it was carried to perfection. It has been said of . 

On — ' 

the Telemachus of the virtuous Fenelon, that it is the most useful present 

279 don 

the muses have made to mankind ; for, could the happiness of j 
que 40' si 

man be produced by a poem, it would be by that The smoothest 

naitre • ■ • da tranquill* 



GRAMMAR AND EXjlRCISES. / 173 

waters often conceal the most dangerous gulfs. The most beautiful 

279 279 278 

actions are sometimes sullied by the greatest vices. Cicero was the 
278 est 278 

mo6t eminent orator the Romans have had. All his life was but a 

c6l6bre 407 a 6t6 

labour, but a continual occupation. 
282 

OF THE DETERMINATIVE ADJECTIVE. 

283. Vingt and cent take s, when multiplied by other 
numerel adjectives : as, 

Q,\iAUe-vmgfs hommes. Eighty men. 
Deux cents bccufs. Ttvu hundred oxen. 

284. But they do not take s, when followed by other 
numeral adjectives ; as, 

Quatre vigni-un hommes. Elghly-one men. 

Deux cent six bcEufs. Two hundred and six oxen. 

285. The adverbs of place, cl and lei., are often joined 
to the adjectives ce, ce/, celfe,, ces., in order to point out 
in a more precise manner the person or thing spoken of. 
The adjective is then placed before the substantive, and 
the abverb after it : as, 

Ce livre-ci, this hook. Cet homme-la, that man. 
Cettc fleur-ci, this flower. Ces femmes-la, those women. 

(^86.) The adjective possessive, which, in English, 
prec"ecles a noun representing any part of the body, is 
rendered in French by placing the definite article before 
the noun, and a pronoun of the proper person before the 
verb : as, 

II me coupa le bras. He cut my arm. 

On lui a coupe la jambe. They have cut off his leg. 

287. Chaque, which is of both genders, has no plural, 
and must always be followed by a substantive : as, 

Chaque pays a ses coutumes. Each country has its customs. 

288. JS\d and pas un have no plural : they require Tie 
before the verb : as, 

Nul homme n est parfait. No man is perfect. 

Pas une experience ne reussit. Not one experiment succeeds. 



174 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FREXCH 

289. Aucun is not employed in the plural, except be- 
fore substantives which, in some particular sense, are bet- 
ter employed in the plural : as, 

II n' a fait aucunes disposi- He has made no dispositions. 
tions. 

290. Touf^ considered collectively, signifies the whole 
of a thing, and is then followed by the article : as, 

Tout r univers. The whole universe. 

291. Touf^ v.hen considered distributively, signifies 
chaque, every, and is not accompanied by the article : cis, 

Tuut bien est desirable. Every good is desirable. 

292. Qmlque^ when it precedes a substantive, is of 
both genders, and takes s in the plural : as, 

II a fait queljiies fautes. He has committed some faults. 

Quelques efforts que vous fas- Whatever attempts you may 

siez. make. 

293. Quel que., before an adjective, operates as an ad- 
verb, and is indeclinable, except when the adjective pre- 
cedes a substantive in the plural : as, 

Quclque belle qu' elle puisse However beautiful she may be, 

etre, elle ne doit pas etre vaine. she ought not to be vain. 

Quelques braves soldats y sent Some brave soldiers went 

alles. thither. 

294. Quel que., before a verb, must be two words ; 
and quel agrees in gender and number with the substan- 
tive : as, 

Quelles que soient vos affaires, Whatever your business may 
venez. be, come. 

295. Quelconque is always placed after the substan- 
tive; and when used with a negative, is always sin- 
gular: as, 

^ II n' y a raison quelconque qui There is no reason whatever 
puisse r y obliger. which can oblige him to it. 

EXERCISE LXXIV. 

I bought eighty horses, two hundred oxen, ninety sheep, and tv, 

283 283 284 

hundred and four cows. I had a &11 yesterday and hurt my back 
284 286 



OrRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 175 

and head. In this bloody battle he received a wound, by a shot, in 

286 coup de feu 

his right arm, and another in his left leg : by dint of care his anu 

286 286 

was saved ; but it was necessary to amputate his leg. This stuff 

286 285 

will become you wonderfully. That action is worthy of blame. 

si6ia a. merveille. 285 

This scene is calculated to interest all men, but that cannot succeed. 

faite 258 ne saurait 

Every nation has, in its turn, shone on the theatre of the world. 
287 a 

EXERCISE LXXV. 

No expression, no truth of design or colouring, no touches of genius 

288 dessin trait 

in that great work. Did any man ever attain to such a pitch of 

289 parvenir ••ce" comble 

glory ! I doubt whether there be in any science a more ^evident 
que 289 lumincux 

'principle. The whole course of his life has been distinguished by 

290 marquer 

^generous 'actions. Every vice is odious. Whatever faults you 

291 292 

may have committed, they will forgive you. AH men, however 

fait, 258 293 

opposite they may be, agree on that point. Whatever your 

294 
fault may be, I will forgive you. There is no reason whatever 

295 
that can bring him to it. 
puisse determiner 118 



CHAPTER IV. 
OF THE PRONOUN 

SECTION I. 

OP THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 

298 Je^ iu, il, elle^ Us, elles, are always the subject; that 
is, they always represent the person or thing which per- 
forms the action expressed by the verb : as, 

Je dis la verite. I speak the truth. 

Tu apprendras des nouvelles. Thou wilt hear newt* 



f7G COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

7/ nous raconta son histoire. He laid us his history. 

Elks sont survenues a 1' im- They have come unexpectedly. 
proviste. 

297. J/e, /e, sr., leur, 7c, 7a, les^ ?/, ct?, are always the 
object; that is, they always represent the person or thing 
which suffers the action expressed by the verb : as, 

Je me rase. / shave myself. 

Tu leu7- paries. Thou speakest to them. 

II te voit. He sees thee. 

lis la voient. They see her. 

298. In affirmative sentences, the subject always 
comes first : as, 

Je me rase. I shave myself. 

299. In negative sentences, the particle ne is put be . 
tween the subject and object: as, 

Je ne me rase pas. I shave not myself. 

300. In interrogative sentences, the subject is put after 
the verb : as. 

Me xase-je ? Shave I myself? 

301. In negative-and-interrogative sentences, the sub- ; 
ject is also put after the verb : as, 

Ne me rase-je pas 1 Shave I not myself? 

302. The regimen of me, fe, se, is sometimes direct^ 
and sometimes indirect : 

303. It is direct^ when they represent respectively 
moi^ toi, sot : as, 

Vous 7ne connaissez. You know me. 

Je /e vois. I see thee. 

II se perd. He ruins himself. 

304. And indirect., when they supply respectively the 
place of a mot., a toi^ a. sol : as, 

Vous me parlez. You speak to me. 

Je t ' ecri;!. I vjrite to thee. 

II se represente. He represents to himself. 

305. Xe, 7flt, les^ are always direct : as, ^ 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 177 

Je le vols, for Je vols lui. 

Je la vois, . . Je vols elle. 

Je les vois, . . Je vois eux, or elle.s. 

06^ Xewr, ?/, en, are always indirect : as, 

Je leur parle, for Je parle a eux, or d elks. 

Je n" y entends rien, . . Je n' entends rien a cela. 
J' en suis f ache, . . Je suis fache de cela. 

307. The pronouns which are sometimes the subject, 
md sometimes the regimen or object, are nous, voiis, moi-, 
'■ol^ lui, elle, eux, elles : as, 

Nous leur parlons. We speak to them. 

lis nous parlent. They speak to us. 

308. Moi, toi, after the imperative, are changed into 
me, ie, when followed by en : as, 

Donno.z-m^ on. Give me some. 

Retourne-i!' en. Go back. 

309. When several pronouns accompany a verb, me, 
te, se, nous, vous must be placed first in order; le, la, les, 
oefore lui, leur; and y before en, which is always the 
last : as, 

Pretez-moi ce livre; je vous Lend me that book,- I wilt 

le rendrai demain ; si vous me return it to you to-morrow ,- if 

le refusez, je saurai m' en pas- you refuse me, I can make shift 

ser, without it. 

Aurez-vous la force de le leur Will you have the resolution 

dire ] to mention it to them ? 

11 n' a pas voulu vous y me- He was not willing to take 

ner. you there. 

Je vous y en porterai. / ivill bring you soine there. 

310. In imperative sentences, when me is changed into 
moi, it is preceded by le, la, les : as, 

Donnez-le-moi. Give it to me. 

Apportez-les-moi. Bring them to me. 

311. In imperative sentences, moi, for the sake of eu- 
phony, is placed after y ; as, 

Menez-y-moi. Carry me thither. 

312. The pronoun le may supply the place ol'a mem- 
ber of a sentence : as, 

12 



178 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

On doit s' accommoder a 1' hu- We ought to accommodate our- 

meur des autres, autant qu' on le selves to the temper of others, as 
pc'Ut. much as we can. 

313. Le, also, supplies the place of an adjective, or 
of a substantive used adjectively : as, 

Madame, ^tes-voua malade ? — Madame, are you sick ? — Yes, 

Out. je le suis. I am, 

Mesdasnes, etes-vous marie'e* .? Ladies, are you married? — 

Oui, nous le sommes. Yes, we are. 

314. But Za, Ze5, supply the place of substantives, or 
of adjectives used substantively: as, 

Mesdaraes, etes-vous le? ma- Ladies, are you the brides ?-— 

riees ? — Oui, nous hs sommes. Ye", we are. 

Madame, etes-vous la malade? Madam, are you the sick per- 

•—Oui, je la suis. son ? — Fes, I am. 

315. Pronouns expressing the first and second persons, 
must be repeated before all the verbs : as, 

Je soutiens, et je soutiendrai / maintain, and [ /] will nl- 

toujonrs. ways maintain. 

Vous dites, et vous avez lou- You say, and {youl have al- 

jours dit. ways said. 

316. Pronouns of the third person, when they form 
the subject, are seldom repeated before verbs of the same 
tenses : as. 

La bonne grace nc gate rien ; A graceful manner spoils no- 
elle ajoute a la beaute, et releve thing,- it adds to beauty, and 
la modestie. heightens modesty. 

317. But these pronouns are generally repeated before 
verbs of different tenses ; and when passing from an affir- 
mation to a negation, and the contrary : as, 

II est arrive ce matin, et il re* He arrived this morning, and 
partira ce soir. {he] will set off again this even- 

ing. 
II veut, et il ne veut pas. He will, and [he] will not. 

318. Pronouns forming the regimen, are repeated be- 
fore every verb : as, 

L' idee de ses malheurs le The idea of his misfortunes 
poursuit, le tourmente et P acca- pursues [him], torments [liim'] 
ble. and overwhelms him. 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 179 

II nous ennuie et nous obsede He wearies [us] and besets its 
sans cesse. unceasingly. 

319. Except before such compound verbs as express 
the repetition of the same action, and are in the same tense ; 
as, jd vous le dis^ et redis ; il lefail, el refait, sans cesse. 

EXERCISE LXXVI. 

The better to bear the irksomeness of captivity and solitude, I 
Pour 256 

sought for books ; for I was overwhelmed with melancholy, for want 

de ••fautc" 

of some knowledge to cherish and support my mind. I, 

qui pAt nourrir 307 

who am older than he, I ! go and speak to him ! No ; I 

307 — 115 296 

will not go ; let him come himself. How darest thou answer thy 

296 
master in ^so -^insolent ^a 2manner ! Thou whom he loves, thou 

de 307 296 

for whom he takes so much pains. He has been speaking to 

131 
them with an energy that has astonished them. He said to mc, 
297 302 

Wilt thou torment thyself incessantly for advantages, the en- 

se tourmenter 303 52 biens, 

joyment of which could not render thee more happy ? Cast thy 

297 286 

eyes round thee : see how every thing smiles at . thee, and seems 

304 — 297 

to invite thee to prefer a retired and tranquil life, to the tumultuous 

pleasures of a vain world. 

EXERCISE LXXVn. 

I believe your brothers are not well ; for I have not seen 

que 299 

them this week. Does he recognise himself in this portrait 1 
305 300 k 

Do vou hide yourselves in order to surprise them 1 Do you not 

301 
see them every day 1 Enjoy the pleasures of the world ; I 

de 
consent to it: but never give yourself up to them. I shall never 

.S06 306 

consent to that foolish srhcme; do not mention it any more 

parler 306 



180 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

If you have good pears, send me some. You wish to make 

263 308 

a present to your sister. There is a beautiful fan ; you should 

• •Voila-' devoir 

present it to her. I shall speak to them about it, and 

offrir 309 --lui-- 309 -..en--- 315 

give you a faithful account of it. I know .you have con- 

rendro exact que 

cealed my book: return it to me. Do you go to your country 

— 310 
seat 1 Yes, I do. Conduct me thither. Take us thither. 

311 309 



EXERCISE LXXVni. 

The laws of nature and decency equally oblige us to defend 

256 236 bienseance 

the honour and interest of our parents, when we can do it without 

256 312 

injustice. We were embarrassed, and are so yet. Are you Mrs. 

313 

2such a 'one 1 Yes, I am. Are those your servants 1 

— 314 Sont-ce la 

Yes, they are. Overwhelmed with sorrow, I exclaimed and 
314 

said. He took the strongest cities, conquered the most con 
315 
siderablc provinces, and overturned the most powerful kingdoms. 

It is inconceivable how whimsical she is: from one moment to 

another she will and she will not. It is taste that selects the 

expressions, that combines, arranges, and varies them, 

318 
so as to produce the greatest efiect. 

de manifere a. ce qu' elles 



SECTION II. 

OF THE POSSESSIVE PRONGU.XS. 

320. These pronouns must always relate to a substan- 
tive previously expressed : as, 

Votre livre est micux relie que Your hook is better hound thwfi 
ie mien. mine. 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 181 



SECTION III. 

OF THE RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 

321. Qm/, when it is the subject, relates both to per* 
sons and things : as, 

La femme qui chante. The woman who sings. 

I<es livres qui instruisent. The books which instruct. 

322. But when qui is the regimen, it can only be 
used of persons, or of things personified : as. 

La femme de qui vous parlez. The luoman of whom you are 

speaking. 
Rocher ! a qui je me plains. Rock I to whom I complain. 

323. Que relates both to persons and things. It is 
always the regimen, and cannot occur without an antece- 
dent expressed : as, 

C est vous qu* on appelle. // is you whom they call. 

C est le livrc que je cherche. It is the hook which lam seek- 

ing for. 

324. Lequel relates both to persons and things. It is 
generally used after a preposition : as, 

La protection sur laquelle il The protection on which he 
cornptait. relied. 

L' fctuJe a /a^'ueZ/e il s' applique. The study to which he ap- 
plies himself. 

325. Dont^ also, relates both to persons and things ; 
but it must be preferred to duquel^ when a noun comes 
after it : as, 

Le prince dont la protection. The prince whose protection. 

v326) Quoi relates only to things. It is always pre- 
ceoed by a preposition, and is generally used when the 
subject is vague and indefinite : as, 

II n' y a rien a quoi je sois There is nothing to vjhich 
plus dispose. ^ n 1^-^ Llammore^nclji^d. 

EXERCISE LXXIX. 

A. young man who loves vanity of dress, is unworthy of wisdom 
321 & Be parer vaiuemontt 256 



182 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

and gloiy ; glory is due only to a heart tliat knows how to suffer pain, 
23P 321 — 

and to trampie upon pleasure. That after which a true philosopher 

Ce 326 

sighs most ardently, is to spread that sentiment of ^universal ibenevo- 

2ei 
lence, which should unite and bring together all men. These aro 

321 •• rapprocher- • 256 

conditions without which the thing would not have been concluded. 

262 324 

A man whose manners are innocent, and behaviour blameless, is 

325 258 * irreprochable, 

the man whom we ought to cherish and honour. The ambitious man 
323 — 

sees nothing but pleasure in the possession of the ofnces to which he 

— 324 

aspires with so much eagerness, instead of seeing the trouble that is 

321 

inseparable from them. To whom were you speaking when I met 

118 322 

vou ? It was to my brother-in-law. 



SECTIOxN IV. 

OF THE ABSOLUTE PRONOUNS. 

327. Qui relates to persons only, and is of both 
genders and numbers : as, 

Qui vous a dit cela ] W?io told you that ? 

Qui sont ces ferames la 1 Who are those women ? 

328. Que and qpoi relate to things only : as, 
Que pouvait la valenr 1 What could vaJoitr do P 

A quoi pensez-vous 1 What are you thinking of? 

329. Que is sometimes used for a quoi^ de quoi: as, 

Que sert la science sans la What avails learning, wilhoui 

vcrtu ■? virtue ? 

Que sert a 1' avare d' avoir Whet avaih it the miser to 

des richesses 1 possess trea>iures ? 

330. Que and quoi require the preposition de before 
the adjective or substantive that follows them : as. 

Que dit-on de nouveau 1 What news is there ? 

Quoi de plus instructif ] What more instructive ? 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. I9S 



331. Quel relates both to persons and things : as, 
Quel homrne est-ce 1 What man is it P 

Quel temps fait-ii ] W/mt weather is it ? 

EXERCISE LXXX. 

Some one entered secretly ; guess who it was. Who woulJ not 

327 — — 
love virtue, for its own sake, couM he see it in all its beauty ] 

256 • •elle-ineine-- si on pouvait 

What have you read in that book tliat can have excited in vour soul 

32S ' 321 pnrl6 

emotion and enthusiasm % I know not what to think of it. In what 

256 329 118 328 

did you find them occupied 1 There is in that discourse I know not 

what which appears to me dcsijjiiing. What have you remarked 
328 seinbler — iiisidieux. 

good, beautiful, and sublime in Homer ] What more brilliant, and 
330 226 330 

at the same time more false, than the expressions of a man who has a 
en — 236 

great deal of wit, but wants judgment? He does not 

qui manque de 
know what model to fellow. I have told you what man it i«. Which 

331 331 ce 134 

of those ladies do you think the most amiable ] What tht-n must 
trouver 331 done doit 

have been that ^extraordinary 'man, to whom seven cities hnve 

322 

contested the glory of having given birth ] One of your brother*. 
66 disputer 256 jour? 

has arrived from the continent : which is it ? 
134 



SECTION V. 

OF THE DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 

332. C^, when it relates to the first or second person, 
always governs the verb in the singular : as, 

C est moi ; c' est nous ; c' est vous. 

333. Ce governs the verb in the plural, only when it 
relates to the third person plural : as, 

Ce sont eux ; cefureni vos ancetrea. 



TQ-l COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 



334. Ce supplies tlie place of i/, Us, e/Ze, elles, when 
the verb etre is followed by a substantive : as, 

Lisez Homere et Virgile : ce Read Homer and Virgil, they 
sont deux grands poetes. are two great pods. 

Avez-vous lu Platon] c' est Have you read Plato P he is a 
xxii he&\i genie. great genius. 

335. But v/hen etre is followed by an adjective^ or by 
a substantive taken adjectively, il, Us, elk, elles must 
be used : as, 

Lisez Demosthene et Ciceron : Read Demosthenes and CicC' 

Us sont trea-elu-juents. ro: they are very eloquent. 

Oompteriez-vous sur Valerel Would you rely upon VaUre? 

Ignorez-vous qu' il est hommt Do you not know thai he is a 

a ne jamais revenir de ses pre- man who will never abandon his 

mieres idees 1 Jirst opinions ? 

336. Ce, followed by a relative pronoun, represents 
things only, and is always masculine singular : as, 

Ce qui flutie est plus dange- What flatters is m,ore danger^ 
reux que ce qui o^ense.. ous than what offends. 

337. Ce, placed at the beginning of a sentence, must 
be repeated in the second part of that sentence, when it 
begins with the verb etre : as, 

Ce que j' aune le plus, c' est What I like most, is to hf 
d' etre seal. alone. 

338. Ccht.7. cclle, apply both to persons and things : as, 
J' ai vu le portrait du pere et I have seen the picture of the 

celui du fils. father, and that of the son. 

Celle que vous hai'ssez est ma She whom you hate is my best 
meilleure aniie. friend. 

339. Celui is sometimes omitted, to give strength and 
elegance to the expression : as. 

Qui veut trop se faire craindre, [-^'^j W'/to wishes to make 
se fait raremeiit aimer. himself too much feared, seldom 

inakes himself beloved. 

EXERCISE LXXXI. 

It is we who have drawn that misfortune upon ourselves, through 

332 s' attirer — 

our thoughtlessness and imprudence. It was the Egyptians that 
i^gdretd S33 321 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 185 

first observed the course of the stars, regulated the year, and 
les ptomiers astre, 

invented arithmetic. Peruse attentively Plato and Cicero : f hey aro 

256 Lire 334 

the two philosophers of antiquity who have given us the most sound 

256 279 sain 

and luminous ideas upon morality. If you are intended for the 

256 • -se dostiner- ii 

pulpit, read over and over again Bourdaloue and Massiilon : they 
••lire et relire sans cesse •• 335 

are bot'n very eloquent ; but the aim of the former is to convince, and 

but 
that of the latter to persuade. What is astonishing is not always 

336 
what is pleasing. What the miser thinks least of, is to enjoy 

Ce a. quoi — 337 

his riches. What pleases us in the writings of the ancients, is to 

337 
see that they have taken nature as a model, and that they have 

256 
painted her with a noble simplicity. Whichever of you 

338 que 

shall be found to excel the others, both in mind and body, shall 

on juger vaiiiqueur et pour 237 

be acknowledged king of the island. There are admirable pictures ; 

these are after the manner of Rubens, and those after the manner 

139 dans genre 

of Van Huysum. He that judges of others by himself, is liable to 

138 
many mistakes. 

SECTION VI. 

OF THE INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 

340. On is always subject, and always joined, to the 
third person singular of tlie verb : as, on dlt^ they say. 

341. Though on may generally be considered as a 
masculine pronoun, there are, however, occasions in 
which it is evidently feminine : as, on n' est pas toujours 
jeune et jol'ie. 

342. On is sometimes followed by an adjective, or a 
substantive plural : as, on se hattit en desesperes ; est-on 
de^ traUres ? 



186 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

343. Quiconque is generally masculine, and relates to 
persons only : as, 

Quiconque parle. Whoever speaks. 

344. Quelqv? un applies both to persons and things : as, 
J' attends quelqu^ un. I waii for Homtbody. 
Qaelquea-uns assurent. Some people affirm. 

345. C/iacun^ though always singular, when placed 
after the regimen, takes son, sa, ses : as, 

lis ont opine dans cette af- TAei/ have given iheir opinion 
faire, chacun selon ses lu- in tkat affair, each one accord' 
mieres. ing to his knowledge. 

346. But Zewr, leurs, must be used, when chacun i.s 
placed before the regimen : as, 

lis ont, chacun selon leurs They have, each one according 
lumieres, opine dans cette af- to his knowledge, given thdr 
faire. opinion in tJtat affair. 

347. Autru'i relates to persons only, and is always 
preceded by a preposition : as. 

La charite se rejouit du bon- Charity rejoices in the happi- 
beur d' autrui. ness of others. 

'348.J Personne is always masculine singular, and when 
it Cleans nobody, takes 7ie before the verb : as, 

Personne n' est aussi heureux Nobody is so happy as she. 
qu' elle. 

349. In interrogative phrases without negation, or in 
phrases expressing doubt, personne signifies quelqu' un^ 
anybody : as, 

Personne oserait-il nier 1 Je Would any body dare deny ? 

doute que personne soit assez I doubt whether any body b 
hardi. bold enough. 

350. Autre relates both to persons and things : as, 

Un autre le fera. Another will do it. 

Cette plume ne vaut rien ; This pen is good for nothing , 
donnez-m' en une autre. give me anoiJier one. 

351. Tel relates both to persons and things : as, 
M. un tel. Mr. such a one. 

Je ne vis jamais rien de tel. I never saw the like. 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 18? 

352. D un r nil' re applies both to persons and things . 
it takes both gender and number : as, 
lis se hai'ssent l' un V autre. They hate each other. 

[ 353. If there be any preposition, it must be placed be- 
j tween the two words which compose this pronoun : as, 
Elles parlent mal 1' une de They speak ill the one of the 
V autre. other. 

354. U un et P autre requires the verb in the plu- 
ral : as, 

L' un et r autre ont raison. Both arc in the rigid. 

355. Tow/, when a pronoun, signifies all things, every 
thing : as, 

II fait tout avec esprit. He does every thing ingeniously. 

EXERCISE LXXXII. 

Do you know what they do here ] They eat, they drink, they 

340 
dance, they play, they walk; in a word, they kill time in the gayest 

256 
manner possible. Do you sincerely think, said Emily to Lucilla, 

de bonne foi 
that when women are sensible and pretty, they are ignorant of it 1 

341 341 — 

No, they know it very well; but if they are watchful over their 

jaloux de 
character, they are not proud of these advantages. We are not 
reputation, 342 

slaves, to receive such treatment. Whoever of you is bold enough 

essiiyer 343 

to slander me, I will make him repent it. Will not aome one of 

» 344 

these ladies be of the party ] Some people like to read 

344 
every thing new. They have all brcught offerings to the temple, 
toutes les nouveaut^s. 
every one according to his means and devotion. After a day so 

345 24 

usefully spent, they went back, each one to his own home. 

Chez 316 — — 

Can any one be still so ignorant as not to know that it is from 
Poiirrait-il •••'319-- dds 

the earliest infancy we ought to form the mind, the heart and the taste? 
tendre 340 



188 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

EXERCISE LXXXIII. 

Do not to others what you wouUl not wish to be done to you. An 

347 
egotist loves nobody, not even nis ov?n children. Reason and 

318 pas 256 

faith equally demonstrate that we were created for another life. I 

350 
never heard any thing similar. The same man sows who often 

351 — 351 — 

reaps nothing. The happiness of the people constitutes that of th< 

faire 
prince; their true interests are connected with each other. The} 

tier a ....353 .-. 

praise one another too much. They both relate the same story, 

352 354 rapporter fait, 

although neither believes it. I should love them both, if they 

bien 
were more attentive to their studies. Every thing which is lofty, 

355 6\ev6, 

vast and profound, expands the imagination and dilates the heart, 
^tendre 

Do you believe all that she says 1 No ; I do not believe the half 

355 ee que 
nor the quarter of it. 
119. 



CHAPTER V. 

OF THE VERB. 

AGREEMENT OF THE VERB WITH THE SUBJECT. 

356. The verb agrees iu number and person with its 
subject or nominative : as, 

L' oiseau vole. The hird files. 

Vous ne volez pas. You do not fly. 

357. When a verb has two subjects, both singular, it 
is put in the plural : as, 

Mon pere et ma mere m' ai- My father and mother love 
ment. me. 

358. When a verb has two or more subjects, of dif- 
ferent persons, it is put in the plural, and agrees with tho 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 189 

first person, in preference to the other two, in which case 
the pronoun nous must be placed before the verb : as, 
Vous et moi nous irons. You and I will go. 

359. But, if the second person should be used with 
the third, the verb must be put in the second person plu- 
ral, and be preceded by vous: as, 

Vous et lui vous irez. You and he shall go. 

360. When the verb is preceded by the relative pro- 
noun qui., it must agree with the noun or pronoun to 
which qui relates : as, 

Est-ce moi qui 1' ai dit 1 Is it I who have said so ? 
Est-ce vous qui 1' avez vu 1 Is it yoif^ luho have seen him ? 

361. When two or more nouns, united by om, form 
the subject, the verb agrees with the last only : as, 

Pierre ou Paul le fera. Peter or Paul will do it. 

362. But, if the words united by ou are of different 
persons, tlie verb must be put in the plural : as, 

I Vous ou moi parlerons. You or I shall speak. 

Vous ou votre frere viendrez. You or your brother will come. 

363. When two subjects are joined together by the 
conjunction comme., de meme que., ainsi que., &c., the verb 
agrees with the first subject only: as, 

Celte bataille, comme tantd' au- That haftle, like so many 

tres, ne decida de rien. others, decided nothing. 

364. When V un et V autre is the subject, the veib is 
put in the plural : as, 

L' un et r autre sont bons. Both arc good. 

365. When ni V un ni V autre or two nouns joined 
together by ni repeated, are used as nominatives, the verb 
must be put in the plural, if both concur to the action, or 
receive it ; and the verb takes ne before it : as, 

Ni r un ni i' autre n' ont fait Neither the one nor the othfT 

leur devoir. have done their duty. 

Ni la douceur ni la force ne Neither mildness nor force can 

peuvent rien. effect any thing. 



190 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

366. But the verb is put in the singular, if only one 
performs the action, or receives it : as, 

Ni Smith ni Stone ne sera nom- Neither Smith nor Stone will 
me president. be chosen president. 

367. A substantive collective general, that is, a noun 
representing the whole of the persons or things mentioned, 
always governs the verb in the singular number : as, 

L' armee des confederes est The army of the confederates 
tres-nombreuse. is very numerous. 

368. But when the subject is a collective partitive, 
that is, a noun or an adverb representing a part of the 
whole, the verb agrees with the noun following it : as, 

Une troupe de barbares deso- A troop of barbarians laid 

lerent le pays. waste the country. 

Peu de gens negligent leurs Few people neglect their own 

int^rets. interests. 

REGIME!^ OF VERBS. 

369. The object, or regimen, of the verb is either 
direct or indirect. 

370. The direct regimen is that on which the action 
immediately falls, without the help of any preposition : as, 

Je donne une plume. I give a pen. 

371. The indirect regimen i-s that on which the action 
of the verb cannot fall without the aid of a preposition : as, 

Je parle a ma soeur. I speak to my sister. 

372. Some verbs admit of both regimens : as, 

Je donne une plume k ma socur. I give a pen to my sister. 

373. A verb after which qitelqv? un or quel que chose 
will form sense, is called active or transitive, and h-'s a 
direct regimen : as, 

Je donne quelque chose. I give something. 

374. A verb after which quelqu"^ un or quelque chose 
will not form sense, is called neuter or intransitive, and has 
an indirect regimen. For instance, we cannot say, parler 
quelqu^ un^ parler quelque chose, meaning, to speak to some 



GRAMMAR AND 0:ERC|§ES 

one, to speak of some thing; but must call in the aid of a 
preposition, thus, j^arler a quelqu? iin^ parhr de quelque 

chose. 

37-5. Passive verbs require for their regimen the pre- 
position de or par. ( 

^g76^ De is used Avh^i the passive verb expresses a 
fceTnTg, or an affection of the soul : as, 

Get enfant est aime de tout le This child is loved hy every 

monde. body. 

^77/ But par must be used when the action expressed 
hytTie verb relates to the body only : as, 

L' operation fut farite par un The operatioJi ivas performed 
chiiurgien celebre. by an eminent surgeon. 

378. Reflective verbs have for their regimen the pro- 
nouns me, /e, se, nous, vous : as, 

J 6 me flatte. I flatter myself. 

II se blesse. He hurts himself. 

379. Impersonal verbs generally have an indirect regi- 
men : as, 

II suffit de dire. // suflices to say. 

EXERCISE LXXXIV. 

The most free of all men, is he who can be free even in slavery. All 

356 mdme 

men are inclined to idleness, but the savages of hot countries are the 

•356tendre- 356 

laziest of all men. His uprightness and honesty make him courted 

357 rechercher 

by every body. Strength of body and of mind meet 

376 256 celle 357 se rencontrnr 

not always together. You, your friend, and I, have each a different 

358 
opinlm. In our childhood, you and I were pleased with playing 

•358 se plaire- & 
together. You and your friend will come with me. He that 

....359- ••. 
complains most of mankind is not always he that has most reason 
360 256 homnies fetre plus fondd 

to complain of them. Either persuasion or terror has drawn hira 
~ 361 entrainer 

I 



192 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

into the party of the rebels. It is he or I who have said it. Envy, 

re belle. 362 25G 

like ambition, is a blind passion. The king, as well as his ministry, 

363 

wishes for the public good. I called on your cousins, and J 

363 — bien. passer chez 

heard that both had been married a week. Both relate 

apprendre 364 • ^taient • depuis 364 rapportei 

the same story, though neither believes it to be true. Neither 

fait, 365 ne penser que subj.pr. 366 

of them is the author of that book. 



EXERCISE LXXXV. 

The crowd followed him as far as to his house. A gang of thieve* 

foule 367 -jusque- bande 

attacked me, and robbed me of every thing I had. Manj 

368 — •••tout ce--- que 

persons experience that human life is, every where, a state in J^hict 

368 
much is to be endured, and little to be enjoyed. He caresses them 
ona beaucoup de peines, de jouissances. 370 

because he loves them. You knew the importance which youi 

370 savoir 

parents attached to the success of that affair : why have you not 
371 r6usslte 

hastened to announce it to them 1 He has made a present to 
B' empresser de 371 372 372 

his sister. The French were dreaded by their neighbours, under , 
redouter 376 j 

Napoleon. His plan is approved by every bodv. Was not I 

376 ' 

England subdued by William the Conqueror, in the year 1066 ' 

conqu-^rir 377 
The city of Troy was taken, plundered, and destroyed by the con 

Troie saccager, 377 

federate Greeks, 1148 j^ears before the Christian era. We flatter 

ourselves that you will meet with a very kind reception. He was 

378 serez accueilli de la mani6re la plus honnfete. 

warming himself when I came in. It is of momen to your 

378 •entrer.- • • importer^ • • 370 

partners that you set off immediately. 
associ6 partix sur 1' beure. 



GRA_vlMAR AND EXERCISES. 19:< 



1 USE OF MOODS AND TENSES. 

OF THE INDICATIVE. 

380. The present expresses an existing state, or an 
action occurring at the time when we speak : as, 

Mon frere dort. My brother sleeps. 

Jefrappe. I strike. 

381. The present is sometimes used to express aa 
action past, in order to give a sort of animated picture of 
It. Thus, we find in Racine : 

J' ai vu votre malheureux fils I have seen your unhappy son 
traine par ses chevaux. II veut dragged along by his hor&es. He 
les rappeler, et sa voix les effraie. calls out to stop them, but his 

voice frightens them. 

382,i In English, for greater accuracy of description, 
the verb to he is frequently used with the participle pre- 
sent ; as, / am readings I was writings &.c. ; in place of, 
/ read., I wrote^ &c. Such expressions must be rendered 
as follows : as, Je li.s^ 1 am reading ; ;' ecrivais^ I was 
writing, &c. See notes to the verb parler., ante, pages 93^ 
94, 95, for the various meanings of the French tenses. 

(^3,, The imperfect expresses a present with respect 
to something past : as, 

Je pensais a vous quand vous I was thinking of you when 
entrates. you came in. 

384. It expresses also the recurrence of an action at a 
time which is past : as, 

Quand j' etais a la campagne, When I was in the country, I 
j' allais souvent a la ctiasse. often went to the chase. 

And the continuance of an action or state : as, 
II ne meprisait ni ne rebutait He neither despised nor dis- 
personne, et ne croyait etre roi couraged any one, and thought 
que pour faire du bien. he was a king only to do good. 

.,^385.^ The preterit definite is used to express an isolated 
actioii, performed at a time which is completely past : as, 
Je le vis hier. I saw him yesterday. 

Je regus une lettre la semaine I received a letter last week, 
derniere. 

I 13 



194 COLLOTS PROGRESSIVE FRENCTI ,j 

386. The preterit indefinite is used either for a lime ! 
past which is indeterminate, or for a past of which some- I 
thing still remains : as, ! 

J' ai voyage en Italie. I have travelled in Italy, 

y ai dcjtune ce matin a Phila- I have break fojited this mom- 
(lelphie. ing at Philadelphia. 

387. The pluperfect denotes one action which took 
place before another already past ; and also implies a re- 
currence of the same action : as, 

J' avais Jini quand vous en- / had finished when you came 

trates. in. 

L' hiver dernier, quand nous Last winter, when we had 

avians pris le the, nous allioas taken tea, we usually went to 

ordinairement au spectacle. the play. 

388. The preterit anterior expresses one isolated action, 
performed immediately before another which is also iso- 
lated, and both occurring at a time entirely past : as, 

Hier, quand nous eumes pris le Yesterday, when we had taken 
the, nous allames au spectacle. tea, we went to the play. 

389. The preterit anterior indefinite expresses an action 
performed at a time which is not yet past, and before 
another action : as. 

J' ai sorti ce matin d6s que I went out this morning as 
f ai eu dejeune. soon as I had breakfasted. 

390. The future absolute expresses an action which 
is to take place at a time determined or not : as, 

J' irai a la campagne. I will go to the country. 

J' irai demain a la campagne. / will go to the country to- 

morrow. 

391. The future anterior is used to express one 
action which ^v ill take place before another yet to come : 
as, ' 

y aurai fini quand vous arri- I shall have finished when you 
verez. come. 

392. The future is not used after si, when the firsi 
Terb implies no doubt : as, 

Je viendral, si vous venez. I wiUconie, if you come. 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 195 

393. But the future is used after si, when the first verb 
implies doubt or uncertainty : as, 

Je ne sals s' il viendra. I do not know whether he will 

come. 

OF THE CONDITIONAL. 

394. The conditional is the mood which affirms on 
conditions ; it has two tenses, the present and the fast. 

395. The present expresses that a thing would take 
place on certain conditions : as, 

Je le/erGt.s si j' avais le temps. / would do it if I had iht 
time. 

396. The past is used to indicate that an action would 
have taken place on certain conditions, at a time which is 
past: as, 

Je r aurais fait si j' avais eu I would have done it if I had 
le temps. had the time. 

397. The second (not the first) conditional past is 
used after sz, when the first verb implies no doubt : as, 

Je r eusse fait si j' eusse eu I would have done it if 1 had 
le temps. had the time. 

398. But when the first verb implies doubt, any tense 
of the conditional may be used after si: as, 

Je ne sais s' il serait venu. I do not know if he would 

have come. 

OF THE IMPERATIVE. 

399. The imperative is the mood which expresses 
command, entreaty or reproof: as, 

Soyez vertueux, et vous jouirez Be virtuous, and you will en- 
da vrai bonhe'ur. joy real happiness. 

OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 

400. The subjunctive mood is so called because it is 
dependent on a verb which precedes it; without which 
dependence it would not form sense. It implies doubt 



196 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

401. The present is used with the present or futur 
of the indicative : as, 

Je desire qu' il parte. T wish he vwuld set off. 

II faudra qu' il parte. It will he necesaary that ht 

should set off. 

402. The imperfect is used with all the past tenses of 
the indicative, and also with the tenses of the conditional : 
as, 

Je desirais qu il parfit. I wished he would set off. 

J' aurais desire qu' il part it. I would have wished he would 
setoff. 

403. The imperfect is also used with the present or 
future of the indicative, when followed by a conditional 
expression : as, 

Je doute qu il part it mainte- I doubt that he would set off 
nant, si on ne 1' y contraignait. now, if he was not compelled tn 

do so. 

404. The preterit is used with the present, or future 
of the indicative : as, 

Je doute qu^ il soil parti. I doubt that he has set off. 

Je douterai qu' il soil parti. I shall doubt that he has set off. 

405. The pluperfect is used with all the past tenses 
of the indicative, and also with the tenses of the condi- 
tional : as, 

Je doutais qu^ ilfut parti. I doubted that he had set off. 
Je douterais qu' ilfut parti. I should doubt that he had set off. 

406. The pluperfect is also used with the present or 
future of the indicative, when followed by a conditional 
expression : as, 

Je douterai qu' il fut parti, si I shall doubt that he would 
on ne V y eut contraint. have set off, if he Jiad not been 

compelled to do so. 

407. The verb must be put in the subjunctive, when- 
ever it is preceded by a superlative : as, 

C est le plus bel enfant que Je It is the handsomest child 1 

connaisse. know. 

C est le meilleur homme que He is the best man I know. 
€ connaisse. 



i 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 197 

408. The subjunctive is also used after le seul, le 
•premier^ le dernier : as, 

C est le seul qxie f ale. If is the nnh/ one I have. 

C est le premier qui se soit He is the first that has made 
tronipe. a mistake. 

409. We make use of the subjunctive after negative or 
interrogative prepositions implying doubt or uncertainty, 
and after v/ords which have a negative import : as, 

Je ne crois pas qu'' ilvienne. I do not think he will come. 

('rovcz-vous qa^ ilvienne ? Do you think he will come ? 

II n' y en a pas un qui puisse There is not one who can say sa> 
ledire. 

410. The verb is always put in the subjunctive, 
after the conjunctions quoique^ malgre que, and all those 
that mark a condition or a doubt, such as « moins que^ 
pourvu que^ &c. : as, 

Quoiqu' il soit juste. Although he is just. 
Pourvu qu' il soit ban. Provided he be good. 

411. The verb coming in the second part of a sentence 
may be either in the indicative or in the subjunctive, ac- 
cording to the idea of certainty or uncertainty which we 
wish to express. 

412. It is in the indicative when it expresses some- 
thing certain : as, 

Je cherche quelqu' un qui me I am looking for some one who 
rendra service. may render me a service. 

413. But it is put in the subjunctive, when it ex- 
presses something uncertain : as, 

Je cherche quelqu' un qui me / am looking for some one. 
reside service. who may render me a service. 

OF THE INFINITIVE. 

414. The infinitive expresses affirmation in an indefi- 
nite manner, without any reference to number or person: 
as, chanter, to sing ; devoir, to owe. 

415. The preposition /o, before the infinitive, when 
represented in French, is rendered by pour, a or de : as, 



198 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

II vint pour me parler. He. came to speak to me. 
II aime a jouer. He likes to play. 

II me (lit d' aller. He told me to go. 

416. The infinitive, when preceded by a preposition, 
is often rendered into English by tl.e participle present: 
as, 

Emp^chez-le de partir. Prevent him from setting off. 

II s' en alia sans dire un mot He went away without saying 
a word. 

417. It is also rendered by the participle present, 
when it is the regimen of another verb : as, 

Je r ai entendu chanter. I have heard him singing. 

418. The infinitive expresses neither present, past, 
nor future, except when it is preceded by other verbs • 
as, 

Je crois le voir. I think I see him. 

Je crus r entendre. I thought I heard him. 

Je voudrais le savoir. Iwiah I knew it. 

EXERCISE LXXXVI. 

He is in his chamber, where he is relaxing his mind from the fa- 

. 382 delasser 
tigue of business, by some instructive and agreeable reading. Adras- 

lecture. 
tus thought that he saw and heard Telemachus in a valley at 

385 — •.417-. 

the foot of a hill, where there was a crowd of combatants ; he runs, 

foule 381 

he flies, he longs to sate himself with blood. What are 

vouloir •• -se rassasier- •• de 
you doing here 1 I am translating from English into French. 
• •382 382 en 

I was answering your letter when you arrived. When I was 
382 ft 385, 384 

at Paris, I went every morning to take a walk in the Champs Ely 

384 
sees. As soon as we perceived the danger, we warned him of it. 

3S5 
I have travelled through almost all Europe, and I have visited the 

386 dans 

most celebrated places in Asia and Africa- 
lieu de Afrique 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 199 

EXERCISE LXXXVir. 

I had finished the task that you had imposed upon me, when you 

387 — 

came in. When I was in the country, as soon as I had break- 

•••385-.. a 387- 

fasted, I used to go a-hunting. As soon as Casar 

avals coutume 

had crossed the Rubicon, he had no Iont,fer to deliberate; he 

•SSSpasssr- 385 plus 

was ohliiTed to conquer or to die. This morning, after he had 

•335 devoir- vaincre 

breakfasted, I spoke to him. I shall go shortly into the coun- 

••389 .-SyO-- bient6l k 

try, where I intend to collect plants, in order to perfect myself 

se proposer de • •herboriser- • 
in the knowledge of botany. I shall have done before you 

botanique. 391 ••• ne 

set out. I will reward you, if you study your lesson well. You 
••410-^ 392 

do not know whether you will be rewarded. 
••393-. 

EXERCISE LXXXVIIL 

I would settle your business before long, if it depended only 

-•395faire-- peu, uniqueintjnt 

upon me. I should have been mortified, if he had lost his 

de 396 ...397--- 

lawsuit. Do you know whether he would do it? Be not 

proc6s. ■ . . 398 ■ • ■ 399 

fond of praise ; but seek virtue, which procures it. 

passionn6 pour louany;e ; 390 

Let us not be deceived by the first appearance of things ; but 
•••399 se laisser prendre • • i 

iet us take time to fix our judgment. I wish you may succee-d 
•ae donnor- de 401 

in your undertaking. He will require you to do it. I could not 

"•.•401 ••• 
persuade myself that he was so vain as to aspire to that 
402 assez — pour 

place. Though every body says so, I do not believe that he 

410 
is gone to Rome. I could wish that the love which we ought to 

• 409- • 
have for one another, were the principle of all our actions, as it 
402 



200 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

is the basis of all virtues. I doubt whether his piece would have 
256 que 403 

the approbation of connoisseurs, unless he made the alterations you 

suffrage 
•'udofed necessary. 



EXERCISE LXXXIX. 

am very sorry that this misfortune has happpened to you. It 

-■..167, 404-. .. 

would be unjust that a vile murderer should not be punished. I 
assassin 405 

could have wished that you had applied yourselves more to your 

405 davanta?* 

studies. I doubt whether the Romans would ever have triumphed 

que 406 

over the Gauls, if the different chiefs of this warlike people had not 

been disunited. His cousin is the handsomest young lady that 

on 

can be seen. The movements of the planets are the most regu- 
407 .-voir-. 

lar that we know. He is the only man that is capable of filling 

407 ' 409 ...416 •• 

that charge. It is one of the last epistles which Saint Paul 

has written. Do you believe he is vain enough to aspire to that 

••••403 409 

high degree of honour ? I do not think she is handsome enough 

409 
to please you. There are few kings who know how to seek true 

409 
glory. 

EXERCISE XC. 

I will not pardon you, unless you promise me to behave 

ne 410 de se conrluire 

better in future. Although she is rich, I would not marry her. 

k 410 

I will give you leave to dance, provided you give me your word 
de 410 parole 

of honour not to overheat yourself. I want a decanter that 

de ^chauffer carafe 

\^ ill contain three pints of wine. I shall marry a lady that pleases 
.••■ 411 411 

me. You cannot prevent ray flocks from grazing in this place. I 

. • 416 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 201 

composed that song while walking, and I spent two hours in 
3S6 422 a 

correcting it. We saw her dead, and we thought we saw an 

416 385 ..•418-. 

angel asleep. This woman is always occupied in doing good 

.■ii416.. 

works : you see her constantly consoling the unhappy, relieving 
tnuvre : sans cesse 417 assister 

the poor, reconciling enemies, and promoting the happiness of every 
417 •••faire--- 

one around her. 



CHAPTER Vr. 



OF THE PARTICIPLE. 



419. There are two participles, the present and the 
past. 

420. The participle present is indeclinable, and always 
expresses an action : as, 

J' ai vu ceite femme obllgeant I saw that woman obliging 

ses amis. her friends. 

y ai vu ces beautes charmant I saw those beauties charming 

tout le monde. every one. 

421. But care must be taken not to confound it with 
adjectives spelled similarly, and also derived from verbs, 
which express only a state or a quality, and agree in 
gender and number with their substantives : as, 

Cette femme est obligeante. That woman is obliging. 

Ces beautes sont charmantes. Those beauties are charming.. 

422. The only preposition after which the French use 
the participle present is en : as. 

On apprend en instruisant les We learn by teaching others. 
autres. 

423. The participle past never agrees with its object 
direct, when that object is placed after it: as, 

Ellc a obtenu des graces. She has obtain id some favours. 



:03 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 



424. But it does agree with its object direct, when that 
object is placed before it: as, 

Quelles sont les graces qu' elle What are the favours which she 
a obtenues ? has obtained ? 

425. The participle past of a neuter verb always? re- 
mains invariable : as, 

lis nous ont nid. They have injured us. 

La joie a paru dans leurs Joy has appeared in their eyeg. 
yeux. 

428. The participle past is invariable, when it relates 
to the pronoun en: as, 

Tl a gagne autant de batailles He has won as many batiks as 
qu' il en a livre. he has fought. 

427 The participle past of an impersonal verb is 
always invariable : as. 

La chaleur qu' il ai fait. The heat which we have had. 
La disette qu' il y a eu. The dearth which we have had. 

428. When accompanied by the verb etre.) expressed 
or understood, the participle past must be considered as 
an adjective, since it only indicates the state of the sub- 
ject, with which it agrees in gender and number: as, 

Elle est blessee. She is wounded. 

lis sout ble-^scs. They are wounded. 

Que de \ilies detruiies / How many towns destroyed. 

429. The participle past of the verbs which are natu- 
rally pronominal, agrees with its object, which is always 
the second pronoun : as, 

lis se sont repentis. They have repented. 
Elle s' est enfuie. She has fled. 

430. T!ie participle past of neuter verbs, which are 
accidentally made pronominal, is always invariable ; as, 

Elles se sont 7i!ii. They have injured each other. 

lis se sont parle. They have spoken to each other. 

431. The participle past of active verbs which are 
accidentally pronominal, follows the general rule. 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 903 



EXERCISE XCI. 

Does not every body respect those magistrates, who, forgetting tlieir 

4-20 
own interests, observing the laws, protecting virtue, and restraining 

r^primer 
vice, have in view only the welfare of their country 1 Is not this a 

bonheur 
convincing proof of the surprising effects of the loadstone? It is not 

4'21 aiiiianf? 

in giving ourselves up to our passions that we live happy ; it is in go- 
422 
verning them. I have attentively read the papers which you have 

423 
sent me, about the affair which 1 had proposed to you, and I have 
424 touchant 424 

found that if I had undertaken it, I should have met with obstacles 

423 424 423 — 

which I had not foreseen. Our enemies have injured us more by their 

424 425 

moderation than bytheir valour. Alexander has destroyed more cities 

423 
than he has founded. The abundant rains which have fallen this 

426 427 

summer have spoiled the harvest. The wicked are always tormented 

423 428 

by the remorse of their own conscience. His sister has laughed at 

429 
me. How many kings have succeeded one another on the throne of 

430 
France? 



CHAPTER VII. 

OF THE ADVERB. 

1432.^ The negative, in French, consists of the words 
ne pas^ or ne point, which are often divided. Pomt is 
stronger than pas : as, 

Je ne joue pas. I do not play. 

Je ne joue point 7 do not play at all. 

433. When ne is accompanied by a word expressing 



204 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

want or absence, such as jamais^ plus^ aucun^ &c. ; pas or 
point is omitted : as, 

Je ne joue jamais. I never play. 

Je ne joue plus. ^ P^'^U ^^o more. 

Je ne joue a aucun jeu. 7 do nut play at any game. 



^34^ For the sake of elegance, pas^ or point may also 
be omitted after the verbs cesser., user, pouvoir and savoir : 
as, 

II ne cesse de parler. He does not leave off speaking. 

II n ose vous parler. He dares not speak to you. 

435. The particle ne is used after the verbs craindre., 
trembler^ oppreliender., avoir peur^ although it does not 
affect the meaning : as, 

Je crains qu' il ne vienne. I am afraid he will come. 

Je tremble que cela n' arrive. I tremble lest that will happen. 

436. JVe is also used after the conjunctions a inoins 
que., de peur que., and de crainle que : as, 

A moins que vous ne lui par- Unless you speak to him. 
liez. 

De peur qu' il ne le sache. Lest he should know it. 

437. Plus Siiid davantage must not be used indiffer- 
ently. 

Plus is followed by de., or que: as, 

II a plus de brillant que de so- He has more brilliancy than 
lide. solidity. 

(438. But davantage is used alone, and at the end of 
sentences : as, 

La science est estimable, mais Learning is estimable, but 
la vertu 1' est davantage. virtue is still more so. 

^ EXERCISE XCII. 

Never do to others what you would not like them to do unto you. 

433 autrui 432 -qu' on fit- — 

Your letter is very badly written : I am afraid you have written it 

435 
hastily. I can not see him without trembling. Use none of 
aiah^te. 434 416 Employer 433 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 205 

these stratagems. He does not know what he says. He is better, 

434 
but we are afraid lest the fever should return upon him. For fear he 

435 — — •••436-.. 

should do it. Nobody behaves with more prudence than he. He is 

433 437 

rich, but his brother is more so. There is no more of it. 

438 438 . n 

OF THE PREPOSITION" 

(439^ En is used in a vague sense, and is seldom fol- 
lowed by the article : as, 

II demeure en France. He lives in France. 
CS4Q,) Dans is used in a determinate sense : as, 
T! demeure dans la province de He lives in the province of 
Middlesex. Middlesex. 

Mettez cela dans le tiroir. Put this in the drawer. A^ ! / - 

( 3^41^ Avant denotes priority of time and order : as, 

II est arrive avant moi. He has arrived before me, ^'* 

^442.' Devant is used for en presence de: as, J^ *^^' 
II a paru devant le juge. He has appeared before the Judge. /^^'^ 

CHAPTER IX. 

OF THE CONJUNCTION que. 

443. Que serves to complete a comparison : as, 

L' Asie est plus grande que Asia is larger than Europe. 
V Europe. 

444. Que^ after ne, expresses restriction : as. 
On ne parle que de cela. Thei/ talk only of that. 

445. Que is used to save the repetition of comme, sz, 
puisque^ &c. : as, 

Comme il ne vient pas, et qu" il As he does not come, and [as] 

ne fait rien dire. he sends no word. 

Puisqu' il est votre ami, et que Since he is your friend, and 

vous lui etes redevable. [since] you are beholden to him. 



206 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENJH 

PROMISCUOUS EXERCISES.* 

THE DEATH OF ADRASTUS. 

EXERCISE XCIir. 

Telcmachus heard at a distance the shouts of the victors, and saw 

cri 
the disorder of his people flying before Adrastus; Uke a herd of 

• -des siens •• troupe 

timorous deer crossing the spacious plains, the woods, the mountainaSij 
cainpagne, ' 

and even the most rapid rivers, when they are pursued by the huntera 

He sighs deeply ; indignation is manifest in his eyes ; he quits the 

g^mir---' 256 ••paraitre-- 

place where he had long fought with so much danger and glory ; ha 
runs to sustain his party: he advances all covered with the blood of a 
multitude of enemies whom he had extended in the dust ; and, on hia 

way, he gives a shout which is heard by both armies, 
pousser se faire entendre si. 



* The Exercises in this Grammar, hitherto, have been in exem- 
plification uf particular Rules. These " Promiscuous Exercises'' are 
intended to furnish good practice under all the Rules. They comprise 
three pieces, each divided into Exercises of convenient length. Th^ 
first — "The Death of Adrastus" — is translated from the French 
it preserves, as far as may be, the French idiom, and is accompanied* 
as in previous Exercises, by versions of the more difficult phrases 
and words, and references to appropriate Rules. The second — " Th» 
Questions left by Minos" — also is translated from the French, anti 
retains the idiomatic peculiarities of that language ; but it is without 
aids to the pupil, who is now for the fiirst time left to walk, alone. The 
third — -'The Transmigrations of Indur" — is originally English, andi 
has been selected for the excellence of its style, for the pleasing variety} 
of subjects which it introduces, and for the large number of ditTerentj 
words which its calls into use. In this piece the pupil takes his last 
step in the art of writing French : for he is required, unaided, to render 
his own languasje into such French as shall not be merely English 
gallicized, but French in idiom and general style — in short, such 
French as a well educated Frenchman would use to express the saaM^ 
ideas. 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISP^S 207 

Minerva had infused something terrible into his voice, which 

mettre je ne sais quoi dont 

made the neighbouring mountain ring. Tlie voice even of Mars 

— retentir. 

was never louder in Thrace, when he called up the infernal furies 

war and death. The shout of Telemachus animates his peopie 
256 
with new courage, and chills the enemy with fear. Even Adrastus 

feels himself confused. A thousand fatal presages thrill him 

troubler. — le font fr^mir 

with horror; and he is actuated rather by despair than a sedate 

tranquille 

valour. Thrice his trembling knees bent under him, and thrice ha 

drew back without knowing what he did. A swooning pale- 

416 de d^faillance 

ness and a cold sweat spread over all his limbs; his hoarse and 

faltering voice could sound no word distinct ; his eyes, sparkling with 

hesitant 

a gloomy fire, seemed to be ready to start out of his head ; he looked 

like Orestes tortured by the Furies ; all his motions were convulsive. 

agiter 
Now he begins to believe that there are Gods ; he fancies that he sees 
Alors 

them incensed against him, and that he hears a hollow voice arising 
from the depths of hell, and calling him to everlasting torment. Every 

thing makes him sensible of a heavenly and invisible hand stretched 

•• -lui faire sentir- •• 
over his head, and ready to fall heavy upon him. Hope was extin- 

s' app^santir 256 

guished in his heart ; and his courage vanished like the daylight, 
when the sun sinks into the bosom of the waves, and the earth is 
ec sloped in the shades of night. 

EXERCISE XCIV. 

Adrastus, whose tyranny would already have been too long, if the 

earth had not needed such a scourge, the impious Adrastus, had filled 

up the measure of his iniquity, and his hour was come. He madly 

force n6 
mns to meet his inevitable fate ; horror, stinging remorse, constema- 

856 



208 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

tion, fury, rage, despair, attended his steps. He scarcely sees Te- 

marcher avec lui. 
lemachus ; but he fancies he sees Avernus yawn, and whirlwinds of 

256 
flames issuing from dreary Phlegethon, ready to swallow him up. 
He cries out, and his mouth remains open, without being able to 

utter a word. So a man asleep in a frightful dream opens his lips, 

286 
and strives to speak ; but his speech continually fails him, and he seeks 
it in vain. Adraslus, with a trembling, hasty hand, hurls his javelin 
at Telemachus. The latter is undaunted, as the friend of the Gods, 
and covers himself with his shield. Victory already seems to over- 
shadow him with her wings, and suspend a crown over his head. A 

calm and composed courage glittered in his eyes, and one would 
doux paisible 

have taken him for Minerva herself, so wise and discreet does he 

mesur^ 
appear in the greatest dangers. The javelin of Adrastus is repelled 
by the shield. Upon which the Daunian instantly draws his sword, 
to deprive the son of Ulysses of the advantage of throwing his jave- 
lin in his turn. Telemachus, seeing Adrastus with his sword in 

— la a 

his hand, immediately draws his also, and drops his useless javelin. 
286 

EXERCISE XCV. 

When the other combatants on each side saw them thus closely 
engaged, they laid down their arms to gaze upon them, and from this 
single combat expected the issue of the war. Their swords, bright 
as the flashes whence the thunderbolts are hurled, frequently cross 

each other, and deal their fruitless blows upon their polished and 

porter des 
resounding armour. The two combatants stretch themselves out, 
shrink up, stoop down, rise again in an instant, and at length 

grapple with each other. The ivy growing at the foot of an elm, 

se saisir 

does not more closely embrace its hard and knotty trunk with its 
entwining arms, even to its highest branches, than the two com- 
batants grasp each other. Adrastus had lost nothing of his strength ; 
but that of Telemachus was not yet mature. Adrastus makes sever.il 
efforts to stagger, and throw his antagonist by surprise. At last he 
endeavours to seize \l\e sword of the voung Greek, but in vain : for 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 20D 



the moment he attempts it, Teleraachus lifts him from the ground, 
and throws him on the sand. In this dreadful moment, the wretch 

who had so long despised the gods, betrays an unmanly fear of death; 

montre lache 

he is ashamed to ask his life, and yet cannot help manifesting his 
desire to live. He endeavours to move the compassion of Telcma- 
chus. Son of Ulysses, said he, I at length acknowledge the 
i^hteous gods : they punish me as I have deserved. It is misfortune 
tnly that opens our eyes to truth : I now see it, and it condemns me ; 
)ut let an unhappy prince bring your father, now distant from his 
country, to your remembrance, and touch your breast with cora- 



jassion 



Telemachus, who kept the tyrant under him with his knee, and 

had already raised his sword to plunge it into his throat, immediately 
replied : I sought nothing but victory, and the peace of the nations I 

came to assist ; I do not delight in bloodshed. Live, then, 

aimer d. r^pandre le sang. 
Adrastus, but live to repair your faults; restore every thing which 

you have usurped ; re-establish peace and justice on the coast of 

256 
Great Hesperia, which you have stained by numberless massacres 
and treacheries ; live, and become another man. Learn by your 
fall that the gods are righteous ; that the wicked are miserable ; that 

they deceive themselves in seeking for happiness in violence, 

— 256 

inhumanity and falsehood ; and, in short, that nothing is so delightful 

237 
and happy as a plain and steady virtue. Give us, as hostages, your 
ni 
son Metrodorus, with twelve of the principal persons of your nation 

EXERCISE XCVL 

This said, Telemachus suffers Adrastus to rise, and holds out 
A ces paroles, 

his hand to him, without suspecting his treachery : but the tyrant im- 
mediately darts another javelin at him, which was very short, and 
which he had kept concealed. It was so sharp, and so artfully 
thrown, that it would have pierced Telemachus's armour, if it had 
I not been divine. Adrastus at the same time runs behind a tree, to 

i I* 14 

I 



210 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 



avoid the pursuit of the young Greek. Telemachus then cries out : 

Bear witness, Daunians, the victory is ours ! The impious wretch 
Vous le voyez, — 

saves himself only by treachery. He that fears not the gods, is 
afraid of death. On the contrary, he that fears the gods, fears nothing 
but them. In speaking these words, he advances towards the 
Daunians, and makes a sign to his peojile, who were on the other 
side of the tree, to cut off the retreat, of Adrastus. The tyrant, 

perceiving his situation, pretends as if he would go back again, 

voir fait seinbl ant da retourner sur ses pas 

and attempts to break through the Cretans who obstruct his passage. 
But Telemachus, swift as the thunderbolt hurled by the hand of the 
father of the gods from the top of Olympus on the heads of the guilty, 

flies instantly on his enemy : he seizes him with his victorious hand, 

de un 
he throws him on the earth, ns the cruel north wind beats down the 

tender harvests which gild the fields. He hears him no mote, 

^couter 
though the impious wretch makes a second attempt to abuse the 

goodness of his heart. He plunges his sword in his breast, and 

hurls him headlong into the flames of dreary Tartarus, a punishment 

• •••le pr<5cii)iter 250 2S6 

worthy of his crimes. — Fk^^elox. 



I 



THE QUESTIONS LEFT BY MINOS. 

EXERCISE XCVir. 

The chief of the ciders opened the book of the laws of Minos; it was 
ft large volume, which was usually locked up in a golden box, with 
perfumes. All the old men kissed it with respect; for they said, that 
nest to the gods, from whom good laws proceed, nothing ought to be 
saciod to men <is laws designed to render then good, wise, and happy. 
Those who are entrusted with the execution of the laws for the go- 
vernment of the people, ought themselves always to be governed by 
th«; laws : it is the law, and not the man. which ought to reign. Such 
was the discouise of these sages. He who presided over them proposed 
three questions, which were to be resolved by the laws of Minos. 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. Ull 



The First Question was — Who is the most free of all men 1 Some 
answered that it was a king who has an absolute dominion over his 
subjects, and was victorious over all his enemies. Others maintained 
that it was a rich man, who could gratify nil his desires. Others said, 
that it was a man who was not married, and was travelling during his 
whole life through divers countries, without ever being subject to 
the laws of any nation. Others imagined, that it was a barbarian, 
who, subsisting by hunting in the midst of the woods, was indepen- 
dent of all government, and free from every want. Others believed, 
that it was a man lately made free, because, by passing from the 
rigours of slavery, he enjoyed, more than any body else, the sweets of 
liberty. And lastly, others bethought themselves to say that it was a 
dying man, because death freed him from every thing, and that all 
mankind united had no longer any power over him. 

EXERCISE XCVIII. 

When my turn came, I was at no loss for an answer, because I had 
not forgotten what Mentor had often told me. <' The most free of all 
men," said I, "is he who can be free in slavery itself. In what coun- 
try or condition soever a man may be, he is perfectly free, provided he 
fears the gods, and fears nothing but them. In a word, the truly free 
man is he who, void of all fears and all desires, is subject only to the 
gods and reason." The elders looked on each other with a smile, and 
were surprised to see that iny answer was precisely that of Minos. 

They then proposed the Second Question, in these words : — Who 
is the most unhappy of all men 1 Every one said vi-hat octf^rred to 
his mind. One said. It is a man who has neither money, nor health, 
nor honour. Another said, It is one who has no friend. Others 
maintained, that it was a man who has ungrateful and degenerate 
children. There came a sage of the isle of Lesbos, who said: The 
most unhappy of all men, is he who thinks himself so; for unhappi- 
ness arises less from what we suffer, than from the impatience v\ith 
which we aggravate our misery. At these words, the whole assembly 
shouted ; they applauded the sage Lesbian, believing that he would 
carry the prize as to this question. But they asked my opinion, and 
I answered — according to Mentor's maxims — " The most unhappy of 
all men, is a king who expects to be happy by rendering other men 



212 COLLOrS PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

miserable: his blindness doubles his unhappiness; for, not knowing 
his misfortune, he cannot cure himself of it ; he is afraid even to know 
it : truth cannot pierce through the crowd of flatterers, to arrive at him. 
He is the slave of his passions, he knows not his duty ; he has neve, 
tasted the pleasure of doing good, nor felt the charms of virtue; he ii> 
wretched, and deserves to be so ; his wretchedness increases daily ; he 
runs to his destruction, and the gods are preparing eternal punishment 
for him." The whole assembly owned that I had outdone the Les- 
bian sage, and the elders declared that I had hit upon the true sense 
of Minos. 

EXERCISE XCIX. 

It was asked, "Which of the two is preferable: a king victorious and in 
vincible in war ; or a king without experience in war, but qualiiie<J to 
govern his people wisely in peace 1 The majority answered, that 
a king who is invincible in war was to be preferred. What profits it, 
said they, to have a king who knows to govern well in peace, if he 
knows not to defend his country in time of warl His enemies 
will vanquish him, and reduce his people to slavery. Others, on the 
contrary, maintained, that a pacific king would be better, because he 
would fear war, and take care to avoid it Others said, that a victo- 
rious king would labour to advance his subjects' glory as well as his 
own, and would render them masters of other nations ; whereas, a pa- 
cific king would keep theni in shameful cowardice, My opinion was 
asked, and I answered thus : 

" A king who is able to govern only in peace, or only in war, and 
ts not capable of conducting his people in both these circumstances, is 
out half a king. But, if you compare a king who understands nothing 
but war, to a wise king, who, without understanding war himself, is 
capable of maintaining it on occasion by his generals, I think him pre 
ferable to the other. A king entirely turned to war, would be so often 
making it, in order to extend his dominions and glory, that he would 
ruin his people : what avails it to them that their prince subdues other 
nations, if they themselves are miserable under his reign ? Besides, 
long wars always draw after them many disorders; the victors them- 
selves grow licentious in those times of confusion. Consider how 
dear it has cost Greece to triumph over Troy : she was deprived of 
her kings for more than ten years. Whilst every thing is inflamed hf 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 213 

war, laws, agriculture, and the arts languish. Even the hest princes, 
while they are engaged in it, are constrained to commit the greatest 
of evils, which is, to wink at licentiousness, and to employ wicked men 
How many profligate wretches are there whom one would punish in 
time of peace, but whose crimes are even rewarded during the disor- 
ders of war! Never had any nation a conquering monarch, without 
having suffered much from his ambition. A conqueror, intoxicated 
with his glory, ruins his victorious nation almost as much as the na- 
tions he has conquered. A king who has not the qualifications requi- 
site for peace, cannot make his subjects taste the fruits of a war hap- 
pily ended. He resembles a man who not only can defend his own 
field, but is able to usurp his neighbour's, although he neither can 
plough nor sow it in order to reap the harvest. Such a man seems 
born to destroy, to ravage, to overturn the world, and not to render a 
nation happy by the wisdom of his government. 

EXERCISE C. 
"Let us now advert to the pacific king. He is not, indeed, quali- 
fied to make great conquests; that is, he is not born to trouble the re- 
pose of his people, by seeking to vanquish other nations whom justice 
has not subjected to him ; but he is really adapted to govern in peace. 
He has all the qualifications which are necessary to secure his sub- 
jects against their enemies : for he is just, moderate, and easy with 
regard to his neighbours ; he never undertakes any thing against tliem 
which may disturb the public peace, and he is faithful to his alliances. 
His allies love him, do not fear him, and have an entire confidence in 
him. If they have a restless, haughty and ambitious neighbour, all 
the adjacent princes who fear the turbulent, and have no jealousy of 
the peaceful king, join themselves to the latter, in order to hinder him 
from being oppressed. His probity, his sincerity, his moderation, 
make him the arbiter of all the neighbouring nations. Whilst the 
enterprising monarch is hated by all the rest, and continually in dan- 
ger of their confederacies, the peaceful prince has the glory to be, as it 
were, the father and guardian of the others. These are the advan- 
tages which he has abroad ; those he enjoys at home are still more 
solid. Since he is qualified to govern in peace, I suppose that he 
governs by the wisest laws. He suppresses pomp, luxury, and all 
the arts which serve only to cherish vice ; he makes those arts flourish 



814 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 



which are subservient to the real wants of life; above all, he causes 
his subjects to apply thennselves to agriculture, and he thereby pro- 
cures them plenty of all nece.csaries. 1'hese laborious people, simple 
in their manners, accustomed to live on a little, and easily getting their 
livelihood by the culture of their lands, increase daily. Let a neigh- 
bouring conqueror attack them ; he will find them, perhaps, not very 
expert in forming camps, in ranging themselves in order of battle, or 
in erecting machines to besiege a city ; but he will find them invinci- 
ble by their numbers, by their courage, by their patience of fatigues, 
by their habit of bearing poverty, by their vigour in battle, and by a 
virtue which ill success itself cannot abate. Besides, if this king has 
not sufficient experience to command his armies himself, he will cause 
them to be commanded by men who are capable of it, and will know 
how to make use of them, without losing his authority. In the mean 
while, he will obtain assistance from his allies; his subjects will rather 
die than submit to the yoke of a violent and unjust prince ; and even 
the gods themselves will fight for him. Behold what resources he svill 
have amidst the greatest dangers I I conclude, therefore, that a peace- 
ful king, who is ignorant of war, is a very imperfect king, since h€ 
knows not to discharge one of his greatest duties, which consists in 
subduing his enemies ; but I add, however, that he is infinitely supe- 
rior to a conqueror, who wants the qualities necessary in peace, and 
IS fit only for war." 

All the elders declared that I had spoken like Minos. — Fexelgx 



THE TRANSMIGRATIONS OF INDUR. 

EXERCISE CI. 
At the time when fairies and genii possessed the powers which they 
have now lost, there lived in the country of the Brahmins a man 
mmed Indur, who was distinguished, not only for that gentleness ol 
disposition and humanity towards all living creatures, which are so 
much cultivated among those people, but for an insatiable curiosi'j 
respecting the nature and way of life of all animals. In pursuit of 
knowledge of this kind he would frequently spend the night among 
onely rocks, or in the midst of thick forests ; and there, under shelter 
of a hanging cliff, or mounted upon a high tree, he would watch the 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 215 

motions ami actions of all the animals that seek their prey in the 
night; and remaining in the same spot till the break of day. he 
would observe these tribes of creatures retiring to tlieir dens, and all 
others coming forth to enjoy the beams of tl)e rising sun. On these 
occasions, if he saw any opportunity of exercising his benevolence 
towards animals in distress, he never failed to make use of it; and 
many limes rescued the small birds from the pitiless hawk, and the 
lamb or kid from the gripe of the wolf and lytix. One day, as he 
was sitting an a tree in the forest, a little frolicksome moukoy, in 
taking a long leap from one bough to another, chanced to miss his 
hold, and fell from a great height to the ground. As he lay there, 
unable to move, Indur espied a large veuomous sorjient advancing to 
make the poor defenceless creature his prey. He immediately de- 
scended from his post, and taking the fatle monkey in his arms, ran 
with it to the tree, and gently placed it upon a bough. In the mean 
time, the enraged serpent, pursoing him, overtook him before he 
could mount the tree, and bit hnn in the leg. Presently the liinU 
began to swell, and the effects of the venom became visible over 
Indur's whole frame. He grew faint, sick, and pale; anYl, sinking 
on the ground, was sensible that hi-s last moments were fast a{)proach- 
ing. As thus he lay, he was surpri.-cd to hear a human voice from 
the tree; and looking up, he beheld, ^n the bough where he had 
placed the monkey, a beautiful woman, who thus addressed hi.-n: — 
"Indur, I am truly grieved ihat thy kindness to me should have been 
the cause of thy destrurtion. Know, that in the form of the poor 
monkey, it was the potent fairy Perezinda to whom thou gavest 
succour. Obliged to pass a certain number of days every year under 
the shape of an animal, I had chosen this form; and, though not 
mortal, I should have suffered extreme agonie* from the bite of the 
serpent, hadst thou not so humanely assisted tne. It is not in my 
power to prevent the fatal effect of the poison ; but I am able to graul 
thee any wish ihou shalt form respecting the future state of existence 
to «hich thou art now hastening. Speak, then, before it be too late, 
and let me show my gratitude." 

" Great Perezinda !" replied Indur, " since j'ou deign so boun- 
ceously to return my service, this is the request that I make: In all 
my transmigrations may I retain a rational soul, with the memory 
ftf the adventures I have gone through; and when death aHs xa» 



216 CC?.LOT*S PROGKESSIVE FRENCH 



free from one body, may I instantly animate another in the prime 
of its powers and faculties, without passing through the helpless state 
of infancy." " It is granted," answered the fairy ; and immediately 
breaking a small branch from the tree, and breathing on it, she threw 
it down to Indur, and bade him hold it fast in his hand. He did so, 
and presently expired. 

EXERCISE CII. 
liistantly, he found himself in a green valley, by the side of a clear 
stream, grazing amid a herd of antelopes. He admired his elegant 
shape, sleek, spotted skin, and polished spiral horns ; and drank with 
delight of the cool rivulet, cropped the juicy herb, and sported with 
his companions. Soon an alarm was given of the approach of an 
enemy ; and they all set off with the swiftness of the wind to the 
neighbouring immense plains, where they were soon out of the reach 
of injury. Indur was highly delighted with the ease and rapidity 
of his motions; and snuffing the keen air of the desert, oounded 
away, scarcely deigning to touch the ground with his feet. This 
way of life went on very pleasantly for some time, till at length the 
herd was one morning alarmed with noises of trumpets, drums, and 
loud shouts, on every side. They started and ran first to the right, 
then to the left, but were continually driven back by the surrounding 
crowd, which now appeared to be a whole army of hunters, with the 
Ring of the country and all his nobles, assembled on a solemn chase, 
after the manner of the eastern people. And now the circle began 
to close, and numbers of aifrighted animals, of various kinds, thronged 
together in the centre, keeping as far as possible from the dingers 
that approached them from all quarters. 'J'he huntsmen were now 
come near enough to reach their game with their arrows ; and the 
prince and his lords shot at them as they passed and repassed, killing 
and wounding great numbers. Indur and his surviving companions, 
seeing no other means of escape, resolved. to make a bold push to- 
wards that part of the ring which was the most weakly guarded \ and 
though many perished in the attempt, yet a few, leaping over the 
heads of the people, got clear away ; and Indur was among the num- 
ber. But whilst he was scouring over the plain, rejoicing m his good 
fortune and conduct, an enemy, swifter than himself, overtook him. 
This was a falcon, w^hich, let loose by one of the huntsmen, dashed 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISf:S. 317 

like lightning after the fugitives; and alighting upon the head of In- 
dur, began to tear his eyes with his beak, and flap his wings over his 
face. Indur, terrified and blinded, knew not which way he went; 
and, instead of proceeding straight forwards, turned round, and came 
again tovv^ards the hunters. One of these, riding full speed, with a 
javelin in his hand, came up to him, and ran the weapon in his side. 
He fell down, and by repeated wounds was soon despatched. 

EXERCISE Clir. 

When the struggle of death was over, Indur was equally surprised 
and pleased on finding himself soaring high in the air, as one of 
a flight of wild geese, in their annual migration to breed in the arctic 
regions. With vast delight he sprang forward, on easy wing, through 
the immense fields of air, and surveyed beneath him extensive tracts 
of earth, perpetually varying with plains, mountains, rivers, lakes, and 
woods. At the approach of night the flock lighted on the ground, 
and fed on the green corn or grass; and at daybreak they were again 
on wing, arranged in a regular wedge-like body, with an experienced 
leader at their head. Thus for many days they continued their jour- 
ney, passing over countries inhabited by various nations, till at length 
they arrived in the remotest part of Lapland, and settled in a wide 
marshy lake, filled with numerous reedy islands, and surrounded on 
all sides with dark forests of pine and birch. Here, in perfect security 
from man and hurtful animals, they followed the great business of 
breeding and providing for their young, living plentifully upon the 
insects and aquatic reptiles that abounded in this sheltered spot. 
Indur with great pleasure exercised his various powers, of swimming, 
diving, and flying; sailing round the islands, penetrating into every 
creek and bay, and visiting the deepest recesses of the woods. He 
surveyed with astonishment the sun, instead of rising and setting, 
making a complete circle in the heavens, and cheering the earth with 
a perpetual day. Here he met with innumerable tribes of kindred 
birds, varying in size, plumage and voice, but all passing their time in 
a similar manner, and furnished with the same powers for providing 
food and a safe retreat for themselves and their young. The whole 
lake was covered with parties fishing or sporting, and resounded with 
their loud cries; while the islands were filled with their nests, and 
new broods of young were continually coming forth, and launchingr 

K. 



riB COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

upon the surface of the waters. One day Intlur's curiosity hiving lea 
him at a distance from his companions to the woody border of the lake, 
he was near paying dear for his heeJlessness ; fjr a fox, th.it lay in 
wait among the bushes, sprang upon him, and it was with the utmost 
difficulty, and not without the loss of some feathers, that he broke fro.u 
his hold. 

Summer now drawing to an enJ, the vast congregation of water- 
fowl began to break up ; and large bodies of them daily took their 
way southwards, to pass the winter in climites where the waters are 
never so frozen as to become uninhibitable by the farthered race. 
The wild geese to whom Indur belongeJ, proceede.l with their young 
ones by long daily journeys across Sweden, the Baltic sea, Poland 
and Turkey, to Lesser Asia, and finished their journey at the cele- 
brated plains on the banks of the Cayster, a noted resort for their species 
ever since the age of Homer. Here they soon recruited from the fa 
tigue of their march, and enjoyeJ themselves in the deU^ious climate 
till winter. This season, though here extremely mil J, yet miking 
the means of sustenance somewhat scarce, they were obliged to maka 
foraging excursions to the cultivated lands in the neighboarhooJ. 
Having committed great depredations upon a field of young wheat, 
the owner spread a net on the grounJ, in which Fndur, with several 
of his companions, had the misfortune to be caught No mercy waa 
shown them, but as they were taken out, one by one, their necks were 
all broken. 

EXERCISE CIV. 
Indur was not immediately sensible of the next change he un 
derwent, which was into a dormouse, fast asleep in his hole at the fooi; 
of a bush. As it was in a country where the winters are pretty 
severe, he did not awake for some weeks ; when, a thaw having 
taken place, and the sun beginning to warm the earth, he uaioileJ 
himself one day, stretched, opened his eyes, and not being able to 
make out where he was, he roused a female companion wh>m ha 
found by his side. When she was suflijiently awakened, a:id the} 
both began to feel hungry^, she le.l the way to a migizine of nuts and 
acorns, where they mide a comfortable meal, an J soon fell asleep again. 
This nap having lasted a few days, they awoke a second time, and 
aaviog again eaten, they veatured to crawl to the mouth of their 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 219 

hole, where, pulling away some withered grass and leaves, they peeped 
out into the open air. After taking a turn or two in tlie sua, they 
grew chill, and went down again, stopping up the entrance after theai. 
The cold weather returning, they took another long nap, till at length, 
spring being fairly set in, they roused in earnest, and began to niik« 
daily excursions abroad. Their winter stock of provisions being 
now exhausted, they were for some time reduced to great straits, 
and o])liged to dig for roots and pignuts. Their fare was mended as 
the season advanced, and they made a nest near the bottom of a tree, 
where they brought up a young family. They never ranged far from 
homo, nor ascended the higher branches of the tree, and passed a great 
part of their time in sleep, even during the midst of summer. When 
autumn came, they were busily employed in collecting the nuts, 
acorns, and other dry fruits that fell from the trees, and laying them 
up in their storehouse under ground. One day, as InJur was closely 
engaged in this occupation, at some distance from his dwelling, he 
was seized by a wild cat, which, after tormenting him for a time, gave 
him a gripe, and put him out of his pain. 

EXKRCISE CV. 
From one of the smallest and most defenceless of animals, Indur 
found himself instantly chuiged into a mijestic elsp'tmt, in a lofty 
forest of the isle of Cevlon. Elited with this wonderful advancement 
in the scale of creation, he stalked along with conscious dignity, and 
surveyed with pleasing wonder his o.vn form and that of his com- 
panions, together with the rich scenery of the ever verdmit woods, 
which perfumed the air with their spicy odour, and lifted their tall 
heads to the clouds. Here, fearing no injury, and not viesiring to do 
any, the gigantic herd roamed at large, feeding on the green branches 
which they tore down with their trunks, bathing in deep rivers during 
the heat of the day, and reposing in the depths of the forests, reclined 
against the massy trunks of trees by night. It was long before Indur 
met with any adventure that could lead him to doubt his security. 
But one day, having penetrated into a close entangled thicket, ha 
es{)ied, lurking under the thick covert, a grim tiger, whose eyes 
flashed rage and fury. Though the tiger was one of the largest of 
his species, yet his bulk was trifling compared to that of an elephant, 
a single foot of which seemed sufficiant to crush him; yet the fierce- 



220 COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 



ness and cruelty of his looks, his angry growl, and grinning teeth, 
struck some terror into Indur. There was little time, however, for 
reflection ; for when Indur had advanced a single step, the tiger, set- 
ting up a roar, sprang to meet him, attempting to seize his lifted 
trunk. Indur was dexterous enough to receive him upon one of 
his tusks, and exerting ali his strength, threw the tiger to a great 
distance; he was somewhat stunned by the fall, but recovering, re- 
newed the assault with redoubled fury. Indur again, and a third 
time, threw him off; after which the tiger, turning about, bounded away 
into the midst of the thicket. Indur drew back, and rejoined his com- 
panions, with some abatement in the confidence he had placed in his 
size and strength, which had not protected him from undergoing so 
dangerous an attack. 

EXERCISE CVI. 
Soon after, he joined the rest of the herd in an expedition beyond 
the bounds of the forest, to make depredations on some fields of maize. 
They committed great havoc, devouring part, but tearing up and 
trampling down much more ; when the inhabitants, taking the alarm, 
assembled in great numbers, and with fierce shouts and flaming 
brands, drove them back to the woods. Not contented with this, they 
were resolved to make them pay for the mischief they had done, by 
taking some prisoners. For this purpose, they enclosed a large space 
among the trees with strong posts and stakes, bringing it to a narrower 
and narrower compass, and ending at last in a passage only capable 
of admitting one elephant at a time. This was divided by strong cross- 
bars, which would lift up and down, into several apartments. They 
then sent out some tame female elephants, bred to the business, 
who, approaching the herd of wild ones, inveigled the males to follow 
them towards the enclosures. Indur was among the first who was di^- 
coyed by their artifices ; and with some others following heedlessly, ho 
got into the narrowest part of the inclosure, opposite to the passage. 
Here they stood awhile doubting whether they should go further. 
But the females leading the way, and uttering the cry of invtation, 
they ventured at length to follow. When a sufficient number was in 
the passage, the bars were let down by men placed for the purpose, 
and the elephants were fairly caught ir. a trap. As soon as they were 
sensible of their situation, they fell into a fit of rage, and with all their 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 221 

efforts endeavoured to brealc through. But the hunters throwing 
nooses over them, bound thein fast with strong ropes and chains to 
the posts on each side, and thus kept them without food or sleep for 
three days ; when, being exhausted with hunger and fatigue, they 
ga^"e signs of sufficient tameness. They were now let out one by one, 
and bound, each of them, to two large tame elephants, with riders on 
their backs, and thus without resistance were led away close prisoners. 
They were then put into separate stables, and by proper discipline 
were presently rendered quite tame and gentle. 

EXERCISE CVII. 

Not long after, Indur, with five more, was sent over from Ceylon 
to the continent of India, and sold to one of the princes of the country. 
He was now trained to all the services elephants are there employed 
in: which were, to carry persons on his back in a kind of sedan or 
Utter, to draw cannon, ships, and other great weights, to kneel and rise 
at command, make obeisance to his lord, and perform all the motior>s 
and attitudes he was ordered. Thus he Uved a long time, well fed 
and caressed, clothed in costly trappings on days of ceremony, and 
contributing to the pomp of eastern royalty. At length a war broke 
out, and Indur came to be employed in a different scene. After propei 
training, he was marched, with a number of his fellows, into the field, 
bearing on his back a small wooden tow-er, in which were placed some 
soldiers, with a small field-piece. They soon came in sight of tha 
enemy, and both sides were drawn up for battle. Indur and the rest 
were urged forwards by theii* leaders, wondering at the same time at 
the scene in which they were engaged, so contrary to their nature and 
manners. Presently all was involved in smoke and fire. The ele- 
phants advancing, soon put to flight those who were drawn up before 
them ; but their career was stopped by a battery of cannon, which 
played furiously against them. Their vast bodies offered a fair mark 
to the balls, which presently struck down some, and wounded others. 
Indur received a shot on one of his tusks, which broke it, and put him 
to such pain and affright, that, turning about, he ran with all speed 
over the plain ; and falling in with a body of their own infantr}*, ha 
burst through, trampling down wKole ranks, and filling them with 
terror and confusion. His leader having now lost all command over 
him, and finding him hurtful only to his own party, applied the sharp 



2^2 COLLOrS PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

instrument he carried to the nape of his neck, and driving it in witn all 
his force, pierced his spinal marrow, so that he fell lifeless to the 
ground 

EXERCISE CVIII. 
In the next stage of his existence, Indur, to his great surprise, found 
oven the vast bulk of the elephant prodigiously exceeded : for he was 
now a whale of the largest species, rolling in the midst of the arctic 
seas. As he darted along, the lash of his tail made whirlpools in the 
mighty deep. When he opened his immense jaws, he drew in a flood 
of brine, which, on rising to the surface, he spouted out again -n a 
rushing fountain, that rose high in the air with the noise of a mighty 
cataract. All the other inhabitants of the ocean seemed as nothing to 
him. He swallowed, almost without knowing it, whole shoals of the 
smaller kinds; and the larger swiftly turned aside at his approach. 
" Now," he cried to himself, " whatever other evils may await me, I 
am certainly secure from the molestation of other animals ; for what is 
the creature that can dare to cope with me, or measure his strength 
with mine? Having said this, he saw swimming near him a fish not 
a quarter of his length, armed with a dreadful row of teeth. This waa 
a grampus, which directly flying upon Indur, fastened on him, and 
made his great teeth meet in his flesh. Indur roared with pain, and 
lashed the sea till it was all in a foam ; but could neither reach nor 
shake off his cruel foe. He rolled over and over, rose and sank, and 
exerted all his boasted strength; but to no purpose. At length the 
grampus quitted his hold, and left him not a little mortified with the 
adventure. This was, however, forgotten, and Indur received pleasure 
from his new situation as he roamed thiough the boundless fields of 
ocean, now diving to its very bottom, now shooting swiftly to the sur- 
face, and sporting with his companions in unwieldy gambols. Hav- 
ing chosen a mate, he took his course with her southwards, and ia 
due time brought up two young ones, of whom he was extremely 
fond. The summer season being arrived, be more frequently than 
usual *rose to the surface, and basking in the sunbeams, floa'.ed un- 
moved with a large part of his huge body above the waves. As he 
was thus one day enjoying a profound sleep, he was awakened by a 
sharp instrument penetrating deep into his back. Instantly he sprang 
away with the swiftness of lightning, and feeling the weapon still 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 223 

Gticking, hedivod into the recesses of the deep, and stayed tliere till want 
of air obliged him to ascend to the surface. Here another harpoon 
was plunged into him, the smart of which again made him fly from 
his unseen foes; but after a shorter course, he was again compelled to 
rise, much weakened by the loss of blood, which, gushing in a torrent, 
'.inged the waters as he passed. Another wound was inflicted, which 
soon brought him almost lifeless to the surface: and the line fastened 
to the first harpoon being now pulled in, this enormous creature was 
brought, an unresisting prey, to the side of a ship, where he was soon 
quite despatched, and then cut to pieces. 

EXERCISE CIX. 
The soul of this huge carcass had next a much narrower lodging, 
for fndur was changed into a bee, which, with a great mulitude of its 
young companions, was on flight in search of a new settlement, their 
parents having driven then> out of the hive, which was unable to con 
tain them all. After a rambling excursion, the queen, by whom all 
their motions were directed, settled on the branch of a lofty tree. They 
all immediately clustered round her, and soon formed a large black 
bunch, depending from the bough. A man presently planting a lad- 
der, ascended with a bee-hive, and swept them in. After they were 
quietly settled in their new habitation, they were placed on a stand ia 
the garden, along with some other colonies, and left to begin their la- 
bours. Every fine morning, as soon sw the sun was up, the greater 
part of them sallied forth, and roamed over the garden and the neigh- 
bouring fields in search of fresh and fragrant flowers. They first 
collected a quantity of gluey matter, with which they lined all the 
inside of their houses. Then they brought wax, and began to mike 
their cells, building them with the utmost regularity, though it was 
their first attempt, and they had no teacher. As fast as they were 
built, some were filled with liquid honey gathered from the nectaries 
of flowers : and as they filled the cells, they sealed them up with a 
thin covering of wax. In other cells the queen bee deposited her eggs, 
which were to supply a new progeny for tne ensuing year. Nothing 
could be a inoj-e pleasing sight, thin to behold on a sunshiny day the 
insects continually going forth to their labour, while others were as 
constantly arriving at the mouth of the hole, either with yellow balls 
of wax under their thighs, or full of the hcney which they had drawn 



COLLOT'S PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 



in with their trunks, for the puspose of spoutinj it out into the cells 
of the honeycomb. Indur felt much delight in this useful and active 
way of life, and was always one of the first abroad at dawn, and latest 
home in the evening. On rainy and foggy days they stayed at home, 
and employed themselves in finishing their cells, and all the necessary 
work, within doors ; and Indur, though indued with human reason, 
could not but admire the readiness with which he and the rest formed 
the most regular plans of work, all corresponding in design and execu- 
tion, guided by instinct alone. 

The end of autumn now approaching, the bees had filled their 
combs with honey ; and nothing moie being to be got abroad, they 
stayed within doors, passing most of their time in sleep. They ate of 
their provisions with great frugality ; and all their meals were made in 
public, none daring to make free with the common stock by himself. 
The owner of the hives now came and took them one by one into 
his hands, that he might judge by the weight whether or not they 
were full of honey. I'hat in which Indur was, proved to be one of 
the heaviest; and it was therefore resolved to take the contents. For 
this purpose, one cold night, when the bees were all fast asleep, the 
hive was placed over a hole in the ground, in which were put brim- 
stone matches set on fire. The fumes rose into the hive, and soon 
suftbcated great part of the bees, and stupefied the rest, so that they all 
fell from the combs. Indur was amongst the dead. 

EXERCISE ex. 

He soon revived in the form of a young rabbit in a spacious war- 
ren. This was like a populous town ; being every where hollowed by 
burrows running deep under ground, and each inhabited by one or 
more families. In the evening the warren was covered with a vast 
number of rabbits, old and young, some feeding, others frisking about, 
ind pursuing one another in wanton sport. At the least alarm, they 
all hurried into the holes nearest them ; and were in an instant safe 
from enemies, who either could not enter their burrows, or could not 
get at them there on account of the numerous ways and turnings in 
the earth, communicating with each other, so as to afford easy means 
of escape. Indur delighted much in this secure and social life ; and 
'aking a mate, was soon the father of a numerous offspring. Several 
of the little ones, however, not being sufficiently careful, fell a prav 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 835 

either to hawks and crows, continually hovering over the warren, or 
to cats, foxes, and other wild quadrupeds, which used every art to catch 
them at a distance from their holes. Indur himself ran several ha- 
zards. He was once very near being caught by a little dog trained 
for the purpose, which kept playing round for a considerable time, not 
seeming to attend to the rabbits, till having got near, he all at once 
'darted into the midst of them. Another time he received some sho* 
from a sportsman who lay on the watch behind the hedge adjoining 
the warren. 

The number of rabbits here was so great, that a hard winter coming 
on, which killed most of the vegetables, or buried them deep under 
the snow, they were reduced to great straits, and many were famished 
to death. Some turnips and hay, however, which were laid for them, 
preserved the greater part. The approach of spring renewed their 
sport and pleasure ; and Indur was made the father of another family. 
One night, however, was fatal to them all. As they were sleeping, 
they were alarmed by the attack of a ferret ; and running with great 
speed to the mouth of their burrow to escape it, they were all caught 
in nets placed over their holes. Indur, with the rest, was despatched 
by a blow on the back of the neck, and his body was sent to the 
nearest market town. 

EXERCISE CXI. 

His next change was into a young mastiff, brought up in a farm- 
yard. Having nearly acquired his full size, he was sent as a present 
to a gentleman in the neighbourhood, who wanted a faithful guard 
for his house and ground. Indur presently attached himself to his 
master and all his family, and showed every mark of a noble and 
generous nature. Though fierce as a lion whenever he thought the 
persons or properties of his friends invaded, he was as gentle as a 
lamb at other times, and would patiently suffer any kind of freedoms 
from those he loved. He permitted the children of the house to lug 
him about, ride on his back, and use him as roughly as their little 
hands were capable of; never, even when hurt, showing his dis- 
pleasure further than by a low growl. He was extremely indulgent 
to all the other animals of his species in the yard ; and when abroad, 
would treat the impertinent barking of little dogs with silent con- 
15 



a26 COLLOrS PROGRESSIVE FRENCH 

tempt. Once, indeed, being provoked beyond bearing, not only by 
the noise, but by the snaps of a malicious whelp, he suddenly seized 
him in his open mouth ; but when the bystanders thought that the 
poor cur was going instantly to be devoured, they were equally sur- 
prised and diverted at seeing Indur go to the side of a muddy ditch, 
and drop his antagonist unhurt into the middle of it 

He had, however, more serious conflicts to sustain. He was ac- 
customed to attend the servant on market days to the neighbouring 
town ; when it was his office to guard the provision cart, while the 
man was making his purchases in the shops. On these occasions, 
the boldest dogs in the street would sometimes make an onset in a 
body ; and while some of them were engaging Indur, others would be 
mounting the cart, and pulling down the meat baskets. Indur had 
much ado to defend himself and the provisions ; however, he never 
fjiiled to make some of the assailants pay dcarlj for their impudence ; 
and by his loud barking, he summoned to hv? assistance hts fellow- 
servant, who came in time to prevent their «i?p*?r-dations. 

EXERCISE CXII. 

At length his courage was exerted on the most important service to 
which it could be applied. His master, returning home at night, was 
attacked near his own house by three armed rullisms. Indur heard 
his voice calling for help, and instantly flew to his relief. He seized 
one of the villains by the throat, brought him to the ground, and 
presently disabled him. His master, in the mean thzo, was keeping 
off the other two vsdth a large stick ; but had received several wounds 
with a cutlass ; and one of the men had presented a plttol, and was 
just on the point of firing. At this moment, Irv]ur, leasing his van- 
quished foe on the ground, rushed forward, and seising the man's 
arm, made him drop the pistol. The master took it up -; on which 
the other robber fled. He now advanced to him with wham Indur 
was engaged, and fired the pistol at him. The ball broke tl« man's 
arm, and from thence entered the body of Indur, and mortally 
wounded him. He fell, but had the satisfaction of seeing his master 
remain lord of the field ; and the servants rww coming up, made 
prisoners of the two wounded robbers^ The master threw himself by 
the side of Indur, and expressed (he warmest concern at the accident 



GRAMMAR AND EXERCISES. 227 

which had made him the cause of the death of the faithful animal 
that had preserved his life. Indur died licking his hand. 

So generous a nature was now no longer to be annexed to a brutal 
form. Indur, awaking as it were from a dream, found himself again 
in the happy region he had formerly inhabited, and recommenced the 
•nocent life of a Brahmin. He cherished the memory of his trans- 
migrations, and handed them down to posterity, in a relation from 
whence the preceding account has been extracted. — Parbauld, 



THJS BND. 



^^ 



A 



'su 






Deacidified using the Bookkeeper process. 
Neutralizing agent: Magnesium Oxide 
Treatment Date: Sept. 2006 

PreservationTechnologies 

A WORLD LEADER IN PAPER PRESERVATION 

1 1 1 Thomson Park Drive 
Cranberry Townshp, PA 16066 



UBRARY OF CONGRESS 




003113 435 3 



